all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User manual 3 of 3 | Users Manual | 2.20 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.03 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 1 of 3 | Users Manual | 3.47 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.94 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 2 of 3 | Users Manual | 5.54 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.92 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users manual 5 | Users Manual | 1.26 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | External Photos | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
1 2 | User manual 3 of 3 | Users Manual | 2.20 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 |
ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.2 Ordering data Table 8- 15 Ordering data for MDS D139 MDS D139 Table 8- 16 Ordering data for MDS D139 accessory Spacer Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 47 mm Article number 6GT2600-0AA10 Article number 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 8.7.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the MDS D139/D339 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 30 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using spacers (see "Ordering data (Page 441)"). Mounting on metal 30 mm h Figure 8-14 Mounting the MDS D139/D339 on metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 301 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 Flush-mounting It is possible to mount the MDS D139/D339 in metal. With large antennas, for example ANT D5, this leads to a reduction of ranges. 30 mm 100 mm h a Figure 8-15 Flush-mounting of the MDS D139/D339 in metal with spacer Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. Cleaning the mobile data memory Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders (Page 97). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.7.4 302 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 17 Technical specifications for MDS D139 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field SIMATIC MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PPS Black 30 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 +140 C from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance
-40 to +220 at +200 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 6000 cycles during storage
-40 to +100 at +220 : Tested up to 2000 hours or 2000 cycles SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 303 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 Degree of protection to EN 60529 6GT2600-0AA10 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 500 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 85 x 15 mm 50 g 1 x M5 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damag-
ing the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient). 8.7.6 Use of the MDS D139 in hazardous areas The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-15:2005 EN 61241-0:2006 EN 61241-1:2004 304 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Identification ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 II 3 G Ex nA II T2 II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP68 T 220C KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X Ta: -25 ... +220C WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques Note Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen fr den Ex-Schutzbereich:
a) Der Einsatz des Gertes in der Nhe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist untersagt. b) Das Gert ist mechanisch geschtzt zu montieren. c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen. d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface. d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex :
a) L'utilisation de l'appareil prs de processus gnrant de fortes charges est interdite. b) L'appareil doit tre mont de manire tre protg mcaniquement. c) Le montage doit tre effectu sur un socle conducteur mis la terre. d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 305 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.7 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D139 Figure 8-16 Dimensional drawing of MDS D139 Dimensions in mm 306 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.8 MDS D160 8.8.1 MDS D160 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Thanks to its rugged packaging, the MDS D160 is a transponder that can be used under extreme environmental conditions. It is washable, heat-resistant and resistant to all chemicals generally used in the laundry process. Typical applications are, for example:
Rented work clothing Hotel laundry Surgical textiles Hospital clothing Dirt collection mats Clothing for nursing homes/hostels 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.8.2 Information for RF300 compatibility Note Compatibility with SIMATIC RF300 depending on MLFB number Only the MDS D160 with MLFB 6GT2600-0AB10 is compatible with SIMATIC RF300. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 307 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 8.8.3 Ordering data Table 8- 18 Ordering data for MDS D160 MDS D160 Table 8- 19 Ordering data for MDS D160 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-0AB10 Article number 6GT2690-0AG00 8.8.4 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Transponder Metal carrier h Figure 8-17 Mounting the MDS D160 on metal with spacer Spacer 10 mm Note Going below the minimum distance (h) If the minimum distance (h) is not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting 308 Flush-mounting of the MDS D160 in metal is not permitted!
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 8.8.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 20 Technical specifications for the MDS D160 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field SIMATIC MDS D160 6GT2600-0AB10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PPS beige 10 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 +85 C
-40 +175 C from +125 : for 1000 hours, 20% reduction of the limit distance at +175 : 100 washing cycles tested at +220 : Tested once for up to 30 seconds during storage Mechanical strength Isostatic pressure Axial pressure Radial pressure
-25 to +100 300 bar for 5 min 1000 N for 10 s 1000 N for 10 s SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 309 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Resistance to chemicals MDS lifespan Degree of protection Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-0AB10 All chemicals normally used in the washing pro-
cess At least 100 wash cycles IP68 24 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K 400 m/s2 18 ms; 6 axes; 2000 repetitions/h 100 m/s2 10 ... 2000 Hz; 3 axes; 2.5 h Not permitted 16 x 3 mm 1.2 g Patched Sewn in Glued 2) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. Note Regeneration time between washing cycles The regeneration time for the MDS D160 between washing cycles must be at least 24 hours. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 310 8.8.6 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D160 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-18 Dimensional drawing of MDS D160 Dimensional drawing of spacer Dimensions in mm Figure 8-19 Dimensional drawing of spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 311 ISO transponder 8.9 MDS D165 8.9 MDS D165 8.9.1 Features MDS D165 (special version) Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identifi-
cation. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP65 8.9.2 Ordering data Table 8- 21 Ordering data for MDS D165 MDS D165 (special version ISO-CARD) Article number 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) 8.9.3 Technical data Table 8- 22 Technical specifications for MDS D165 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID SIMATIC MDS D165 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 8 bytes 312 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.9 MDS D165 User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage 112 bytes EEPROM 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided trans-
fer adhesive on sili-
con paper Top Inlay Antenna Bottom White 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 ... +80 C
-25 to +80
+20 to +30 Can be stored for 2 years, determined by the durability of the adhesive. IP65 Degree of protection Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 86 x 54 x 0.3 mm 1 g Glued with self-adhesive label 1) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 313 ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 8.9.4 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-20 Dimension drawing of MDS D165 8.10 MDS D200 Features 8.10.1 MDS D200 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection From simple identification such as elec-
tronic barcode replace-
ment/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transpond-
ers (MDS D) (Page 56). Yes, with spacer 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology IP67 314 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.10.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 Table 8- 23 Ordering data for MDS D200 MDS D200 (special version ISO-CARD) Article number 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 Table 8- 24 Ordering data for MDS D200 accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 8.10.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 20 mm Transponder h Metal Figure 8-21 Mounting of the MDS D200 on metal with spacer Non-metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 315 ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 Flush-mounting 20 mm 20 mm Transponder a h Metal Figure 8-22 Flush-mounting of MDS D200 in metal with spacer Non-metal Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. 8.10.4 Technical data Table 8- 25 Technical specifications for MDS D200 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory SIMATIC MDS D200 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 8 bytes 256 bytes EEPROM 316 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 OTP memory Read cycles (at < 25 ) Write cycles (at < 25 ) Data retention time (at < 25 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PET White 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-20 to +60
-20 to +60
-20 to +60 IP67 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85 x 54 x 0.8 mm 5 g Fixing pocket Glued 2) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 317 ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 8.10.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-23 Dimension drawing of MDS D200 318 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.11 MDS D261 Features 8.11.1 MDS D261 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identifi-
cation. 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP65 8.11.2 Ordering data Table 8- 26 Ordering data for MDS D261 MDS D261 Article number 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) 8.11.3 Technical data Table 8- 27 Technical specifications of MDS D261 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID SIMATIC MDS D261 6GT2600-1AA01-0AX0 8 bytes SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 319 ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field During transportation and storage Degree of protection Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) 256 bytes EEPROM 6GT2600-1AA01-0AX0 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided trans-
fer adhesive on sili-
con paper Top Inlay Antenna Bottom White 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-20 ... +60 C
-20 +85 C
+20 to +30 Can be stored for 2 years, determined by the durability of the adhesive IP65 55 x 55 x 0.3 mm 1 g Glued with self-adhesive label 1) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 320 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.11.4 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-24 Dimension drawing of MDS D261 8.12 MDS D324 Characteristics 8.12.1 MDS D324 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Production and distribution logistics and product identification Can also be used in harsh environ-
ments under extreme environmental conditions (e.g. with higher temperature load). 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO tran-
sponders (MDS D) (Page 56)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 321 ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 8.12.2 Ordering data Table 8- 28 Ordering data MDS D324 MDS D324 Table 8- 29 Ordering data MDS D324 accessories Spacer 8.12.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Article number 6GT2600-3AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 15 mm h Figure 8-25 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer 322 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-26 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.12.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 30 Technical specifications of MDS D324 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) SIMATIC MDS D324 6GT2600-3AC00 8 bytes 992 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 323 ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 6GT2600-3AC00 Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +125
-40 to +140
-40 to +140 IP67 IPx9K Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued 3) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2 3) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed.
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 324 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.12.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Figure 8-27 Dimension drawing of MDS D324 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 325 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.1 MDS D339 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Applications in production automation with high temperature demands (up to +220 C) Typical application areas:
Paintshops and their preparatory treatments Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85 C Other applications with higher temperatures 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.13.2 Ordering data Table 8- 31 Ordering data for MDS D339 MDS D339 Table 8- 32 Ordering data for MDS D339 accessories Spacer Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 47 mm Article number 6GT2600-3AA10 Article number 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 326 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.13.3 Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Direct mounting of the MDS D139/D339 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 30 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using spacers (see "Ordering data (Page 326)"). Mounting on metal 30 mm h Figure 8-28 Mounting the MDS D139/D339 on metal with spacer Flush-mounting It is possible to mount the MDS D139/D339 in metal. With large antennas, for example ANT D5, this leads to a reduction of ranges. 30 mm 100 mm h a Figure 8-29 Flush-mounting of the MDS D139/D339 in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 327 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.4 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. Cleaning the mobile data memory Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the cleaning agents listed in the section "Chemical resistance of the MDS". 8.13.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 33 Technical specifications of MDS D339 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material SIMATIC MDS D339 6GT2600-3AA10 8 bytes 992 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PPS 328 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 6GT2600-3AA10 Black 30 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +100
-40 to +220 from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance at +200 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 6000 cycles at +220 : Tested up to 2000 hours or 2000 cycles
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 500 m/s2 Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 85 x 15 mm 50 g 1 x M5 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damag-
ing the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 329 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.6 Use of the MDS D339 in hazardous areas The MDS D339 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-15:2005 EN 61241-0:2006 EN 61241-1:2004 Identification II 3 G Ex nA II T6 Ii 3 D Ex tD A22 IP68 T 210C KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques 330 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Note Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen fr den Ex-Schutzbereich:
a) Der Einsatz des Gertes in der Nhe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist untersagt. b) Das Gert ist mechanisch geschtzt zu montieren. c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen. d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface. d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex :
a) L'utilisation de l'appareil prs de processus gnrant de fortes charges est interdite. b) L'appareil doit tre mont de manire tre protg mcaniquement. c) Le montage doit tre effectu sur un socle conducteur mis la terre. d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 331 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.7 Dimensional drawing MDS D339 Figure 8-30 Dimension drawing of the MDS D339 Dimensions in mm 332 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.14 MDS D400 Features 8.14.1 MDS D400 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Simple identification such as electronic barcode re-
placement/supplements, from warehouse and distribu-
tion logistics right through to product identification. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)"
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67 8.14.2 Ordering data Table 8- 34 Ordering data of MDS D400 MDS D400 Table 8- 35 Ordering data of MDS D400 accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2600-4AD00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 333 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 8.14.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal It is possible to mount the MDS D400 on metal. 20 mm Transponder h Metal Figure 8-31 Mounting of the MDS D400 on metal with spacer Non-metal 334 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Flush-mounted in metal ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 20 mm 20 mm Transponder a h Metal Figure 8-32 Flush-mounting of MDS D400 in metal with spacer Non-metal Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, this will result in a reduction of the field data. 8.14.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 36 Technical specifications for MDS D400 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory SIMATIC MDS D400 6GT2600-4AD00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 335 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 OTP memory Read cycles (at < 25 ) Write cycles (at < 25 ) Data retention time (at < 25 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AD00 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PVC White 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-20 to +60
-20 to +60
-20 to +60 IP67 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85 x 54 x 0.8 mm 5 g Fixing lug Glued 2) 1) The values for vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 336 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.14.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 Figure 8-33 Dimensional drawing MDS D400 (dimensions in mm) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 337 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 8.15 MDS D421 8.15.1 MDS D421 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.15.2 Ordering data The MDS D421 is designed for tool coding in accordance with DIN 69873. It can be used wherever small data carriers and exact posi-
tioning are required, e.g. tool identification, workpiece hold-
ers. The rugged housing of the MDS D421 means that it can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without prob-
lems. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K Table 8- 37 Ordering data of MDS D421 MDS D421 Article number 6GT2600-4AE00 338 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.15.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Figure 8-34 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 on metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-35 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 339 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Flush-mounting of the MDS in metal with tools Figure 8-36 Flush-mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal with tools 0.5 x 45 10 (-0.04... -0.13) 4.5 (-0 ... -0.1) b1 d1 t1 All dimensions in mm b2 d2 t2 0.3 x 45 or R0.3 10 (+0.09... 0) 4.6 (+0.2 ... 0) Note Installation instruction The MDS should not protrude out of the locating hole; it must be flush with the outside contour. The mounting instructions of the MDS and the conditions associated with the application
(e.g. peripheral speed, temperature, and use of coolant) must be observed during the installation. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in transponder using your fingers; with antenna side to the outside (see figure above) Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of the transponder in metal with tools 340 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Installation examples ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Figure 8-37 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a steep cone Figure 8-38 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a stud bolt 8.15.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 38 Technical specifications for the MDS D421 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color SIMATIC MDS D421 6GT2600-4AE00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 341 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 0 mm Inductive, without battery 6GT2600-4AE00
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Not permitted Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 10 x 4.5 mm Approx. 1 g Glued 2) 8.15.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-39 Dimension drawing of MDS D421 All dimensions in mm 342 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.16 MDS D422 8.16.1 MDS D422 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.16.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 Identification of metallic workpiece holders, workpieces or containers 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56). Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 39 Ordering data of MDS D422 MDS D422 A screw-in aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit Article number 6GT2600-4AF00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 343 ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 8.16.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-40 Mounting of MDS D422 in metal Mounting information for screws You can screw the transponder into a pre-drilled threaded hole using the screw-in aid. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in MDS D422 using your fingers; with antenna to the outside Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of MDS D422 in metal with tools 8.16.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 40 Technical specifications for the MDS D422 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration SIMATIC MDS D422 6GT2600-4AF00 344 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 8 bytes 6GT2600-4AF00 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
285 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF; brass nickel plated Black/silver 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 500 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 20 x 6 mm 13 g Glued 2) 1 x transponder thread M20 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 345 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 8.16.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-41 Dimensional drawing of MDS D422 8.17 MDS D423 8.17.1 MDS D423 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.17.2 Ordering data Identification of metallic workpiece holders, work-
pieces or containers, production automation 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 41 Ordering data of MDS D423 MDS D423 Article number 6GT2600-4AA00 Table 8- 42 Ordering data of MDS D423 accessories Fixing hood RF330T / MDS D423 Article number 6GT2690-0AE00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 346 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 8.17.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the MDS D423 on metal is possible. Figure 8-42 Mounting the MDS D423 on metal Flush-mounted in metal It is possible to mount the MDS D423 in metal. a 10 mm Figure 8-43 Flush-mounting of the MDS D423 in metal with 10 mm clearance SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 347 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 Figure 8-44 Flush-mounting of the MDS D423 in metal without clearance Note Reduction of the write/read range Note that when the device is flush-mounted in metal without a surrounding clearance 10 mm, the write/read range is significantly reduced. 8.17.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 43 Technical specifications of MDS D423 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material SIMATIC MDS D423 6GT2600-4AA00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Plastic PPS 348 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 6GT2600-4AA00 Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 500 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Pressure resistance Low pressure resistant vacuum dryer: up to 20 mbar Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting High pressure resistant
(see degree of protection IPx9K) Not permitted 30 x 8 mm 15 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 349 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 8.17.5 Dimensional drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-45 Dimension drawing for MDS D423 8.18 MDS D424 8.18.1 MDS D424 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 350 Production and distribution logistics as well as in assembly and production lines, can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problem 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 8.18.2 Ordering data Table 8- 44 Ordering data of MDS D424 MDS D424 Table 8- 45 Ordering data of MDS D424 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-4AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 8.18.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 15 mm h Figure 8-46 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 351 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-47 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.18.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 46 Technical specifications for the MDS D424 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) SIMATIC MDS D424 6GT2600-4AC00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years 352 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 6GT2600-4AC00 Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g Glued 2) 1x screw M3 3) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) 3 The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed.
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw-locking varnish. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 353 ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 8.18.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-48 Dimension drawing of MDS D424 All dimensions in mm 8.19 MDS D425 8.19.1 MDS D425 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 354 Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector; ideal for mounting on motors, gearboxes, and work-
piece holders Rugged packaging of the MDS D425; can therefore also be used under extreme environmental conditions without prob-
lem 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)". Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.19.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 Table 8- 47 Ordering data of MDS D425 MDS D425 Article number 6GT2600-4AG00 8.19.3 Application example Figure 8-49 Application example 8.19.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 48 Technical specifications for the MDS D425 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory SIMATIC MDS D425 6GT2600-4AG00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 355 ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 6GT2600-4AG00
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 24 x 10 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M6 SW 22; 6 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 356 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.19.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-50 Dimension drawing of MDS D425 8.20 MDS D426 8.20.1 MDS D426 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be deployed in harsh conditions 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56) Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 357 ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 8.20.2 Ordering data Table 8- 49 Ordering data of MDS D426 MDS D426 Table 8- 50 Ordering data of MDS D426 accessories Spacer 8.20.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Article number 6GT2600-4AH00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 h 25 mm Figure 8-51 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer 358 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Flush-mounted in metal ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-52 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer 8.20.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 51 Technical specifications for the MDS D426 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC MDS D426 6GT2600-4AH00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 25 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 359 ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Inductive, without battery 6GT2600-4AH00
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 50 m/s2 20 m/s2 Not permitted 50 x 3.6 mm 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.20.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-53 Dimension drawing of MDS D426 360 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.21 MDS D428 8.21.1 MDS D428 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.21.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting. Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector. The rugged housing of the MDS D428 means that it can also be used in extreme environmental conditions without problems. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)"
Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 52 Ordering data of MDS D428 MDS D428 Article number 6GT2600-4AK00-0AX0 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 361 ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 8.21.3 Application example Figure 8-54 Application example 8.21.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 53 Technical specifications for the MDS D428 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D428 6GT2600-4AK00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years 362 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 6GT2600-4AK00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 24 x 20 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M8 SW 22; 8 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 363 ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 8.21.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-55 Dimension drawing of MDS D428 8.22 MDS D460 8.22.1 MDS D460 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 364 Identification in small assembly lines; can also be used in a harsh in-
dustrial environment 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 8.22.2 Ordering data Table 8- 54 Ordering data of MDS D460 MDS D460 Table 8- 55 Ordering data of MDS D460 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-4AB00 Article number 6GT2690-0AG00 8.22.3 Mounting on metal Mounting option on metal with spacer Transponder Metal Spacer h 10 mm Figure 8-56 Mounting the MDS D460 on metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting Flush-mounting of the MDS D460 in metal is not permitted!
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 365 ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 8.22.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 56 Technical specifications for MDS D460 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC MDS D460 6GT2600-4AB00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 10 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 16 x 3 mm 366 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Weight Type of mounting 3 g Glued 2) With spacer ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 6GT2600-4AB00 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 8.22.5 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D460 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-57 Dimensional drawing of MDS D460 Dimensional drawing of spacer Dimensions in mm Figure 8-58 Dimensional drawing of spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 367 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 8.23 MDS D521 8.23.1 MDS D521 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.23.2 Ordering data The MDS D521 is designed for tool coding according to DIN 69873. It can be used wherever small data carriers and exact positioning are required, e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders. The rugged housing of the MDS D521 means that it can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problems. 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K Table 8- 57 Ordering data for MDS D521 MDS D521 Article number 6GT2600-5AE00 8.23.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Figure 8-59 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 on metal 368 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 Figure 8-60 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal Flush-mounting of the MDS in metal with tools Figure 8-61 Flush-mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal with tools 0.5 x 45 10 (-0.04... -0.13) 4.5 (-0 ... -0.1) b1 d1 t1 All dimensions in mm b2 d2 t2 0.3 x 45 or R0.3 10 (+0.09... 0) 4.6 (+0.2 ... 0) Note Installation instruction The MDS should not protrude out of the locating hole; it must be flush with the outside contour. The mounting instructions of the MDS and the conditions associated with the application
(e.g. peripheral speed, temperature, and use of coolant) must be observed during the installation. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 369 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in transponder using your fingers; with antenna side to the outside (see figure above) Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of the transponder in metal with tools Installation examples Figure 8-62 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a steep cone Figure 8-63 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a stud bolt 8.23.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 58 Technical specifications for MDS D521 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory SIMATIC MDS D521 6GT2600-5AE00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM 370 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 6GT2600-5AE00
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Not permitted Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 10 x 4.5 mm 1 g Glued 2) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 371 ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 8.23.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-64 Dimension drawing of MDS D521 All dimensions in mm 8.24 MDS D522 8.24.1 MDS D522 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.24.2 Ordering data Identification of metallic workpiece holders, work-
pieces or containers 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)."
Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 59 Ordering data for MDS D522 MDS D522 Units in a package: 10 units A mounting aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit. Article number 6GT2600-5AF00 372 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.24.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 Figure 8-65 Mounting of MDS D522 in metal Mounting information for screws You can screw the transponder into a pre-drilled threaded hole using the screw-in aid. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in MDS D522 using your fingers; with antenna to the outside Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of MDS D522 in metal with tools 8.24.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 60 Technical specifications for MDS D522 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration SIMATIC MDS D522 6GT2600-5AF00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 373 ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 8 bytes 6GT2600-5AF00 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
285 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF; brass nickel plated Black/silver 0 mm Inductive, without battery UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 500 m/s2 Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 20 x 6 mm 13 g Glued 2) 1 x transponder thread M20 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 374 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.24.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant Figure 8-66 Dimensional drawing of MDS D522 All dimensions in mm 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.1 Characteristics MDS D522 special version Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.25.2 Ordering data Identification of metallic workpiece holders or work-
pieces 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)."
Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 61 MDS D522 special version MDS D522 special version Units in a package: 10 units A mounting aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit. Article number 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 375 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-67 Flush installation of the MDS D522 special version in metal without clearance 8.25.4 Installation instructions The transponder MDS D522 special version is designed to be mounted once. Note the following instructions when mounting the MDS D522 in a workpiece to avoid damaging the transponder:
Prepare the workpiece according to the following drawing. Using the accompanying mounting aid, press the transponder with uniform and evenly distributed pressure into the drilled hole until the transponder locks in place. Make sure that the transponder does not become tilted. 376 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant Figure 8-68 Dimension drawing: Workpiece drill hole for mounting the MDS D522 special version SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 377 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 62 Technical data of MDS D522 special version Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC MDS D522 special version 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 500 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 18 (+0.1) 5.2 mm Approx. 1.2 g Clipping in once (with accompanying tool) Not permitted 378 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.25.6 Dimensional drawing ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant Figure 8-69 Dimension drawing MDS D522 special version All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 379 ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 8.26 MDS D524 8.26.1 MDS D524 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Production and distribution logistics as well as in assem-
bly and production lines, can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problem 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K 8.26.2 Ordering data Table 8- 63 Ordering data for MDS D524 MDS D524 Table 8- 64 Ordering data of MDS D524 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-5AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 380 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.26.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 15 mm h Figure 8-70 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-71 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 381 ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.26.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 65 Technical specifications for MDS D524 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage SIMATIC MDS D524 6GT2600-5AC00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 382 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 6GT2600-5AC00 Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 IPx9K Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g Glued 2) 1x screw M3 3) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 3
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw-locking varnish. 8.26.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-72 Dimensional drawing of MDS D524 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 383 ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 8.27 MDS D525 8.27.1 MDS D525 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector; ideal for mounting on motors, gearboxes, and work-
piece holders Rugged packaging of the MDS D525; can therefore also be used under extreme environmental conditions without prob-
lems 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)". Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.27.2 Ordering data Table 8- 66 Ordering data for MDS D525 MDS D525 Article number 6GT2600-5AG00 384 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.27.3 Application example ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 Figure 8-73 Application example 8.27.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 67 Technical specifications for MDS D525 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D525 6GT2600-5AG00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 385 ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-5AG00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black
> 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 24 x 10 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M6 SW 22; 6 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 386 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.27.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 Figure 8-74 Dimensional drawing of MDS D525 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 387 ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 8.28 MDS D526 8.28.1 MDS D526 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be de-
ployed in harsh conditions 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 8.28.2 Ordering data Table 8- 68 Ordering data for MDS D526 MDS D526 Table 8- 69 Ordering data for MDS D526 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-5AH00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 388 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.28.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 h 25 mm Figure 8-75 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer Flush-mounted in metal h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-76 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 389 ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 8.28.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 70 Technical specifications for MDS D526 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) SIMATIC MDS D526 6GT2600-5AH00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM 32 bytes
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 50 x 3.6 mm 390 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Weight Type of mounting 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 6GT2600-5AH00 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.28.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-77 Dimensional drawing of MDS D526 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 391 ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 8.29 MDS D528 8.29.1 MDS D528 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector The rugged housing of the MDS D528 means that it can also be used in extreme environmental conditions without problems. 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)"
Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.29.2 Ordering data Table 8- 71 Ordering data for MDS D528 MDS D528 Article number 6GT2600-5AK00 392 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.29.3 Application example ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 Figure 8-78 Application example 8.29.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 72 Technical specifications for MDS D528 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D528 6GT2600-5AK00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM 32 bytes
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 393 ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 6GT2600-5AK00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to IEC 68-2-271) Vibration according to IEC 68-2-61) Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 24 x 20 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M8 SW 22; 8 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 394 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.29.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 Figure 8-79 Dimensional drawing of MDS D528 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 395 ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 396 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System integration 9 The communication modules (interface modules) are links between the RFID components
(reader and transponder) and the higher-level controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7), or PCs or computers. 9.1 Introduction The readers are connected to the controller via the following interface or communications modules:
ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C SIMATIC RF182C RFID 181EIP Function blocks, interface modules/communication modules and readers Function blocks are used for integration into the SIMATIC. You will find information on the following blocks on the Internet in "Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14971)". Ident profile and Ident blocks, standard function for RFID systems The Ident library linked into the TIA Portal as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1 RFID standard profile; standard functions for RFID systems FB 45 for MOBY U, MOBY D, RF200, RF300 FB 55 RF160C communications module with FC 44 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 397 System integration 9.1 Introduction Interface modules/communication modules and function blocks The following table shows the most important characteristics of the interface modules/communications modules. Table 9- 1 Overview of interface modules/communication modules Interfaces to the reader Reader con-
nections Dimensions
(W x H x D) Temperature range Degree of protection Interfaces to the application
(PLC) PROFIBUS DP-
V1 S7-300 (cen-
tral), ET200M
(PROFIBUS) S7-1200 (cen-
tral) PROFIBUS DP
/ DP-V0 PROFIBUS DP-
V1 PROFINET IO PROFINET IO TCP/IP ASM/
communications module ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C SIMATIC RF182C RFID 181EIP 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 Via screw terminals in front connector 2 (parallel) 2 (parallel) 9-pin D-sub socket 1 60 x 210 x 54 or 79 mm 40 x 125 x 120 mm 0 to +60 0 to +55 30 x 100 x 75 mm 0 to +55 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 30 mm 0 to +55 2 (parallel) 90 x 130 x 60 mm
-25 C to
+55 C 2 (parallel) 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 54 mm 0 C to
+60 C 60 x 210 x 30 mm 0 to +60 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 IP67 IP20 IP20 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Ethernet IP 60 x 210 x 54 mm 0 C to
+60 C The following table shows the program blocks compatible with the interface modules/communications modules. 2 (parallel) Table 9- 2 Compatible program blocks ASM/
communications mod-
ule ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C Compatible program blocks in conjunction with ... S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Classic V5.5 FB 45 FB 55 FC 56 Standard profile V1.19 Ident profile FB 45 FB 55
--
S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional FB 45 FB 55 FC 56 Ident profile Ident blocks FB 45 FB 55
--
S7-1200 / S7-1500 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB
--
Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB 398 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ASM/
communications mod-
ule SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C System integration 9.2 ASM 456 Compatible program blocks in conjunction with ... S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Classic V5.5 FC 44 Application blocks for RF160C FB 45 FB 55 S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional FC 44 Application blocks for RF160C FB 45 FB 55 FB 45 FB 55 Standard profile V1.19 Ident profile FB 45 FB 55 Ident profile Ident blocks S7-1200 / S7-1500 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional Application blocks for RF160C Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB 9.2 ASM 456 Configured with ASM 456 Figure 9-1 Configuration of ASM 456 For more detailed information, please refer to ASM 456 Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/32629442). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 399 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.1 Features Area of application The ASM 475 interface module acting as the link between all RF300 systems and SIMATIC S7-300 performs the functions of a communication module. It can be operated centrally in the S7-300 or decentrally in an ET200M. As many as eight ASM 475 interface modules can be plugged into one SIMATIC S7-300 rack and operated. In a configuration with several racks (max. four), the ASM 475 can be plugged into and operated on any rack. This means that as many as 32 ASMs can be operated in the maximum configuration of a SIMATIC S7-300. The ASM can also be operated in the ET 200M distributed I/O on PROFIBUS. Operation in an S7-400 environment is therefore problem-free. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated on each ET 200M. Error messages and operating statuses are indicated by LEDs. Since there is electrical isolation between the read/write device and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus, a configuration that is immune to interference is possible. Figure 9-2 Interface module ASM 475 The ASM 475 with the article number 6GT2002-0GA10 is a module that can be set in the parameters. The basic functions of the module are then already specified when the module is configured in HW Config (e.g. standard addressing). The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 475. Operation in a SIMATIC S7 is controlled by the function block FB 45. ASM 475 and FB 45 form a unit that is used for reading the data of the MDS simply and at optimal speed. 400 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 9.3.2 Ordering data System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Table 9- 3 Ordering data for ASM 475 ASM 475 interface module for SIMATIC S7 2 x RF3xxR reader with RS-422 can be connected in paral-
lel, without front connector Article number 6GT2002-0GA10 Table 9- 4 Ordering data for ASM 475 accessories Article number 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0 Front connector (1 x per ASM) Connecting cable ASM 475 RF3xxR Plug-in cable, pre-assembled, length: 2 m (standard length) 6GT2891-0EH20 6GT2891-0EH50 Plug-in cable, pre-assembled, length: 5 m 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0 Terminal element (1 x per reader cable) Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0 The plug-in cables 6GT2891-4Fxx can be used as extension cables. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 401 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.3 Indicators Bezel and indicator elements The figure below illustrates the bezel of the ASM 475 and the inside of the front door complete with the associated connection diagram. The read/write devices must be connected to the ASM in accordance with the connection diagram. Figure 9-3 Bezel and inside of the front door of the ASM 475 402 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Display elements on the ASM Table 9- 5 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Light emitting diode Meaning SF DC 5V ACT_1, ACT_2 ERR_1, ERR_2 PRE_1, PRE_2 RxD_1, RxD_2 System fault (hardware error on ASM) 24 V are connected to ASM and the 5 V voltage on ASM is OK. The corresponding reader is active in processing a user command. A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur. This display can be reset using the parameter Option 1. Indicates the presence of a transponder. Indicates live communication with the reader. In the event of a fault on the reader, this display may also be lit. On the ASM 475, further operating states are indicated with the LEDs PRE, ERR and SF:
Table 9- 6 Operating status display on ASM 475 via LEDs SF ON ON OFF PRE_1 OFF/ON ON ERR_1 PRE_2 OFF/ON ON ERR_2
(perm.) ON OFF OFF 2 Hz
(perm.) OFF OFF OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Any value OFF 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz OFF 1 flash every 2 s OFF 1 flash every 2 s Meaning Hardware is defective (RAM, Flash, etc.) Charger is defective (can only be repaired in the factory). Firmware loading is active or no firmware detected Firmware download ASM must not be switched off Firmware loading terminated with errors Restart required Load firmware again Check update files Operating system error Switch ASM off/on ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 403 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.4 Configuration Centralized configuration with SIMATIC S7-300 Figure 9-4 Configuration of ASM 475 central Distributed configuration with ET200M Figure 9-5 Configuration of ASM 475 distributed Reader connection system You will find more information on the reader connector technology in the section "Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 (Page 438)". 404 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Cable installation Signal 24 VDC TX -
GND TX +
RX +
RX -
Pin on M12 connect-
or 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shield 8 +
System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Labeling 1 Reader 2 8 -16 1 Reader 2 7-15 1 Reader 2 9-17 1 Reader 2 6-14 1 Reader 2 4-12 1 Reader 2 5-13 Cable white brown Green Yellow Gray Pink
-
Cable assignment for connection of an RF300 reader to ASM 475 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 405 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.5 Shield connection When the reader is connected to the ASM 475, the cable shield must be connected to a shield terminal. Shield terminals and holding clips are standard components of the product spectrum of S7-300. Holding bracket Cable to 2nd reader Cable to 1st reader Shield terminal Figure 9-6 Shield terminal ASM 475 9.3.6 Technical data Table 9- 7 Technical specifications for ASM 475 Product type designation Interfaces Design of the interface point-to-point link Number of connectable readers Electrical connector design Backplane bus PROFIBUS interface Industrial Ethernet interface ASM 475 communications module 6GT2002-0GA10 RS-422 2 S7-300 backplane bus
(according to the head module)
(according to the head module) 406 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Supply voltage Design of the interface to the reader for communication Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Without connected devices Including connected devices Power dissipation of the module, typ. Current consumption from I/O bus, max. Electrical isolation between S7-300 and RF300 Fuse 24 V for the reader Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation (horizontal installation) System integration 9.3 ASM 475 6GT2002-0GA10 Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals Noryl Anthracite 24 VDC 0.1 A 1.0 A 2 Watts 80 mA Yes Yes, electronic 0 ... +60 During operation (vertical installation) During transportation and storage Degree of protection Shock-resistant to IEC 61131-2 Vibration-resistant to IEC 61131-2 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum Product properties, functions, components general LED display design 0 ... +40
-40 ... +70 IP20 150 m/s2 10 m/s2 120 x 40 x 125 mm 0.2 kg S7-300 rack 1000 m Product function transponder file handler addressable 4 LEDs per reader connector 2 LEDs for device status Yes SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 407 System integration 9.4 RF120C Yes Protocol supported S7 communication Product functions management, configuration, engineering Type of parameter assignment Type of programming Type of computer-based communication Transponder addressing Commands Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 9.4 RF120C Configuration with RF120C 6GT2002-0GA10 Object manager, GSD FB 45, FB 55, FC 56
(FC 45/55 with restricted functionality) 2 words cyclic, 238 bytes acyclic Direct access via addresses Initialize transponder, read data from transpond-
er, write data to transponder CE, FCC, UL/CSA Figure 9-7 Configuration RF120C For more detailed information, refer to the section " RF120C communications module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/77485950)". 408 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 9.5 RF160C Configuration with RF160C System integration 9.5 RF160C Figure 9-8 Configuration RF160C For more detailed information, refer to Operating Instructions RF160C
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/42788808). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 409 System integration 9.6 RF170C 9.6 RF170C Configuration with RF170C Figure 9-9 Configuration RF170C For more detailed information, please refer to SIMATIC RF170C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/32622825). 410 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 9.7 RF180C Configured with RF180C System integration 9.7 RF180C Figure 9-10 Configuration of RF180C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF180C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/30012157). 9.8 RF182C Configuration with RF182C Figure 9-11 Configuration with RF182C SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 411 System integration 9.8 RF182C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF182C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/38507897). 412 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System diagnostics 10 10.1 Error codes of the RF300 readers Error codes of the RF300 readers Note Validity of the error codes The following error codes apply only to RF300 readers with an RS-422 interface (except for Scanmode). You have the following options to read out the error code:
Directly on the reader/communication module by counting the flashing pattern of the red error LED With the Ident profile at the output variable "Status"
Take into consideration the structure of the output variable in the table below
("0xE&FE$$00"; "&" = 1 ... 5; "$$" = error code). with FB 45 / FB 55 variable "error_MOBY"
Table 10- 1 Error codes of the readers Flashing of the red LED operating display on the reader 00 02 05 06 11 Description Error code
(hexa-
decimal) 00 01 05 06 0B No error Presence error; possible causes:
The active command was not carried out completely The transponder left the antenna field while the command was being processed Communication problem between reader and transponder Parameter assignment error, possible causes:
Unknown command Incorrect parameter Function not allowed Air interface faulty The MDS E transponder could not be successfully authenticated. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 413 System diagnostics 10.1 Error codes of the RF300 readers Flashing of the red LED operating display on the reader 12 13 19 20 21 24 25 28 30 31 Description Error code
(hexa-
decimal) 0C 0D 13 14 15 18 19 1C 1E 1F The transponder memory cannot be written, possible causes:
Hardware fault (memory faulty) Memory write-protected (corresponding OTP area has already been written) Error in the specified memory address (access attempted to non-
existent or non-accessible memory areas). Buffer overflow: Insufficient buffer available in the reader for saving the command Major system fault (hardware fault) Parameter assignment error: bad parameter in RESET command Command was sent to a reader that has not yet been initialized Previous command is still active Antenna is not identified Possible causes:
Antenna is not connected. Antenna cable is defective. Incorrect number of characters in frame Running command canceled by "RESET" command 414 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 10.2.1 Overview Extended diagnostic functions with SIMATIC RF300 With SIMATIC RF300, extended diagnostics functions are available with STEP 7 Classic /
Basic / Professional which simplify commissioning and maintenance. Extensive diagnostics functions for the SIMATIC RF300 readers with the TIA Portal for STEP 7 Basic / Professional are being planned. With the aid of the Ident profile and the Ident blocks, you can make different diagnostics queries. You can access this diagnostics data using the SIMATIC function blocks and the commands
"Reader status" and "Tag status" (SLG-STATUS and MDS-STATUS). These two commands can each be called with various attributes or modes (subcommands) for which corresponding data structures (UDTs) are defined. Table 10- 2 In RF300 mode Command Reader-Status
(SLG-STATUS) Tag-Status
(MDS-STATUS) Attributes
(mode) 0x81 (01) 0x86 (06) 0x81 (01) 0x82 (02) 0x83 (03) Meaning Hardware and firmware configuration, parameterization sta-
tus Communication error counter, current command status Serial number of the transponder (UID), memory configura-
tion. EEPROM write-protection status Serial number of the transponder (UID), HF field strength value, communication error counter, presence counter (dura-
tion) Serial number of the transponder (UID), transponder type identified in the antenna field (number = tag type, see Reset
- "ftim" parameter), memory configuration, write protection status (OTP), size and number of blocks in the user memory Overview of the diagnostic functions Table 10- 3 In ISO mode: ISO 15693, ISO 18000-03 or ISO 14443 Command Reader-Status
(SLG-STATUS) Tag-Status
(MDS-STATUS) Attributes 0x81 (01) 0x86 (06) 0x83 (03) Meaning Hardware and firmware configuration, parameterization sta-
tus Communication error counter, current command status Serial number of the transponder (UID), transponder type identified in the antenna field (number = tag type, see Reset
- "ftim" parameter), memory configuration, write protection status (OTP), size and number of blocks in the user memory SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 415 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 10.2.2 Reader diagnostics with "reader status" (SLG-STATUS) With this command you can query the status and diagnostics data of the reader. Note Scope of the described UDTs Note that below only the variables are listed that are relevant for the RF300 system. You will find the full UDTs in the manual "Ident Profile and Ident Blocks". Attributes "0x81" (mode 01), corresponds to UDT 110 Table 10- 4 Input parameter Name hardware Type char hardware_version word Possible Values
(hexadecimal) 00 01 02 03 04 05 0A 0B 0C 0D 00 ... FF 00 ... FF loader_version word 00 ... FF 00 ... FF Comment Type of hardware
= RF310R, RF340R, RF350R
= RF380R
= RF310R (ISO)
= RF380R (ISO)
= RF340R (ISO), RF350R (ISO)
= RF310R (ISO)
= RF310R, 2nd generation
= RF340R, 2nd generation
= RF350R, 2nd generation
= RF380R, 2nd generation HW version
= Version (high byte): unused (00) HW version
= Version (low byte) 47 = Readers of the 1st generation 07 = Readers of the 1st generation 11 = Readers of the 1st generation 10 = Readers of the 2nd generation 29 = Readers of the 2nd generation 2B = Readers of the 2nd generation 2C = Readers of the 2nd generation Version of loader
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) 416 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Name firmware Type char Possible Values
(hexadecimal) 00 ... FF firmware_version word driver char driver_version word interface baud byte byte distance_limiting_SLG byte 00 ... FF 00 ... FF 31 32 33 00 ... FF 00 ... FF 01 02 01 03 05
--
02 03 04 05 06 07 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Comment Type of firmware 01, 02, 03 = Readers of the 1st generation F = Full version for readers of the 2nd generation P = Pilot version for readers of the 2nd generation Firmware version
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) Driver version 3964R
= 3964R
= ASCII
= ASCII/ScanMode Version of driver
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) Interface type
= RS422
= RS232 (only RF380R) Transmission speed
= 19.2 Kbaud
= 57.6 kBaud
= 115,2 Kbaud Readers of the 1st generation: With this parameter you can change the transmit power (output power) of the RF380R reader of the 1st generation (6GT2801-3AB10). When doing this, remember that the change to the transmit power will affect the detection in the limit range (upper/ lower operating dis-
tance), as well as the minimum distance that is to be main-
tained between adjacent RF380Rs. Settings outside the specified range have the effect that the default value (1.25 W) will be set. In this case for reasons of compatibility there is no error message. Readers of the 2nd generation: This setting is not necessary with the RF380R readers of the 2nd generation (6GT2801-
3BAx0) because the power limits are optimized automatically depending on the reader-transponder distance. For reasons of compatibility this setting can nevertheless be made. Note that the values "02", "03" and "04" bring about a reduction of the power of approximately 50%. Transmit power 0.5 W 0.75 W 1.0 1.25 W (default) 1.5 W 1.75 W SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 417 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Name multitag_SLG Type byte field_ON_time_SLG byte status_ant MDS_control byte byte Possible Values
(hexadecimal) 08 01 00 01 03 04 05 06 07 08 0E 10 20 31 FF 01 02 00 01 04 Comment 2.0 W Number of transponders that can be processed in the antenna field
= Single tag mode Selection of the transponder types used
= RF300 (RF3xxT)
= ISO 15693 general
= ISO 15693 (Infineon, MDS D3xx)
= ISO 15693 (Fujitsu - 2 kB, MDS D4xx)
= ISO 15693 (NXP, MDS D1xx)
= ISO 15693 (TI, MDS D2xx)
= ISO 15693 (STM, MDS D261)
= ISO 15693 (Fujitsu - 8 kB, MDS D5xx)
= ISO (setting with "scanning_time" and "fcon")
= RF300 (RF3xxT)
= ISO 14443 (MOBY E, E6xx)
= General Mode
= Setting with "scanning_time" and "fcon"
Status of the antenna
= Antenna is on
= antenna is off Presence check
= Operation without presence check
= Operation with presence check (antenna is permanently switched on.)
= Operation without presence check (antenna is switched off.) The antenna is only switched on when one of the following commands is sent. Read, Write, Init, Tag-Status 418 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Attributes "0x86" (mode 06), corresponds to UDT 280 Table 10- 5 Error counter Name FZP ABZ CFZ SFZ CRCFZ BSTAT ASMFZ Type byte Possible Values
(hexadecimal) 00 ... FF Comment
= Error counter, passive (errors during idle time)
= Abort counter
= Code error counter
= Signature error counter
= CRC error counter
= Current command status
= Interface problems to host (CM/PC) parity, BCC, frame error Note Counter values are deleted. Note that the counter values are deleted after they have been read out (command "Reader status" or "SLG-STATUS"). Explanations:
"FZP": counts interference pulses when communication with a transponder is not taking place (e.g. electromagnetic interference caused by contactors, motors, etc.). Counter values can, however, also be generated when a transponder is located at the edge of the field even when there is no external interference.
"ABZ", "CFZ", "SFZ" and "CRCFZ" are counters for protocol errors which may occur during reader-transponder communication. This can be caused by unsuitable reader/transponder positioning (e.g. transponder on field boundary, several transponders in the antenna field) or external EMC interference. To ensure clear diagnostics of the quality of communication, it is recommended that a
"Reader status" (SLG STATUS) command with attribute "0x86" (mode 06) is executed following receipt of the presence message to reset the error counters. The protocol error counters are not mutually independent. If a code error (CFZ) occurs, this will cause a signature (SFZ) or CRC- (CRCFZ) error.
"BSTAT" is the status for the most recently executed command. A value other than 0 means that the previous command was repeated by the reader due to faults (see above).
"ASMFZ" signals line-conducted communication interference between the communications module and the reader. Faults of this type can be caused by contact problems on the connector or the cable connection. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 419 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 10.2.3 Transponder diagnostics with "Tag status" (MDS-STATUS) With this command you can query the status and diagnostics data from the transponder currently located in the antenna field. Attribute "0x04" (mode 01), corresponds to UDT 260 (only for RF300 transponders) Name UID Type array[18] byte MDS_type byte Lock_state byte Possible Values (hex-
adecimal) 000000005555555 ... 00000000FFFFFFFF 01 02 03 04 0 ... FF Comment Unique identifier
= b0-31: 4 byte TAG ID, b32-63: 0 Transponder memory configuration
= Transponder without FRAM
= Transponder with FRAM 8 KB
= Transponder with FRAM 32 KB
= Transponder with FRAM 64 KB EEPROM write protection status 420 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Attribute "0x82" (mode 02), corresponds to UDT 270 (only for RF300 transponders) Name UID LFD FZP FZA ANWZ Type array[18] byte byte byte byte byte Possible Values (hex-
adecimal) 0000000055555555 ... 00000000FFFFFFFF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF Comment Unique identifier
= b0-31: 4 byte TAG ID, b32-63: 0
= Value for field strength determined in the transponder
= Error counter (passive) errors during idle time
= Error counter (active)
= Presence counter Note Counter values are deleted. All counter values are deleted when the transponder exits the antenna field or when the antenna is switched off. Explanations:
"LFD" is a measured value for the field strength that is determined in the transponder. The lower the value, the higher the field strength.
"FZP" counts interference pulses when communication with a transponder is not taking place (e.g. electromagnetic interference caused by contactors, motors, etc.). Counter values can also be generated when a transponder is located at the edge of the field even when there is no external interference.
"FZA" counts errors that can occur during reader-to-transponder communication. This can be caused by unsuitable reader/transponder positioning (e.g. transponder on field boundary, several data carriers in the field) or external electromagnetic interference.
"ANWZ" is the value for the time that the transponder remains in the field before the "Tag-
Status" (MDS STATUS) with attribute "0x82" (mode 02) is executed. A time step is 10 ms. The maximum time that can be recorded is therefore 2.5 s. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 421 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Attribute "0x83" (mode 03), corresponds to UDT 230 Name UID Type array[18] byte MDS_type byte IC_version size byte byte Possible Values (hex-
adecimal) 0000000000000000 ... FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 00 03 04 05 06 07 08 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 0 ... FF 0 ... FF lock_state byte 0 ... FF block_size byte nr_of_blocks byte 0 ... FF 0 ... FF Comment Unique identifier
=8 byte UID, MSB first Transponder type (vendor, identification)
= ISO 15693 general
= ISO 15693 (Infineon, MDS D3xx)
= ISO 15693 (Fujitsu - 2 kB, MDS D4xx)
= ISO 15693 (NXP, MDS D1xx)
= ISO 15693 (TI, MDS D200)
= ISO 15693 (STM, MDS D261)
= ISO 15693 (Fujitsu - 8 kB, MDS D5xx)
= RF300 transponder (0 kB)
= RF300 transponder (8 kB)
= RF300 transponder (32 kB)
= RF300 transponder (64 kB)
= ISO 14443 (NXP, 1 kB, MDS E)
= ISO 14443 (Infineon, 1 kB, MDS E)
= ISO 14443 (NXP, 4 kB, MDS E) Chip version Memory size in bytes depending on transponder type, e.g. MDS D3xx: 992 bytes Lock state, OTP information:
One bit is used per block (4 x 4 bytes or 2 x 8 bytes)
(bit = 1: block is locked) Example:
01 = Block 1 of address FF80 ... FF83 is locked or 03 = Block 1 and 2 of address FF80 ... FF87 are locked, e.g. for the Philips SL2 ICS20 (MDS D124, D160 or D100). This chip provides a usable memory with 112 bytes EEPROM from address 0000 - 006F (total OTP area
"0060 ... 006F"). In this memory, the locked area corre-
sponds to the addresses 0060 ... 0063 or 0060 ... 0067 Block size of the transponder depending on transponder type, e.g. MDS D3xx: 4 bytes Number of blocks depending on transponder type, e.g. MDS D3xx: 248 bytes 422 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A A.1 Certificates and approvals All the latest RFID radio approvals are available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/rfid-approvals). Labeling Description Conformity acc. to the RED EU directive Notes on CE marking The following applies to the system described in this documentation:
The CE marking on a device indicates the corresponding approval. DIN ISO 9001 certificate The quality assurance system for the entire product process (development, production, and marketing) at Siemens fulfills the requirements of ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001:
1987). This has been certified by DQS (the German society for the certification of quality management systems). EQ-Net certificate no.: 1323-01 Country-specific approvals Safety If the device has one of the following markings the corresponding approval has been obtained:
Labeling Description Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to UL 60950 Standard (I.T.E), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E), C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12
(IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (IND.CONT.EQ) and C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12 (IND.CONT.EQ) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 423 Appendix A.1 Certificates and approvals Labeling Canada (IC) Mexico (COFETEL) China (CMIIT) Description UL recognition mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) acc. to standard C22.2. No. 60950 (LR 81690), C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12 (LR 63533) Canadian Standard Association (CSA) acc. to American Standard UL 60950 (LR 81690), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (LR 63533) This product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 3548 Norm. USA (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. FCC ID: NXW-RF... Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). IC: 267X-RF... Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan Brazil (ANATEL) ANATEL-ID: XXXX-YY-ZZZZ Mexico (COFETEL) South Africa (ICASA) China (CMIIT) CMIIT ID: XXXXYYZZZZ South Korea (KCC) Japan (VCCI) 424 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 A.2 Accessories A.2.1 Transponder holders Table A- 1 Overview of the transponder holders and spacers Appendix A.2 Accessories Product photo 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 Insertable transponders MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 MDS E600 MDS E611 RF360T Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal, in conjunction with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 Distance from transponder to metal: 25 mm Mounting: 4 x M4 screws Material: PA6 Weight: 31 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 110 x 62 x 24 mm MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 MDS E600 MDS E611 RF360T MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 Fixing pocket in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-
0AA00 Mounting:
Locks into spacer 2 x screws/nails Tacked Material: PA6 Weight: 12 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 121 x 57 x 5 mm Fixing pocket not suitable for mounting directly on metal Mounting: 2 x M4 countersunk screws Material: PA6 Weight: 21 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 110 x 65 x 5 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 425 Appendix A.2 Accessories Product photo 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 6GT2690-0AK00 Insertable transponders MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D124 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D524 Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: 1 x M5 stainless steel screw Tightening torque: 1.5 Nm Material: PPS Weight: 50 g Dimensions ( x H): 85 x 30 mm Quick change holder for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: Screw-in Material: Stainless steel VA Weight: 80 g Dimensions ( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: Screw-in Material: Stainless steel VA Weight: 60 g Dimensions ( x H): 22 x 47 mm Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 15 mm Mounting: 1 x M4 countersunk screw Tightening torque: 1 Nm Material: PPS Weight: Approx. 4 g Remounting cycles: min. 10 Dimensions ( x H): 36 x 22 mm 426 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.2 Accessories Insertable transponders MDS D126 MDS D426 MDS D526 MDS E624 MDS D160 MDS D460 MDS D423 RF330T Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 25 mm Mounting: 1 x M4 countersunk screw Tightening torque: 1 Nm Material: PA6 Weight: Approx. 12 g Remounting cycles: min. 10 Dimensions ( x H): 59 x 30 mm Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 10 mm Mounting: 1 x M3 countersunk screw Material: PA6 Weight: 2 g Dimensions ( x H): 20 x 14 mm Fixing hood Mounting: 2 x M4 or 2 x M5 screws with max. head diameter of 9.5 mm Tightening torque 0.8 Nm (M4 only with flat wash-
er) Material: PPS Weight: 3 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm Product photo 6GT2690-0AL00 6GT2690-0AG00 6GT2690-0AE00 Dimensional drawings SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 427 Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 Figure A-2 Dimension drawing of fixing pocket 6GT2390-0AA00 428 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-3 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AA00 Figure A-4 Dimension drawing of quick change holder 6GT2690-0AH00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 429 Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-5 Dimension drawing of quick change holder 6GT2690-0AH10 Figure A-6 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AK00 Figure A-7 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AL00 430 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-8 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AG00 Figure A-9 Dimension drawing of fixing hood 6GT2690-0AE00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 431 Appendix A.2 Accessories A.2.2 MOBY I migration The RF300 readers of the new generation provide the option of simple migration of existing MOBY I systems to SIMATIC RF300. The so-called MOBY I emulation processes frames of the MOBY I protocol on its serial interface and communicates with the established RF300 transponders. If the RF300 reader is connected to a communications module with MOBY I capability, the reader automatically recognizes the serial protocol and sets the MOBY I protocol. As a communications module with MOBY I capability, all the communications modules sold for MOBY I count regardless of the mode in which the MOBY I communications modules are operated. This property allows even projects with the ECC mode turned on or with file handlers to be migrated. Communication modules with MOBY I capability:
RF180C, RFID 181EIP, RF170C, ASM 456, ASM 475, ASM 470, ASM450, ASM 451, ASM 452, ASM 472, ASM 473, ASM 424, ASM 454, ASM 400, CM 422, CM 423, ASM 410, ASM 420, ASM 421, ASM 440, ES030 With the aid of the adapter cable (0.3 m; article number 6GT2091-4VE30) you can migrate existing MOBY I projects without needing to re-cable the connected RFID devices. The transfer is as usual with MOBY I with a transmission speed of 19.2 kBd. The transmission speed in the application is identical (or slightly slower) than with the original MOBY I hardware. NOTICE Changed field geometry When replacing MOBY I components with RF300 components note that the field geometry changes. Note LED reaction of the readers in MOBY I mode Presence and errors are not displayed on the reader. These are only displayed via the connected CM. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 432 Design of the Y adapter Appendix A.2 Accessories With the aid of the Y adapter (article number 6GT2090-4VE00) a slow migration of a MOBY I application to RF300 is possible. The Y adapter is mounted in the vicinity of a MOBY I SLG. It forwards signals of a communications module both to the MOBY I SLG and to the RF300 reader to be newly installed. The transponder commands are handled either with a MOBY I transponder or with an RF300 transponder. To do this, no change to the MOBY I application is necessary. ASM TxD Power MOBY l
(X1)
(X4)
(X2) SIMATIC RF300
(X3) Connector for the communications module;
SLG plug, 6-pin acc. to EN 175201-804 Optional 24 VDC supply voltage;
M12 plug, 4-pin Connector for the MOBY I-SLG;
SLG socket (angled), 6-pin acc. to EN 175201-804; cable length: 0.5 m Connector for RF 300 reader;
M12 socket, 8-pin, cable length: 0.5 m max. 2 m cable extension permitted Figure A-10 Connection graphic of the MOBY Y adapter for MOBY I The operational statuses of the Y-adapter are displayed by four LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors yellow and green and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Labeling ASM TxD
(X1) ASM TxD
(X1) Power
(X4) Power
(X4) LED Description No communication module connected to the Y-adapter. A communication module is connected to the Y-adapter. The Y-adapter is switched off. The Y-adapter is switched on. All connected components are supplied with power. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 433 Appendix A.2 Accessories LED Labeling Power
(X4) Power
(X4) MOBY I
(X2) MOBY I
(X2) SIMATIC RF300
(X3) SIMATIC RF300
(X3) Description Flashes at 1:1 rate The following options are available:
Supply voltage at X4, but not at X1. Supply voltage at X1, but not at X4. No component is connected to either X2 or X3. Flashes at 1:10 rate; indicates an error. A transponder is installed on the MOBY I-SLG as well as on the RF300 reader. The user program displays the error "03". No MOBY I-SLG connected to the Y-adapter or the MOBY I-
SLG does not work. A ready MOBY I-SLG is connected to the Y-adapter. If the LED gets brighter, there is communication to a MOBY I transponder. No RF300 reader connected to the Y-adapter or the RF300 reader does not work. A ready RF300 reader is connected to the Y-adapter. If the LED gets brighter, there is communication to a RF300 transponder. Optional supply voltage Use the optional supply voltage under the following conditions:
If the communication module (X1) cannot supply the current required for 2 readers and the Y-adapter. If long cables between the communication module (X1) and the MOBY I-SLG (X2) cause the voltage at the Y-adapter to drop below the minimum supply voltage of 20 V. Note Questions on migration If you have questions about migration, please contact the Siemens Industry Online Support
(section "Service & Support (Page 451)"). Command set The complete command set of the MOBY I SLGs is supported by the RF300 readers. You will find a list of the commands and a description of the commands in the manuals "FB 45"
and "FC 56". These manuals can be found in the archive of the DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" (6GT2080-2AA20). 434 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.2 Accessories A.2.3 DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
The DVD contains:
FB/FC for SIMATIC, 3964R Drivers for DOS / Windows C libraries PC demonstration program RFID documentation in PDF format, especially RFID system manuals, programming instructions and operating instructions Table A- 2 Ordering data DVD DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
Article number 6GT2080-2AA20 Note Notes on "Ident Systems Software" and licensing When purchasing a communication module or an interface module, no software or documentation is supplied. The "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" DVD contains all available FBs/FCs for the SIMATIC, C libraries, demo programs, etc. and needs to be ordered separately. In addition, the DVD contains the complete Ident documentation
(German and English) in PDF format. The purchase of a communications module or an interface module includes a payment for the use of the software, including documentation, on the "Ident Systems Software &
Documentation" DVD and the purchaser acquires the right to make copies (copy license) insofar as they are required as part of the customer-specific application or development for the plant. The contract accompanying the DVD pertaining to the use of software products against a one-off payment also applies. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 435 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3 Connecting cable In the following chapter, you will find an overview of the connecting cables between the readers and communication modules or PCs. A.3.1 RF3xxR reader (RS-422) with ASM 456 / RF160C / RF170C / RF180C /
RF182C Connecting cable with straight connector Figure A-11 Connecting cable between ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C, RF180C, RF182C and RF3xxR reader (RS-422) Table A- 3 Ordering data Article number 6GT2891-4FH20 6GT2891-4FH50 6GT2891-4FN10 6GT2891-4FN20 6GT2891-4FN50 Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m 436 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable Connecting cable with angled connector Figure A-12 Connecting cable between ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C, RF180C and RF3xxR reader
(RS-422) with angled connector Table A- 4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2891-4JH20 6GT2891-4JH50 6GT2891-4JN10 Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m The angled connector has a height of h = 29 mm and a length of l = 38 mm. Remember that due to the construction, the distance between the edge of the connector and the edge of the reader housing (H) is higher. Figure A-13 Distance between connector edge and housing edge The distance between the connector edge and the housing edge of the reader (H) depends on the reader being used and can be up to 38 mm. If you look at the front of the reader, the angled connector always points to the right and runs parallel to the housing. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 437 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.2 Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 Reader connection system The connecting cable has a length of 2 m (standard) and 5 m. Extensions up to 1000 m are possible with the 6GT2891-4E plug-in cables. Figure A-14 Structure of the connecting cable between ASM 475 and RF3xx reader with RS-422 Table A- 5 Ordering data Length L 2 m 5 m Article number 6GT2891-4EH20 6GT2891-4EH50 438 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.3 Reader RF3xxR (RS-422) with RF120C Figure A-15 Connecting cable between RF120C and RF3xxR reader (RS-422) Table A- 6 Ordering data Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m Article number 6GT2091-4LH20 6GT2091-4LH50 6GT2091-4LN10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 439 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.4 Reader RF380R (RS232) - PC The connecting cables have a length of 5 m. The outgoing cable for the power supply has a length of 0.5 m. With 4-pin power supply connector Figure A-16 Connecting cable between PC and RF380R (RS-232) with 4-pin power supply connector Suitable power supply unit: e.g. wide-range power supply unit With open ends for the power supply Figure A-17 Connecting cable between PC and RF380R (RS-232) with open ends for the power supply Table A- 7 Ordering data connecting cable Connecting cable with 4-pin power supply connector (5 m) Connecting cable with open ends (5 m) Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 440 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Table A- 8 Ordering data for wide-range power supply unit Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF-systems
(100 - 240 VAC / 24 VDC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable with country-specific plug Article number EU: 6GT2898-0AA00 UK: 6GT2898-0AA10 US: 6GT2898-0AA20 A.4 Ordering data RF300 components Note Product update Note that readers with the article numbers "6GT2801-xABxx" are being replaced by readers with the article numbers "6GT2801-xBAxx". Table A- 9 RF300 reader Reader RF310R
(RS-422) RF310R
(Scanmode) IP67 Description With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible IP67 horizontal base plate base plate turned through 90 Article number 6GT2801-1AB10 6GT2801-1AB10-0AX1 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 441 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Reader RF310R second generation RF340R RF340R 2nd generation RF350R RF350R 2ndgeneration IP67 IP67 Description With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible ISO 14443 (MOBY E) compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible ISO 14443 (MOBY E) compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting IP67 IP65 ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 ISO 15693 compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting IP65 Article number 6GT2801-1BA10 6GT2801-2AB10 6GT2801-2BA10 6GT2801-4AB10 6GT2801-4BA10 ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 ISO 15693 compatible ISO 14443 (MOBY E) compatible 442 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Reader RF380R RF380R Scanmode RF380R 2nd generation RF382R
(Scanmode) RF350M RF350M Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2801-3AB10 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 6GT2801-3BA10 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 6GT2803-1BA00 6GT2803-1BA10 IP67 Description with RS-422 interface (3964R) and RS-232 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) and RS-232 interface
(Scanmode) IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (3964R) and RS-232 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) and RS-232 interface IP67
(Scanmode) IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible IP54 Operating temperature: -20 C ... +55 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 250 x 90 x 47 mm Mobile reader with integrated antenna IP54 Operating temperature: -20 C ... +55 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 250 x 90 x 47 mm Mobile reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting ANT 8, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 443 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Table A- 10 RF300 transponder RF300 transponder RF320T RF330T RF340T
(8 KB FRAM) RF340T
(32 KB FRAM) RF350T RF360T
(8 KB FRAM) RF360T
(32 KB FRAM) RF370T
(32 KB FRAM) RF370T
(64 KB FRAM) RF380T Description Memory size: 20 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 27 x 4 mm Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 30 x 8 mm Memory size: 8 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 48 x 25 x 15 mm Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 48 x 25 x 15 mm Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 50 x 20 mm Memory size: 8 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.8 x 54.8 x 2.5 mm Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.8 x 54.8 x 2.5 mm Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Memory size: 64 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Memory size 32 KB FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 114 x 83 mm Article number 6GT2800-1CA00 6GT2800-5BA00 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 6GT2800-5BD00 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 6GT2800-5DA00 444 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Table A- 11 ISO transponder ISO transponder MDS D100 MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D421 Description Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.6 x 54 x 0.9 mm Credit card format Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 4 x 5 mm Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): M6 x 5.8 (0.2) mm Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 85 (0.5) x 15 (-1.0) mm Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 16 (0.2) x 3.0 (0.2) mm Laundry transponder for cyclic applications Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions (L x W): 86 x 54 mm Smartlabel (PET) in credit card format Memory size: 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H): 86 x 54 x 0.8 mm Credit card format Memory size: 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions (L x W): 55 x 55 mm Smartlabel (PET), small design Memory size: 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm Memory size: 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 85 (0.5) x 15 (-1.0) mm Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions (L x W x H) 85.6 (0.3) 54 (0.2) 0.8 (0.05) mm Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 4.5 mm Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2600-0AD10 6GT2600-0AG00 6GT2600-0AC10 6GT2600-0AE00 6GT2600-0AF00 6GT2600-0AA10 6GT2600-0AB10 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0 6GT2600-3AC00 6GT2600-3AA10 6GT2600-4AD00 6GT2600-4AE00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 445 Appendix A.4 Ordering data ISO transponder MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D522 Special variant MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 446 Description Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): M20 x 6 (0.2) mm Can be screwed into metal (flush-mounted) Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 30 (+0.2/-0.5) x 8 (-0.5) mm Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 24 X 10 mm; M6 thread Screw transponder Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 18(1) x 20(1) mm (without thread); thread M8 Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 16 (0.2) x 3.0 (0.2) mm Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 4.5 mm Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): M20 x 6 (0.2) mm Can be screwed into metal (flush-mounted) Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 18 (+0.1) x 5.2 mm Can be clipped into metal (flush-mounted) Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 24 x 10 (+1.0) mm Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Dimensions ( x H): 18(1) x 20(1) mm (without thread); thread M8 Article number 6GT2600-4AF00 6GT2600-4AA00 6GT2600-4AC00 6GT2600-4AG00 6GT2600-4AH00 6GT2600-4AK00-0AX0 6GT2600-4AB00 6GT2600-5AE00 6GT2600-5AF00 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 6GT2600-5AC00 6GT2600-5AG00 6GT2600-5AH00 6GT2600-5AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Table A- 12 Communication modules/interface modules Communications mod-
ule ASM 456 ASM 475 RF120C RF160C RF170C RF180C RF182C RFID 181EIP Table A- 13 Antennas Antenna ANT 1 ANT 3 Description ASM 456 for PROFIBUS DP-V1 max. 2 readers connectable ASM 475 for SIMATIC S7 max. 2 RF3xxR readers with RS-422 can be connected in parallel with-
out a front connector Communications module RF120C for SIMATIC S7-1200 Communications module RF160C for PROFIBUS DP V0 max. 2 readers connectable RF170C communications module RF170C connecting block RF180C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 RF182C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 RF182C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 IP67 Description Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 20 mm incl. an integrated antenna cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 28 x 10 mm without antenna connecting cable Article number 6GT2002-0ED00 6GT2002-0GA10 6GT2002-0LA00 6GT2002-0EF00 6GT2002-0HD00 6GT2002-1HD00 6GT2002-0JD00 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 6GT2002-0JD10 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 6GT2002-0JD20 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 Article number 6GT2398-1CB00 6GT2398-1CD30-0AX0 incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m 6GT2398-1CD40-0AX0 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 447 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Antenna ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 IP67 Description Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 28 x 10 mm without antenna connecting cable incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M8 x 40 mm without antenna connecting cable incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M12 x 40 mm incl. one integrated antenna connecting cable 0.6 m incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 (front) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M18 x 55 mm incl. one integrated antenna connecting cable 0.6 m incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M30 x 58 mm incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m Article number 6GT2398-1CD50-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD60-0AX0 6GT2398-1CF00 6GT2398-1CF10 6GT2398-1CC10 6GT2398-1CC00 6GT2398-1CA10 6GT2398-1CA00 6GT2398-1CD00 Accessories Table A- 14 Accessories for RF300 reader Reader RF380R 448 Accessories RS-232 plug-in cable with 4-pin connector Plug-in cable RS-232 with open ends (5 m) Plug-in cable RS-232 with D-SUB M12, 8-pin and with M8, 3-pin power unit connector Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Table A- 15 RF300 transponder accessories Transponder RF320T RF330T RF360T RF380T Accessories Spacer ( x H): 36 x 22 mm Fixing hood (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm Spacer (L x W x H): 110 x 62 x 24 mm
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket (L x W x H): 121 x 57 x 5 mm
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Holder (short version) Holder (long version) Shrouding cover Universal holder Table A- 16 Transponder accessories Transponder MDS D100 / D200 /
D400 MDS D139 / D339 MDS D124 / D324 /
D424 / D524 MDS D126 / D426 /
D526 / E624 MDS D160 / D460 MDS D423 Accessories Spacer Fixing pocket Securing pocket
(cannot be mounted directly on metal) Spacer ( x H): 85 x 30 mm Quick change holder ( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder ( x H): 22 x 47 mm Spacer ( x H): 36 x 22 mm Spacer ( x H): 59 x 30 mm Spacer ( x H): 20 x 14 mm Spacer (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm Table A- 17 Accessory connecting RF300 reader PC Connecting cable RF240R / RF260R /
RF290R (RS232) and PC Accessories Connecting cable RS-232 with M12 male connector (4-pin), 5 m Connecting cable RS-232 with open ends, 5 m Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 6GT2690-0AE00 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2090-0QA00 6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3 6GT2090-0QB00 6GT2590-0QA00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 6GT2690-0AK00 6GT2690-0AL00 6GT2690-0AG00 6GT2690-0AE00 Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 449 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Table A- 18 Accessories - connecting cable communications module/ASM reader Connecting cables ASM 456 / RF160C /
RF170C / RF180C and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) ASM 456 / RF160C /
RF170C / RF180C and RF3xxR reader
(RS-422) with angled connector ASM 475 and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) RF120C and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) Description Length 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m 2 m 5 m 10 m 2 m 5 m 2 m 5 m 10 m Table A- 19 RFID accessories, general RFID general DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(100 - 240 VAC / 24 VDC / 3 A) with country-specific power cable/plug, 2 m 24 V connecting cable, 5 m M12 connector, 4-pin for wide range power supply unit, pack of 3 Article number 6GT2891-4FH20 6GT2891-4FH50 6GT2891-4FN10 6GT2891-4FN20 6GT2891-4FN50 6GT2891-4JH20 6GT2891-4JH50 6GT2891-4JN10 6GT2891-4EH20 6GT2891-4EH50 6GT2091-4LH20 6GT2091-4LH50 6GT2091-4LN10 Article number 6GT2080-2AA20 EU: 6GT2898-0AC00 UK: 6GT2898-0AC10 US: 6GT2898-0AC20 6GT2491-1HH50 6GK1907-0DB10-
6AA3 450 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 A.5 Service & Support Industry Online Support Appendix A.5 Service & Support In addition to the product documentation, the comprehensive online information platform of Siemens Industry Online Support at the following Internet address:
Link 1: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/) Apart from news, there you will also find:
Project information: Manuals, FAQs, downloads, application examples etc. Contacts, Technical Forum The option submitting a support query:
link 2: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests) Our service offer:
Right across our products and systems, we provide numerous services that support you in every phase of the life of your machine or system - from planning and implementation to commissioning, through to maintenance and modernization. You will find contact data on the Internet at the following address:
Link 3: (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app) RFID homepage For general information about our identification systems, visit RFID homepage
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/identification-systems/). Online catalog and ordering system The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall Homepage (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). SITRAIN - Training for Industry The training offer includes more than 300 courses on basic topics, extended knowledge and special knowledge as well as advanced training for individual sectors - available at more than 130 locations. Courses can also be organized individually and held locally at your location. You will find detailed information on the training curriculum and how to contact our customer consultants at the following Internet address:
Link: (http://sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld/) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 451 Appendix A.5 Service & Support 452 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Index A Antennas Minimum clearances, 228 Application Planning SIMATIC RF300, 39 Approvals, 423 ASM 475 Assignment for connecting cable, 404, 438 Cable installation, 405 Design and function, 400 Function of the LEDs, 403 Indicators, 403 Ordering data, 401 Pin assignment, 404, 438 Status display with LEDs, 403 C Cabinet configuration, 116 Cable, 436 Reader - ASM, 436 Shielding, 121 Certificates, 423 Communication modules, 397 Communication time Calculation, 50 Connecting cable Coupling paths, 114 Customer benefits, 33 Reader-communication module/ASM/PC, 436 D Detection area, 47 Diagnostics functions Reader, 416 Transponder, 420 Direction of motion Transponder, 47 Dwell time Transponder, 49 Dynamic mode, 48 Dwell time of the transponder, 49 E Electromagnetic compatibility Coupling paths, 114 Electromagnetic interference, 112 EMC directives Definition, 110 Equipotential bonding, 120 EMC Directives EMC Guidelines Avoiding interference, 119 Basic Rules, 111 Cabinet configuration, 116 Cable shielding, 121 Overview, 109 Equipotential bonding, 120 Error codes Reader, 413 Propagation of electromagnetic interference, 112 F Field data ISO transponder, 56, 62 RF300 transponder, 52 Fields of application, 33 Flush-mounting of transponders and readers, 68 H High-performance, 24 I Inductive alternating field, 39 Input parameter, 397 Installation Several readers, 68 Installation guidelines, 67 Interface modules, 397 Interference sources Electromagnetic, 113 ISO 14443 functionality, 123 ISO 15693 functionality, 123 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 453 Index ISO transponder Resistance to chemicals, 99 M Main applications, 33 MDS D100 transponder Technical specifications, 281 MDS D117 transponder Technical specifications, 284 MDS D124 Transponder Technical specifications, 288 MDS D127 transponder Technical specifications, 298 MDS D160 transponder Technical specifications, 309 MDS D200 transponder Technical specifications, 316 MDS D339 transponder Technical specifications, 328 MDS D424 Transponder Technical specifications, 352 MDS D425 Transponder Technical specifications, 355 MDS D428 transponder Technical specifications, 362 MDS D460 Transponder Technical specifications, 366 MDS D521 transponder Technical specifications, 370 MDS D522 transponder Technical specifications, 373 MDS D524 transponder Technical specifications, 382 MDS D525 transponder Technical specifications, 385 MDS D526 transponder Technical specifications, 390 MDS D528 transponder Technical specifications, 393 Metal-free area Transponder RF330T, 240 Transponder RF340T, 245 Transponder RF350T, 249 Transponder RF360T, 254 Transponder RF370T, 260 Transponder RF380T, 267 Minimum clearances Antenna to antenna, 228 Minimum distance Antenna to antenna, 66 Reader to reader, 65 Transponder to transponder, 64 O Ordering data, 441 Antennas, 224, 447 Communications modules, 447 ISO transponder, 445 Overview, 441 Reader, 441 RF300 transponder, 444 P Parameterization Function blocks, 397 Possible combinations Reader - transponder, 27, 29, 32 R Read/write distance, 39 Reader Installing, 68 Reducing interference due to metal, 67 Reduction of field data by metal RF310R, 71 RF340R, 75 RF350R with ANT 1, 79 RF350R with ANT 18, 87 RF350R with ANT 3, 82 RF350R with ANT 30, 90 RF380R, 93 RF382R, 96 RF330T Characteristics, 240 RFID systems Overview, 23 Medium-performance, 24 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders, 234 Metal Influence on the transmission window, 70 Resistance to chemicals Transponder, 99 RF300 transponder Resistance to chemicals, 99 454 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Index SIMATIC RF300 components, 39 Dwell time of the transponder, 49 S Scanmode, 24 Selection criteria Shielding, 121 Static mode, 47 Structure System manual, 15 Support, 451 System diagnostics MDS STATUS, 420 Reader status, 416 SLG STATUS, 416 Tag status, 420 System overview RFID systems, 23 T Technical specifications MDS D100 transponder, 281 MDS D117 transponder, 284 MDS D124 Transponder, 288 MDS D127 transponder, 298 MDS D160 transponder, 309 MDS D200 transponder, 316 MDS D339 transponder, 328 MDS D424 Transponder, 352 MDS D425 Transponder, 355 MDS D428 transponder, 362 MDS D460 Transponder, 366 MDS D521 transponder, 370 MDS D522 transponder, 373 MDS D524 transponder, 382 MDS D525 transponder, 385 MDS D526 transponder, 390 MDS D528 transponder, 393 Transponder MDS D126, 294 Transponder MDS D139, 303 Transponder MDS D165, 312 Transponder MDS D261, 319 Transponder MDS D324, 323 Transponder MDS D400, 335 Transponder MDS D421, 341 Transponder MDS D422, 344 Transponder MDS D423, 348 Transponder MDS D426, 359 Transponder RF320T, 238 Transponder RF330T, 242 Transponder RF340T, 246 Transponder RF350T, 251 Transponder RF360T, 257 Transponder RF370T, 261 Transponder RF380T, 273 Tracking Tolerance, 42 Tracking tolerances, 42 Training, 451 Transmission gaps, 51 Transmission window Antennas, 41 Impact of metal, 70 Reader, 40 Width, 42 Transponder Detection area, 47 Directions of motion, 47 Dwell time, 49 Mounting on metal, 70 Transponder MDS D126 Technical specifications, 294 Transponder MDS D139 Technical specifications, 303 Transponder MDS D165 Technical specifications, 312 Transponder MDS D261 Technical specifications, 319 Transponder MDS D324 Technical specifications, 323 Transponder MDS D400 Technical specifications, 335 Transponder MDS D421 Technical specifications, 341 Transponder MDS D422 Technical specifications, 344 Transponder MDS D423 Technical specifications, 348 Transponder MDS D426 Technical specifications, 359 Transponder RF320T Characteristics, 236 Technical specifications, 238 Transponder RF330T Characteristics, 240 Metal-free area, 240 Technical specifications, 242 Transponder RF340T Characteristics, 244 Metal-free area, 245 Technical specifications, 246 Transponder RF350T Characteristics, 248 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 455 Index Metal-free area, 249 Technical specifications, 251 Transponder RF360T Characteristics, 253 Metal-free area, 254 Technical specifications, 257 Transponder RF370T Characteristics, 259 Metal-free area, 260 Technical specifications, 261 Transponder RF380T Metal-free area, 267 Technical specifications, 273 U User data Calculation, 50 456 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07
1 2 | Users manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.03 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
___________________ 1 Introduction 2 ___________________ Safety information ___________________ 3 System overview ___________________ 4 Planning the RF300 system ___________________ 5 Readers ___________________ 6 Antennas ___________________ 7 RF300 transponder ___________________ 8 ISO transponder ___________________ 9 System integration ___________________ 10 System diagnostics ___________________ A Appendix SIMATIC RF300 SIMATIC Ident RFID systems SIMATIC RF300 System Manual Note: This document is a draft document. This document is not released for publication. Siemens accepts no liability for the completeness and correctness of the contents. 07/2016 C79000-G8976-C345-0x Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following:
WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NRNBERG GERMANY Document order number: C79000-G8976-C345 07/2016 Subject to change Copyright Siemens AG 2005 - 2016. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 2 3 4 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13 1.1 Navigating in the system manual ............................................................................................ 13 1.2 Preface .................................................................................................................................... 14 Safety information ................................................................................................................................. 17 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 21 RFID systems ......................................................................................................................... 21 3.1 SIMATIC RF300 ...................................................................................................................... 22 3.2 3.2.1 System overview of SIMATIC RF300 ..................................................................................... 22 RFID components and their function ...................................................................................... 23 3.2.2 Application areas of RF300 .................................................................................................... 31 3.2.3 3.3 System configuration .............................................................................................................. 32 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 32 3.3.1 Assembly line example: Use of RF300 transponders ............................................................. 32 3.3.2 3.3.3 Example of container and cardboard container handling: Use of ISO transponders ............. 34 Planning the RF300 system .................................................................................................................. 37 Fundamentals of application planning .................................................................................... 37 4.1 Selection criteria for SIMATIC RF300 components ................................................................ 37 4.1.1 Transmission window and read/write distance ....................................................................... 37 4.1.2 4.1.3 Width of the transmission window .......................................................................................... 40 Impact of secondary fields ...................................................................................................... 41 4.1.4 Setup help of the readers of the second generation ............................................................... 43 4.1.5 Permissible directions of motion of the transponder ............................................................... 44 4.1.6 4.1.7 Operation in static and dynamic mode ................................................................................... 45 Dwell time of the transponder ................................................................................................. 46 4.1.8 Communication between communications module, reader and transponder ........................ 47 4.1.9 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas ................................................................ 48 4.2 4.2.1 Field data of RF300 transponders .......................................................................................... 49 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) ................................................................................ 52 4.2.2 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS E) ................................................................................ 57 4.2.3 4.2.4 Minimum clearances ............................................................................................................... 59 Installation guidelines.............................................................................................................. 62 4.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 62 4.3.1 Reduction of interference due to metal ................................................................................... 62 4.3.2 4.3.3 Effects of metal on different transponders and readers .......................................................... 64 Impact on the transmission window by metal ......................................................................... 65 4.3.4 Impact on the transmission window by metal ......................................................................... 65 4.3.4.1 RF340R ................................................................................................................................... 69 4.3.4.2 RF350R ................................................................................................................................... 73 4.3.4.3 4.3.4.4 RF380R ................................................................................................................................... 85 RF382R ................................................................................................................................... 89 4.3.4.5 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 3 Table of contents Chemical resistance of the transponders .............................................................................. 90 4.4 Overview of the transponders and their housing materials ................................................... 90 4.4.1 Polyamide 12 ......................................................................................................................... 91 4.4.2 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) ................................................................................................. 93 4.4.3 Polycarbonate (PC) ................................................................................................................ 94 4.4.4 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) ........................................................................................................ 95 4.4.5 Epoxy resin ............................................................................................................................ 96 4.4.6 PA6.6 GF30 ........................................................................................................................... 98 4.4.7 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .............................................................. 99 4.5 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 99 4.5.1 What does EMC mean? ....................................................................................................... 100 4.5.2 Basic rules ............................................................................................................................ 101 4.5.3 Propagation of electromagnetic interference ....................................................................... 102 4.5.4 Cabinet configuration ........................................................................................................... 106 4.5.5 Prevention of interference sources ...................................................................................... 109 4.5.6 Equipotential bonding .......................................................................................................... 110 4.5.7 4.5.8 Cable shielding..................................................................................................................... 111 Readers ............................................................................................................................................... 113 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R ................................................................................................................ 115 Features ............................................................................................................................... 115 5.1.1 RF310R ordering data ......................................................................................................... 115 5.1.2 Pin assignment RF310R with RS-422 interface .................................................................. 116 5.1.3 5.1.4 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 116 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 116 5.1.5 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 117 5.1.6 Minimum distance between RF310R readers ...................................................................... 117 5.1.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 118 5.1.8 5.1.9 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 120 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 121 5.1.10 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode ...................................................................................... 122 5.2 5.2.1 Features ............................................................................................................................... 122 Ordering data for RF310R with Scanmode .......................................................................... 122 5.2.2 Pin assignment RF310R special version Scanmode RS-422 interface ............................... 123 5.2.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 123 5.2.4 5.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 123 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 124 5.2.6 Minimum distance between several readers ....................................................................... 124 5.2.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 125 5.2.8 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 127 5.2.9 5.2.10 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 128 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation ............................................................................... 129 5.3 Features ............................................................................................................................... 129 5.3.1 5.3.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 129 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface .............................................................................. 130 5.3.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 130 5.3.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 130 5.3.5 5.3.6 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 131 Minimum distance between RF310R readers ...................................................................... 131 5.3.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 132 5.3.8 5.3.9 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 134 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5 4 Table of contents 5.3.10 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.1.1 5.4.1.2 5.4.1.3 5.4.1.4 5.4.1.5 5.4.1.6 5.4.1.7 5.4.1.8 5.4.1.9 5.4.1.10 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.4.2.5 5.4.2.6 5.4.2.7 5.4.2.8 5.4.2.9 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.3.2 5.4.3.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.1.3 5.5.1.4 5.5.1.5 5.5.1.6 5.5.1.7 5.5.1.8 5.5.1.9 5.5.1.10 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.3 5.5.2.4 5.5.2.5 5.5.2.6 5.5.2.7 5.5.2.8 5.5.2.9 5.5.3 5.6 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 135 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R .................................................................................................. 136 SIMATIC RF340R ................................................................................................................. 136 Features ................................................................................................................................ 136 Ordering data for RF340R .................................................................................................... 136 Pin assignment of RF340R RS422 interface ........................................................................ 137 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 137 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 137 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 138 Minimum distance between RF340R readers ...................................................................... 138 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 139 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 141 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 142 SIMATIC RF350R ................................................................................................................. 143 Features ................................................................................................................................ 143 Ordering data for RF350R .................................................................................................... 143 Pin assignment of RF350R RS422 interface ........................................................................ 144 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 144 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 144 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 144 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 145 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 147 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 148 Use of the reader in hazardous areas .................................................................................. 149 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for gases ................................................................. 150 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for dusts .................................................................. 150 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area ............................................... 151 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation ................................................................. 152 SIMATIC RF340R - second generation ................................................................................ 152 Features ................................................................................................................................ 152 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 152 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface ............................................................................... 153 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 153 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 153 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 154 Minimum distance between RF340R readers ...................................................................... 154 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 155 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 157 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 158 SIMATIC RF350R - second generation ................................................................................ 159 Features ................................................................................................................................ 159 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 159 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface ............................................................................... 160 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 160 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 160 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 161 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 161 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 163 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 164 Use of the reader in hazardous areas .................................................................................. 165 SIMATIC RF380R ................................................................................................................. 166 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5 Table of contents Features ............................................................................................................................... 166 5.6.1 RF380R ordering data ......................................................................................................... 166 5.6.2 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface......................................................... 166 5.6.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 167 5.6.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 167 5.6.5 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 168 5.6.6 Minimum distance between RF380R readers ...................................................................... 168 5.6.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 169 5.6.8 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 171 5.6.9 Use of the reader in hazardous areas ................................................................................. 172 5.6.10 Use of the reader in hazardous areas for gases .................................................................. 173 5.6.11 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area .............................................. 173 5.6.12 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 174 5.6.13 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode ...................................................................................... 175 5.7 Features ............................................................................................................................... 175 5.7.1 Ordering data for RF380R with Scanmode .......................................................................... 175 5.7.2 Pin assignment RF380R Scanmode RS-232 interface........................................................ 176 5.7.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 176 5.7.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 176 5.7.5 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 177 5.7.6 Minimum distance between several RF380R Scanmode readers ....................................... 177 5.7.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 178 5.7.8 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 180 5.7.9 5.7.10 Certificates and Approvals ................................................................................................... 181 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 181 5.7.11 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode ...................................................................................... 182 5.8 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 182 5.8.1 RF382R with Scanmode ordering data ................................................................................ 182 5.8.2 Pin assignment RF382R Scanmode RS232 interface ......................................................... 183 5.8.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 183 5.8.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 183 5.8.5 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 183 5.8.6 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers ....................................... 184 5.8.7 Transmission window ........................................................................................................... 184 5.8.8 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 188 5.8.9 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 189 5.8.10 5.8.11 Dimensional diagram ........................................................................................................... 191 Antennas ............................................................................................................................................. 193 6.1 Features ............................................................................................................................... 193 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 196 6.2 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 196 6.3 6.4 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 197 Minimum distance between antennas ................................................................................. 200 6.5 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 201 6.6 6.7 Dimensional drawings .......................................................................................................... 203 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 6 6 7 Table of contents RF300 transponder ............................................................................................................................. 207 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders ............................................................... 208 7.1 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T ................................................................................................................. 211 Features ................................................................................................................................ 211 7.2.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 211 7.2.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 212 7.2.3 7.2.4 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 213 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 214 7.2.5 SIMATIC RF330T ................................................................................................................. 215 7.3 Features ................................................................................................................................ 215 7.3.1 7.3.2 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 215 Mounting on/in metal............................................................................................................. 216 7.3.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 217 7.3.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 219 7.3.5 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T ................................................................................................................. 220 Features ................................................................................................................................ 220 7.4.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 220 7.4.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 221 7.4.3 7.4.4 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 222 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 223 7.4.5 SIMATIC RF350T ................................................................................................................. 224 7.5 7.5.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 224 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 224 7.5.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 224 7.5.3 Mounting options ................................................................................................................... 226 7.5.4 7.5.5 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 227 7.5.6 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 228 SIMATIC RF360T ................................................................................................................. 229 7.6 Features ................................................................................................................................ 229 7.6.1 7.6.2 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 229 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 229 7.6.3 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 232 7.6.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 233 7.6.5 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T ................................................................................................................. 234 Features ................................................................................................................................ 234 7.7.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 234 7.7.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 235 7.7.3 7.7.4 Mounting instructions ............................................................................................................ 236 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 236 7.7.5 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................................. 237 7.7.6 SIMATIC RF380T ................................................................................................................. 238 7.8 7.8.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 238 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 238 7.8.2 Installation guidelines for RF380T ........................................................................................ 239 7.8.3 Mounting instructions ............................................................................................................ 239 7.8.3.1 7.8.3.2 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 242 Configuring instructions ........................................................................................................ 243 7.8.4 7.8.4.1 Temperature dependence of the transmission window ........................................................ 243 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7 Table of contents Temperature response in cyclic operation ........................................................................... 243 7.8.4.2 Use of the transponder in the Ex protection area ................................................................ 246 7.8.5 Use of the transponder in hazardous areas for gases ......................................................... 246 7.8.5.1 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area .............................................. 247 7.8.5.2 Cleaning the mobile data memory ....................................................................................... 247 7.8.6 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 247 7.8.7 7.8.8 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 249 ISO transponder .................................................................................................................................. 251 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders ................................................................... 252 8.1 MDS D100 ............................................................................................................................ 254 8.2 8.2.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 254 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 254 8.2.2 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 254 8.2.3 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 256 8.2.4 8.2.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 258 MDS D117 ............................................................................................................................ 259 8.3 Features ............................................................................................................................... 259 8.3.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 259 8.3.2 8.3.3 Mounting in metal ................................................................................................................. 260 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 260 8.3.4 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 261 8.3.5 8.4 MDS D124 ............................................................................................................................ 262 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 262 8.4.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 262 8.4.2 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 263 8.4.3 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 264 8.4.4 8.4.5 Use of the MDS D124 in hazardous area ............................................................................ 265 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 267 8.4.6 MDS D126 ............................................................................................................................ 268 8.5 8.5.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 268 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 268 8.5.2 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 269 8.5.3 8.5.4 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 270 8.5.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 271 MDS D127 ............................................................................................................................ 272 8.6 Features ............................................................................................................................... 272 8.6.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 272 8.6.2 8.6.3 Mounting in metal ................................................................................................................. 273 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 274 8.6.4 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 275 8.6.5 MDS D139 ............................................................................................................................ 276 8.7 8.7.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 276 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 277 8.7.2 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 277 8.7.3 Cleaning the mobile data memory ....................................................................................... 278 8.7.4 8.7.5 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 279 Use of the MDS D139 in hazardous areas .......................................................................... 280 8.7.6 8.7.7 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................. 282 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8 8 Table of contents 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 8.8.6 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.10 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 8.10.5 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.12 8.12.1 8.12.2 8.12.3 8.12.4 8.12.5 8.13 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 8.13.6 8.13.7 8.14 8.14.1 8.14.2 8.14.3 8.14.4 8.14.5 8.15 8.15.1 8.15.2 8.15.3 8.15.4 8.15.5 MDS D160 ............................................................................................................................ 283 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 283 Information for RF300 compatibility ...................................................................................... 283 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 283 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 284 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 285 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................. 287 MDS D165 ............................................................................................................................ 288 Features ................................................................................................................................ 288 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 288 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 289 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 290 MDS D200 ............................................................................................................................ 291 Features ................................................................................................................................ 291 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 291 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 292 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 293 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 295 MDS D261 ............................................................................................................................ 296 Features ................................................................................................................................ 296 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 296 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 297 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 298 MDS D324 ............................................................................................................................ 299 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 299 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 299 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 300 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 301 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 302 MDS D339 ............................................................................................................................ 303 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 303 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 303 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 304 Cleaning the mobile data memory ........................................................................................ 305 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 305 Use of the MDS D339 in hazardous areas ........................................................................... 307 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................................. 309 MDS D400 ............................................................................................................................ 310 Features ................................................................................................................................ 310 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 310 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 311 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 312 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 314 MDS D421 ............................................................................................................................ 315 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 315 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 315 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 316 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 318 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 320 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 9 Table of contents 8.16 8.16.1 8.16.2 8.16.3 8.16.4 8.16.5 8.17 8.17.1 8.17.2 8.17.3 8.17.4 8.17.5 8.18 8.18.1 8.18.2 8.18.3 8.18.4 8.18.5 8.19 8.19.1 8.19.2 8.19.3 8.19.4 8.19.5 8.20 8.20.1 8.20.2 8.20.3 8.20.4 8.20.5 8.21 8.21.1 8.21.2 8.21.3 8.21.4 8.21.5 8.22 8.22.1 8.22.2 8.22.3 8.22.4 8.22.5 8.23 8.23.1 8.23.2 8.23.3 8.23.4 8.23.5 MDS D422 ............................................................................................................................ 321 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 321 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 321 Mounting in metal ................................................................................................................. 322 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 323 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 324 MDS D423 ............................................................................................................................ 325 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 325 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 325 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 326 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 327 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 329 MDS D424 ............................................................................................................................ 330 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 330 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 330 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 331 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 332 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 333 MDS D425 ............................................................................................................................ 334 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 334 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 334 Application example ............................................................................................................. 335 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 335 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 337 MDS D426 ............................................................................................................................ 338 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 338 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 338 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 339 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 340 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 341 MDS D428 ............................................................................................................................ 342 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 342 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 342 Application example ............................................................................................................. 343 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 343 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 345 MDS D460 ............................................................................................................................ 346 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 346 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 346 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 347 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 347 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................. 349 MDS D521 ............................................................................................................................ 350 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 350 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 350 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 350 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 353 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 354 10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 9 Table of contents MDS D522 ............................................................................................................................ 355 8.24 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 355 8.24.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 355 8.24.2 Mounting in metal .................................................................................................................. 355 8.24.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 356 8.24.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 357 8.24.5 MDS D522 special variant .................................................................................................... 358 8.25 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 358 8.25.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 358 8.25.2 Mounting in metal .................................................................................................................. 359 8.25.3 Installation instructions.......................................................................................................... 359 8.25.4 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 361 8.25.5 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................................. 362 8.25.6 MDS D524 ............................................................................................................................ 363 8.26 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 363 8.26.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 363 8.26.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 364 8.26.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 365 8.26.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 366 8.26.5 MDS D525 ............................................................................................................................ 367 8.27 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 367 8.27.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 367 8.27.2 Application example .............................................................................................................. 368 8.27.3 8.27.4 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 368 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 370 8.27.5 MDS D526 ............................................................................................................................ 371 8.28 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 371 8.28.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 371 8.28.2 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 372 8.28.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 373 8.28.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 374 8.28.5 MDS D528 ............................................................................................................................ 375 8.29 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 375 8.29.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 375 8.29.2 Application example .............................................................................................................. 376 8.29.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 376 8.29.4 8.29.5 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 378 System integration .............................................................................................................................. 379 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 379 9.1 ASM 456 ............................................................................................................................... 382 9.2 9.3 ASM 475 ............................................................................................................................... 382 Features ................................................................................................................................ 382 9.3.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 383 9.3.2 Indicators .............................................................................................................................. 384 9.3.3 9.3.4 Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 386 Shield connection .................................................................................................................. 388 9.3.5 9.3.6 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 389 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 11 Table of contents RF120C ................................................................................................................................ 391 9.4 RF160C ................................................................................................................................ 391 9.5 RF170C ................................................................................................................................ 392 9.6 RF180C ................................................................................................................................ 393 9.7 9.8 RF182C ................................................................................................................................ 394 System diagnostics .............................................................................................................................. 395 Error codes ........................................................................................................................... 395 10.1 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic ............................................................................... 397 10.2 10.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 397 Reader diagnostics with SLG STATUS ............................................................................... 398 10.2.2 Transponder diagnostics with MDS STATUS ...................................................................... 401 10.2.3 10.3 Diagnostics functions STEP 7 Basic / Professional ............................................................. 403 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 405 Certificates and approvals ................................................................................................... 405 A.1 A.2 Accessories .......................................................................................................................... 407 Transponder holders ............................................................................................................ 407 A.2.1 MOBY Y adapter for MOBY I migration ............................................................................... 414 A.2.2 DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" ............................................................... 416 A.2.3 A.3 Connecting cable ................................................................................................................. 417 RF3xxR reader (RS-422) with ASM 456 / RF160C / RF170C / RF180C / RF182C ............ 417 A.3.1 Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 ............................................................................. 419 A.3.2 Reader RF3xxR (RS-422) with RF120C .............................................................................. 420 A.3.3 A.3.4 Reader RF380R (RS232) - PC ............................................................................................ 421 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 423 A.4 A.5 Service & Support ................................................................................................................ 434 Index ................................................................................................................................................... 437 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 10 A 12 Introduction 1 1.1 Navigating in the system manual Structure of the content Contents Introduction Safety Information System overview Planning the RF300 system Reader Antennas RF300 transponder ISO transponder System integration System diagnostics Appendix Content Detailed organization of the documentation, including the index of pages and chapters Purpose, structure and description of the important topics. Refers to all the valid technical safety aspects which have to be adhered to while installing, commissioning and operating from the product/system view and with reference to statutory regulations. Overview of all RF identification systems, system overview of SIMATIC RF300 Information about possible applications of SIMATIC RF300, support for application plan-
ning, tools for finding suitable SIMATIC RF300 components. Description of readers which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of antennas which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of RF300 transponders which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of ISO transponders which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Overview of the communications modules and function blocks that can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of system diagnostics available for SIMATIC RF300 Certificates and approvals Accessories Connecting cables Ordering data Service & Support SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 13 Introduction 1.2 Preface 1.2 Preface Purpose of this document This system manual contains all the information needed to plan and configure the system. It is intended both for programming and testing/debugging personnel who commission the system themselves and connect it with other units (automation systems, further programming devices), as well as for service and maintenance personnel who install expansions or carry out fault/error analyses. Scope of validity of this document This documentation is valid for all variants of the SIMATIC RF300 system and describes the devices shipped as of July 2016. Additional information You will find further information about the readers RF350M, RF310R Scanmode and RF382R Scanmode in the relevant manuals. Additional information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15033) Registered trademarks SIMATIC , SIMATIC RF , MOBY , RF MANAGER and SIMATIC Sensors are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. History Currently released versions of the SIMATIC RF300 system manual:
Edition 05/2005 11/2005 04/2006 12/2006 07/2007 09/2007 06/2008 01/2009 Remark First Edition Revised edition, components added: RF310R with RS-422 interface, RF350T and RF360T; ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475 Revised edition, components added: RF340R as well as RF350R with the antenna types ANT 1, ANT 18 and ANT 30 Revised edition, components added: RF370T, RF380T and RF170C Revised edition, degrees of protection changed for the RF300 readers Revised edition, components added: RF380R and RF180C Revised edition Revised edition, expanded by the reader functionalities "RF300 transponder" and "ISO transponder" for the SIMATIC RF310R and SIMATIC RF380R readers 14 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Introduction 1.2 Preface Edition 03/2014 Remark Revised edition, expanded by the reader functionalities "RF300 transponder" and "ISO transponder" for the SIMATIC RF340R and SIMATIC RF350R readers Expanded by the following components:
Reader RF310R with Scanmode, RF382R with Scanmode Communications module RF120C Antennas ANT 12 (in conjunction with RF350R) and ANT 8 (in conjunction with RF310M) RF300 transponder RF330T ISO transponder MDS D117, D126, D127, D165, D200, D261, D339, D400, D422, D423, D425, D426 07/2016 Revised and expanded edition Expanded by the following components:
Readers of the second generation RF310R, RF340R, RF350R Reader RF380R Scanmode Antenna ANT 3, ANT 3S ISO transponder MDS D5xx MOBY E migration in SIMATIC RF300 MOBY Y adapter for MOBY I migration in SIMATIC RF300 Abbreviations and naming conventions The following terms/abbreviations are used synonymously in this document:
Reader Transponder, tag Communications module (CM) Write/read device (SLG) Data carrier, mobile data storage, (MDS) Interface module (ASM) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 15 Introduction 1.2 Preface 16 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Safety information 2 SIMATIC RFID products comply with the salient safety specifications acc. to IEC, VDE, EN, UL and CSA. If you have questions about the permissibility of the installation in the planned environment, please contact your service representative. WARNING Opening the device Do not open the device when when the power supply is on. Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user. NOTICE Alterations not permitted Alterations to the devices are not permitted. Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment approval, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty. Installation instructions NOTICE Switch/fuse to disconnect the reader from the power supply Make sure that the readers can be disconnected from the power supply with a switch or a fuse. The function of the switch or fuse must be clearly recognizable. Operating temperature CAUTION Danger of burns Note that some outer components of the reader are made of metal. Depending on the environmental conditions temperatures can occur on the device that are higher than the maximum permitted operating temperature. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 17 Safety information Repairs WARNING Repairs only by authorized qualified personnel Repairs may only be carried out by authorized qualified personnel. Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user. System expansions Only install system expansions intended for this system. If you install other expansions, you may damage the system or violate the safety requirements and regulations for radio frequency interference suppression. Contact Technical Support or your local sales department to find out which system expansions are suitable for installation. NOTICE Warranty conditions If you cause system defects by installing or exchanging system expansion devices, the warranty becomes void. Safety distances CAUTION Safety distance between reader/antenna and persons Note that for permanent exposure, the following safety distances must be adhered to:
RF310R: 80 mm RF340R: 130 mm RF350R + ANT 1: 140 mm RF350R + ANT 3: 80 mm RF350R + ANT 12: 25 mm RF350R + ANT 18: 50 mm RF350R + ANT 30: 80 mm RF380R: 250 mm RF382R: 130 mm Note Safety distance with pacemakers A safety distance between reader/antenna and persons with pacemakers is not necessary. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 18 Security information Safety information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You will find more information about Industrial Security in:
Industrial security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You will find more information about this in Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15247/pm) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 19 Safety information 20 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.1 RFID systems 3 RFID systems from Siemens control and optimize material flow. They identify reliably, quickly and economically, are insensitive to contamination and store data directly on the product or workpiece carrier. Table 3- 1 Overview of SIMATIC RFID systems SIMATIC RF200 13.56 MHz SIMATIC RF300 13.56 MHz MOBY D 13.56 MHz HF UHF SIMATIC RF600 865 ... 928 MHz 1) Frequency range RFID system Transmission frequen-
cy Range, max. Protocols
(air interface) Standards, specifica-
tions, approvals 650 mm ISO 15693 ISO 18000-3 EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA Memory capacity, max. Maximum data transfer rate for wireless transmission Multitag capability 992 bytes (EEPROM) 8192 bytes (FRAM) 25.5 kbps With RF290R reader only Special characteristics Particularly com-
pact designs For particularly low-cost RFID so-
lutions IO-Link for simple identification tasks 210 mm RF300 (proprie-
ISO 15693 ISO 18000-3 tary) EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA ATEX 64 kB (EEPROM) 8192 bytes (FRAM) 106 kbps 380 mm ISO 15693 ISO 18000-3 EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA 8 m EPCglobal Class 1 Gen 2 ISO 18000-6B ISO 18000-6C ETSI EN 3002208, CE FCC UL 922 bytes (EEPROM) 2000 bytes (FRAM) 26.5 kbps 496 bits (EPC), 3424 bytes 300 kbps Yes/No 2) Yes Yes High data trans-
mission speed Extended diagnos-
tics options High memory ca-
pacity SIMATIC or PC/IT integration External antennas for industrial appli-
cations SIMATIC or PC/IT integration Data preprocessing in the readers Special antennas for industrial appli-
cations 1) Depends on the country of deployment and the frequency regulations that apply there 2) Multitag capability only with the readers of the second generation and in conjunction with ISO transponders. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 21 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 3.2.1 System overview of SIMATIC RF300 SIMATIC RF300 is an inductive identification system specially designed for use in industrial production for the control and optimization of material flow. Thanks to its compact dimensions, RF300 is the obvious choice where installation conditions are restricted, especially for assembly lines, handling systems and workpiece carrier systems. RF300 is suitable for both simple and demanding RFID applications and it stands out for its persuasive price/performance ratio. Scanmode applications In applications without command control, the transponders are read automatically. The type of data acquisition and transfer is preset in the reader using parameters. Medium-performance applications RF300 in conjunction with ISO transponders provides a cost-effective solution for medium-
performance applications. High-performance applications The high-performance components of RF300 in conjunction with the RF300 transponders provide advantages in terms of high data transmission speeds and storage capacities. SIMATIC RF300 - second generation As of the delivery stage in the first quarter of 2017 an innovative second generation of the readers RF310R, RF340R und RF350R is available. These readers apart from additional performance characteristics are 100% compatible with the RF300s of the first generation. The second generation of the RF380R comes later. Additional performance features:
Additional transponder protocol ISO 14443 (air interface) for MDS E transponders Automatic detection of different transponder types (RF300, ISO 15693, ISO 14443) Emulation of MOBY I write/read devices (SLG 4x) in conjunction with RF300 transponders for simplified migration Setup help integrated in the reader The setup help serves the simple optimization of the reader-transponder positioning during installation/commissioning. Further installation or software are not necessary. The setup help becomes active directly after turning the device on. Improved 5-color LED display 22 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 User-friendly parameter assignment and configuration with TIA Portal technological object
(as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1) Expanded functions for trained users:
Address information for the "INIT" command no longer necessary Expanded "RESET" parameter The MDS-STATUS "Mode 3" functions with all transponder types Automatic antenna recognition with the reader RF350R (depending on the antenna) Table 3- 2 Differences in the features Feature SIMATIC RF300 first generation
--
Transponder protocol RF300 Transponder protocol ISO 15693 Transponder protocol ISO 14443 MOBY I emulation to the con-
troller Integrated setup help LED display RFID technological object 1) With the TIA Portal as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1
--
1 x
--
--
SIMATIC RF300 second generation 2 x 1) 3.2.2 RFID components and their function System components overview Table 3- 3 RF300 system components Component Communications module Reader Transponder Description A communications module is used to integrate the RF identification system in controllers/automation systems. The reader ensures inductive communication and power supply to the tran-
sponder, and handles the connection to the various controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7) through the communications module (e.g. ASM 456). The transponder stores all data relevant for production and is used, for exam-
ple, instead of barcode. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 23 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for high-performance applications Figure 3-1 High performance system overview Table 3- 4 Reader-transponder combination options for high-performance applications Transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R with ANT 1 RF350R with ANT 3 RF350R with ANT 18 RF350R with ANT 30 RF380R RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T 24
--
--
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R with ANT 1 RF350R with ANT 3 RF350R with ANT 18 RF350R with ANT 30 RF380R RF370T RF380T 1) as of reader version "AS D"
1)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 25 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for medium-performance applications Figure 3-2 System overview medium-performance 26 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Table 3- 5 Reader-transponder combination options for medium-performance applications Transponder /
MDS RF310R
(RS-422) RF340R RF350R with ANT RF350R with ANT
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
MDS D100 MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 1) MDS D400 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 MDS E600 2) MDS E611 2) MDS E623 2) MDS E624 2) 1) as of reader version "AS D"
2) Product to be discontinued; only relevant for migration projects.
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 18
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF380R
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 27 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Note Note on operation of the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx Note that the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx can only be operated in conjunction with the readers of the second generation (article number "6GT2801-xBAxx"). 28 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for Scanmode applications Figure 3-3 Scanmode system overview SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 29 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Table 3- 6 Reader-transponder combination options for Scanmode applications RF310R Transponder /
MDS MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS E610 1) MDS E611 1) MDS E624 1) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T 1) Product to be discontinued; only relevant for migration projects.
--
--
RF380R RF382R
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended Note Note on operation of the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx Note that the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx can only be operated in conjunction with the readers of the second generation (article number "6GT2801-xBAxx"). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 30 3.2.3 Application areas of RF300 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 SIMATIC RF300 is primarily used for non-contact identification of containers, palettes and workpiece holders in a closed production circuit. The data carriers (transponders) remain in the production chain and are not supplied with the products. SIMATIC RF300, with its compact transponder and reader enclosure dimensions, is particularly suitable in confined spaces. Main applications Mechanical engineering, automation systems, conveyor systems Ancillary assembly lines in the automotive industry, component suppliers Small assembly lines Application examples Production lines for engines, gearboxes, axles, etc. Assembly lines for ABS systems, airbags, brake systems, doors, cockpits, etc. Assembly lines for household electrical appliances, consumer electronics and electronic communication equipment Assembly lines for PCs, small-power motors, contactors, switches Advantages Reading and writing of large data volumes within a short time results in shorter production cycle times and helps to boost productivity Can be used in harsh environments thanks to rugged components with high degree of protection Simple system integration into TCP/IP networks, SIMATIC S7, PROFINET and PROFIBUS (TIA) with little effort Shorter commissioning times and fewer plant failures and downtimes thanks to integral diagnostic functionalities Cost savings thanks to maintenance-free components SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 31 System overview 3.3 System configuration 3.3 System configuration 3.3.1 Overview The SIMATIC RF300 system is characterized by a high level of standardization of its components. This means that the system follows the TIA principle throughout: Totally Integrated Automation. It provides maximum transparency at all levels with its reduced interface overhead. This ensures optimum interaction between all system components. The RF300 system with its flexible components offers many possibilities for system configuration. This chapter shows you how you can use the RF300 components on the basis of various example scenarios. 3.3.2 Assembly line example: Use of RF300 transponders In assembly lines, such as in engine manufacturing, many work steps are completed in succession. Automated or manual assembly work is carried out at the individual workstations in relatively short periods of time. The special features of the RF300 transponders, which stand out for their large data memory and high transmission speeds, bring about many advantages in regard to the production unit numbers of such plants. The possibility of saving large volumes of data means savings in terms of data management on the HOST system and considerably contributes to data security (redundant data management e.g. HOST database or controller and data carrier) Advantages at a glance:
redundant data storage on the basis of large memory, availability of decentralized data high data rate data management savings on the host system Features of the scenario In this example scenario, engine blocks that are placed on metal pallets are conveyed on an assembly line. The engines are assembled piece-by-piece at the individual workstations. The RFID transponder of the type SIMATIC RF340T is mounted permanently on the underside of the pallet. The transport speed is approx. 0.5 m/s. In this scenario, it is an advantage that the transponder can be directly secured to metal on the metal pallets. The small-dimensioned SIMATIC RF310R reader is integrated in the conveyor elements in such a manner that it can communicate with the transponders from below. Thus, it is not necessary to align the pallets or to attach several transponders. The data of the entire production order (5000 bytes) is stored on the transponder. This data is read at each workstation and changed or supplemented depending on the workstation, and then written back again. Thus, the status of the engine block assembly can be determined at any point in time, even if there is a failure at the HOST level. Thanks to the extremely high data rate, a very short cycle time for the work steps can be planned, which results in high end product unit numbers "engines". 32 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.3 System configuration The entire production order that is saved on the transponder can also be read manually via the WIN-LC terminal located at each workstation. This means that virtually no additional data management is required on the control computer. The production order data can also be read for servicing purposes via the mobile SIMATIC RF350M reader. Figure 3-4 Example of engine block production SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 33 System overview 3.3 System configuration 3.3.3 Example of container and cardboard container handling: Use of ISO transponders Containers of varying sizes are conveyed to picking workstations in a delivery center. There, the individual goods are removed and packed in cartons according to the delivery note. These cartons are marked with low-cost transponder labels and sorted to small or large packaging workstations (according to the delivery note) by being guided or transported via the corresponding conveyor system. The containers are marked using the MDS D100 ISO transponder. Advantages at a glance:
Decision points in the conveyor system can be installed in a more favorable way
(mechanically) Different sizes of containers with different depths can be identified due to the range In contrast to bar codes, the transponders can also be written to Different types of transponders can be processed using one and the same reader Features of the scenario In this example scenario, containers of varying sizes are conveyed on a conveyor system. Only the unique identification number (8 bytes) is read. The containers to be picked are sorted to the corresponding workstations. The maximum transport speed is 1.0 m/s. In this scenario, it is an advantage that the RF380R reader can read and write the transponders at different distances on the containers without a great deal of mechanical or control system effort due to the reading range. During the picking process, the goods are immediately placed in different containers or packed in cartons depending on the destination (small packaging or large packaging station). The containers are equipped with the MDS D100 ISO transponder. The low-cost "one-way tag" (label) is used on the cartons: it is simply glued onto the carton. Thus the goods can be identified at any time. Again, one and the same reader hardware is used for this. The maximum transport speed is 0.8 m/s. In addition, flexible identification is possible at each location and at any time using the mobile SIMATIC RF350M reader. 34 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System overview 3.3 System configuration Figure 3-5 Example of container and cardboard container handling SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 35 System overview 3.3 System configuration 36 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.1 Selection criteria for SIMATIC RF300 components Assess your application according to the following criteria, in order to choose the right SIMATIC RF300 components:
Transmission distance (read/write distance) Tracking tolerances Static or dynamic data transfer Data volume to be transferred Speed in case of dynamic transfer Metal-free rooms for transponders and readers Ambient conditions such as relative humidity, temperature, chemical impacts, etc. 4.1.2 Transmission window and read/write distance The reader generates an inductive alternating field. The antenna field is largest near to the reader. The size of the field decreases strongly the further away from the reader. The distribution of the antenna field depends on the structure and geometry of the antennas in the reader and transponder. For the transponder to function correctly, a minimum field strength at the transponder must be achieved at a distance Sg from the reader or the antenna. The figures below show the transmission window between transponder and reader or between transponder and antenna:
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 37 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Sa Sg Lx Ly Operating distance between transponder and reader Limit distance (maximum clear distance between upper surface of the reader and the tran-
sponder, at which the transmission can still just function under normal conditions) Length of a transmission window in the x direction while maintaining the working distance (Lx Ly with RF380R and RF382R) Length of a transmission window in the y direction while maintaining the working distance (Lx Ly with RF380R and RF382R) Field centerpoint Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the transponder Transmission window and read/write distance reader M SP Figure 4-1 38 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Note Transmission window with RF380R and RF382R Note that the transmission window of the reader RF380R is not square (Lx Ly). To obtain as large a transmission window as possible, make sure that the transponder only crosses the reader in the x direction. Sa Sg Operating distance between transponder and reader Limit distance (maximum clear distance between upper surface of the reader and the tran-
sponder, at which the transmission can still just function under normal conditions) Diameter of a transmission window Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the transponder Transmission window and read/write distance round antenna Ld SP Figure 4-2 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 39 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning The transponder can be used as soon as the intersection (SP) of the transponder enters the area of the transmission window. From the diagrams above, it can also be seen that operation is possible within the area between Sa and Sg. The active operating area reduces as the distance increases, and shrinks to a single point at distance Sg. Only static mode should thus be used in the area between Sa and Sg. Aids for calculating the field data Note Determining the operating distance, limit distance and transmission window Remember that you can obtain the values Sa, Sg and L simply and quickly using the tool for field data acquisition. You will find this on the DVD "Ident Systems, Software &
Documentation". 4.1.3 Width of the transmission window Determining the width of the transmission window The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications:
B:
L:
Width of the transmission window Length of the transmission window Tracking tolerances The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the mechanical tracking tolerance. The formula for the dwell time is valid without restriction when B is observed. 40 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.4 Impact of secondary fields Secondary fields in the range from 0 mm to 30% of the limit distance (Sg) generally always exist. They should, however, only be used during configuration in exceptional cases, since the read/write distances are very limited. Exact details of the secondary field geometry cannot be given, since these values depend heavily on the operating distance and the application. When working in dynamic mode, remember that during the transition from the secondary field to the main field the presence of the tag is lost temporarily. It is therefore advisable to select a distance > 30 % of Sg. Main field Figure 4-3 Gap in the field resulting from secondary fields Secondary field SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 41 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Secondary fields without shielding The following graphic shows typical primary and secondary fields, if no shielding measures are taken. Main field Figure 4-4 Secondary field Secondary field without shielding In this arrangement, the reader can also read tags via the secondary field. Shielding is required in order to prevent unwanted reading via the secondary field, as shown and described in the following. 42 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Secondary fields with shielding Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning The following graphic shows typical primary and secondary fields, with metal shielding this time. The metal shielding prevents the reader from detecting tags via the secondary field. Main field Figure 4-5 Secondary field Secondary field with shielding 4.1.5 Setup help of the readers of the second generation After turning on the reader (connection to the power supply) and the following startup phase, the reader automatically changes to the "Setup" mode. The antenna (reader internal or external) is also turned on. In this status "search for transponders" the reader scans the antenna field for transponders with all HF protocols (RF300, ISO 15693, ISO 14443). If a transponder is recognized in the antenna field of the reader only the HF protocol of the recognized transponder type is used and there is a change in the status to "Show quality". In this status you obtain direct feedback of the communication with the transponder via the LED. If no transponder is recognized for a longer period of time, the reader changes back to the "Search for transponders" status. When a "RESET" command is received, the reader changes back to the normal operation as known from the RF300. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 43 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Meaning of the LED operating display in the "Setup" mode The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 4- 1 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the receive strength, the LED flashes or is lit permanently. 4.1.6 Permissible directions of motion of the transponder Detection area and direction of motion of the transponder The transponder and reader have no polarization axis, i.e. the transponder can come in from any direction, assume any position as parallel as possible to the reader, and cross the transmission window. The figure below shows the active area for various directions of transponder motion:
Transmission window Direction of motion of the transponder Detection area L x W Figure 4-6 Detection areas of the reader for different directions of transponder motion 44 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.7 Operation in static and dynamic mode Operation in static mode If working in static mode, the transponder can be operated up to the limit distance (Sg). The transponder must then be positioned exactly over the reader:
Figure 4-7 Operation in static mode Operation in dynamic mode When working in dynamic mode, the transponder moves past the reader. The transponder can be used as soon as the intersection (SP) of the transponder enters the circle of the transmission window. In dynamic mode, the operating distance (Sa) is of primary importance.
[Operating distances, see Chapter Field data for transponders, readers and antennas
(Page 48)]
Figure 4-8 Operation in dynamic mode SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 45 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.8 Dwell time of the transponder The dwell time is the time in which the transponder remains within the transmission window of a reader. The reader can exchange data with the transponder during this time. The dwell time is calculated thus:
tV:
L:
vTag:
0,8:
Dwell time of the transponder Length of the transmission window Speed of the transponder (tag) in dynamic mode Constant factor used to compensate for temperature impacts and production toler-
ances The dwell time can be of any duration in static mode. The dwell time must be sufficiently long to allow communication with the transponder. The dwell time is defined by the system environment in dynamic mode. The volume of data to be transferred must be matched to the dwell time or vice versa. In general:
Dwell time of the data memory within the field of the reader Communication time between transponder and communication module tV::
tK:
46 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.9 Communication between communications module, reader and transponder Aids for calculating the data transmission times User-friendly calculation tools are available for the communications modules ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C and RF180C to calculate data transfer times. The calculation tools can be found on the DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation", article number 6GT2080-
2AA20. Figure 4-9 User interface of the calculation tool for command processing time SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 47 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Aids for calculating the field data You will also find a tool for calculating field data on the DVD "Ident Systems, Software &
Documentation". Using this tool, among other things you can calculate the operating distance (Sa), limit distance (Sg) and transmission window (L). Figure 4-10 User interface of the calculation tool for field data acquisition 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas The following tables show the field data for all SIMATIC RF300 components of transponders and readers. This makes the correct selection of a transponder and reader particularly easy. All the technical specifications listed are typical data and are applicable for an ambient temperature between 0 C and +50 C, a supply voltage between 22 and 27 VDC and a metal-free environment. Tolerances of 20 % are permitted due to production or temperature conditions. If the entire voltage range at the reader of 20 VDC to 30 VDC and/or the entire temperature range of transponders and readers is used, the field data is subject to further tolerances. Note Transmission gaps If the minimum operating distance (Sa) is not observed, a transmission gap can occur in the center of the field. Communication with the transponder is not possible in the transmission gap. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 48 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Note Possible reader-transponder combinations The tables of the following section show the possible reader-transponder combinations. 4.2.1 Field data of RF300 transponders The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. Table 4- 2 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T All values are in mm The values relate to the RF310R reader as of version "D". 30 30 40 45 45 70 1...23 2...18 2...36 2...47 2...60 2...45 26 21 41 53 68 60 Table 4- 3 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm 45 40 80 80 90 85 90 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1...20 2...20 2...50 2...60 2...65 5...60 5...80 25 24 65 75 85 80 100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 49 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 4 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm 45 40 80 80 90 85 90 1...30 1...25 2...55 2...65 2...75 5...65 5...90 40 30 70 85 100 85 110 Table 4- 5 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 3 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T All values are in mm
??
??
??
??
??
1...16 1...16 2...32 2...35 2...40 20 20 40 42 50 Table 4- 6 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) RF320T RF330T RF340T All values are in mm 10 10 20 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...10 0...11 0...20 15 13 25 Table 4- 7 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 RF320T RF330T RF340T Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 15 22 25 0...15 0...15 0...30 20 18 35 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 50 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) RF350T RF360T All values are in mm 25
??
Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...35 2...25 40 35 Operating distance Limit distance (Sg) Table 4- 8 Field data RF380R reader Length of the transmission window in the x direction (Lx) in the y direction (Ly)
(Sa) 2...45 5...45 2...80 2...100 2...120 5...100 5...125 40 30 50 60 70 65 75 60 52 105 125 150 135 160 100 120 120 140 160 160 180 RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm The RF380R with MLFB 6GT2801-3AB10 allows the transmission output power to be set with the aid of the "distance_limiting" input parameter (you will find more detailed information in "Function manual FB 45
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/21738808)"). For this, values from approx. 0.5 W to approx. 2.0 W can be set in 0.25 W increments. Depending on the setting, the change to the transmission output power increases the performance in the lower operating distance (low performance) or in the upper limit distance (high performance). The "distance_limiting" range of values is from:
02 (= 0.5 W) through 05 (= 1.25 W; default value) to 08 (= 2 W). Note A 'distance_limiting' value setting outside of the range of "02 to 08" leads to the default setting 5 and does not generate an error message. You will find more information on this subject in the chapter "Minimum clearances (Page 59)"
section "Minimum distance from reader to reader". You will find precise information about the parameters in "Product Information "FB 45 and FC 45 input parameters for RF300 and ISO transponders"
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/33315697)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 51 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 4.2.2 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. Observe the following information for field data of ISO transponders:
A maximum median deviation of 2 mm is possible in static mode (without affecting the field data). In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. Table 4- 9 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm The values relate to the RF310R reader as of version "D". 40 30 90 105 30 130 120 80 30 85 90 55 35 30 90 30 30 35
??
90 30 2...93 2...64 2...65 5...96 2...39 2...90 2...84 2...74 2...47 5...74 2...104 2...35 1...70 1...22 5...100 1...43 1...37 1...70
??
5...100 1...43 105 72 73 109 44 102 95 83 63 84 117 45 78 25 113 48 41 78
??
113 48 52 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 10 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 90 60 80 90 50 130 125 95 50 100 140 65 50 45 110 45 45 50
??
110 45 5...110 2...60 2...85 5...80 2...35 5...100 5...80 5...60 2...55 5...75 2...100 2...40 2...55 2...20 0...80 2...35 2...25 2...55
??
0...80 2...35 140 75 110 110 60 125 110 70 70 85 130 55 70 30 100 50 40 70
??
100 50 Table 4- 11 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 80 55 150 75 50 140 130 100 50 110 140 85 5...110 2...65 2...90 5...85 2...35 5...100 5...95 5...80 2...70 5...90 2...110 2...50 140 85 120 115 60 120 115 95 90 105 140 70 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 53 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 50 40 110 40 40 50
??
110 40 2...60 2...25 0...85 2...35 2...35 2...60
??
0...85 2...35 80 35 110 50 50 80
??
110 50 Table 4- 12 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 3 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D124 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D428 MDS D460 All values are in mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
0...35 1...16 2...32 1...12 0...24 0...42 0...16 0...25 0...18 42 20 40 15 30 48 20 32 25 Table 4- 13 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 12 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D117 MDS D127 MDS D160 MDS D421 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D528 All values are in mm 2 2 15 6 15 8 6 15 0...3 0...3 0...8 0...3 1...10 1...10 0...3 1...10 4 4 15 5 17 14 5 17 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 54 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 14 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D127 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D528 All values are in mm 3 27 3 20 25 10 20 25 17 17 15
??
20 25
??
17 0...4 2...24 0...4 1...18 1...22 0...6 1...10 1...27 1...10 1...12 1...12
??
1...10 1...27
??
1...12 5 34 5 27 28 8 13 35 14 14 18
??
13 35
??
14 Table 4- 15 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 30 70 25 30 30 45 28 25 65 25 22
??
28
??
65 25 1...35 0...47 1...25 1...35 0...15 2...30 0...45 1...15 0...45 1...25 1...18
??
0...45
??
0...45 1...25 46 60 30 45 19 40 50 20 57 34 25
??
50
??
57 34 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 55 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 16 Field data RF380R reader Length of the transmission window in the x direction (Lx) in the y direction (Ly) 100 80 140 90 40 140 160 120 60 140 120 60 70 45 160 50 70 70
??
160 50 MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 140 80 180 140 80 200 200 190 100 290 240 110 100 80 220 80 80 100
??
220 80 Table 4- 17 Field data RF382R reader Length of the transmission window in the y direction in the x direction (Lx) MDS D124 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D460 All values are in mm 70 50 60 65 40
(Ly) 130 100 120 120 80 56 Limit distance (Sg) 210 140 190 200 80 200 195 160 120 180 240 90 140 50 195 95 90 140
??
195 95 Operating distance
(Sa) 5...170 1...120 2...145 5...160 2...64 5...170 5...150 5..120 2...96 5...160 2...200 5...75 2...120 2...35 0...155 270 265 2...120
??
0...155 270 Operating distance
(Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 40...65 35...50 40...65 40...65 30...50 75 65 75 75 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 4.2.3 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS E) The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. Observe the following information for field data of ISO transponders:
A maximum median deviation of 2 mm is possible in static mode (without affecting the field data). In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. Note Relenace of the MDS E transponders The MDS E transponders are products that will be discontinued. These are relevant for migration projects in which existing RFID systems are replaced by SIMATIC RF300. Table 4- 18 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm The values relate to the RF310R reader as of version "D". 40 40 30 2...93 2...93 2...64 105 105 72 Table 4- 19 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 90 90 60 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 5...110 20...50 2...60 140 70 75 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 57 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 20 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 80 80 55 5...110 5...110 2...65 140 140 85 Table 4- 21 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 12 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E623 All values are in mm 6 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...3 5 Table 4- 22 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E623 MDS E624 All values are in mm 10 27 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...6 2...24 8 34 Table 4- 23 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E624 All values are in mm 30 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1...35 46 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 58 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 4.2.4 Minimum clearances Minimum distance from transponder to transponder The specified distances refer to a metal-free environment. For a metallic environment, the specified minimum distances must be multiplied by a factor of 1.5. The transponders designed specifically for installation in/on metal are an exception to this. Table 4- 24 Minimum distances RF300 transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R /
RF350R /
ANT 3 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R 120 RF320T 120 RF330T 140 RF340T 150 RF350T 120 RF360T 130 RF370T RF380T 150 All values are in mm, relative to the operating distance (Sa) between reader and transponder, and between transponder 40 30 40 50
??
--
--
20 20 40
--
--
--
--
70 50 80 80 80 80 80 50 40 60 60 60
--
??
??
??
??
??
??
--
--
ANT 1 70 50 80 80 80 80 80 edge and transponder edge Table 4- 25 Minimum distances ISO transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R /
MDS D100 MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D423 120
--
100 120
--
--
120 120 120 160 120
??
220
--
--
240
--
180 140
--
200 150 140 150 200 180 140 240
--
--
ANT 1 240
--
180 140
--
200 150 140 150 200 180 140 240
--
--
100 120 120 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF350R /
ANT 3 RF350R /
ANT 12 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R RF382R 1)
--
--
??
--
--
--
??
--
--
--
??
--
--
--
??
??
--
20
--
--
25
--
30
--
--
--
--
--
--
15
--
--
--
30 50
--
30
--
50
--
--
--
50
--
--
15 30 40
--
--
80 100
--
80 60
--
--
--
80
--
--
--
40 60 420
--
360 400
--
450 300 500 500 400 360 450 500
--
--
250
--
--
100, 150
--
--
--
100, 120
--
--
--
100, 150
--
--
--
--
--
59 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 100, 180
--
--
--
100, 120
--
--
100, 180
--
--
--
--
RF310R RF340R RF350R /
RF350R /
ANT 3 RF350R /
ANT 12 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R RF382R 1) MDS D424 100 180 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 70 120 100 100
--
--
100 100 120 150 150
--
--
180 ANT 1 180 100 140 150 150
--
--
180
??
??
--
??
??
--
--
--
--
--
--
30 30 15
--
--
50
--
30 50 50 15 30 50 80 60 60 60 60
--
40 80 360 250 400 300 300
--
--
360
??
--
--
--
--
30 50
--
--
--
30
--
70 120 100 120 100 140 150 240 100 120 150 240 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 MDS E600 2) MDS E611 2) MDS E623 2) MDS E624 2) 1) The first value is the minimum distance of the transponders in the horizontal field, the second value is the minimum 60 60 60
--
250 400 300 240 240 120 180 100 15 15 50 80 180
??
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
distance of the transponders in the vertical field. 2) Product to be discontinued; only relevant for migration projects. All values are in mm, relative to the operating distance (Sa) between reader and transponder, and between transponder edge and transponder edge Minimum distance from reader to reader Table 4- 26 Minimum distances reader with 2 readers with several readers All values are in mm RF310R to RF310R 150 200 RF340R to RF340R 200 250 RF380R to RF380R1) 400 500 RF382R to RF382R 200 200 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 1) The permissible minimum distance between two RF380Rs depends on the transmit power that is set. The specified minimum distance must be multiplied by the following factor, depending on the output:
Table 4- 27 Effect on the minimum distance of the transmit power with RF380R
'distance_limiting' byte 02; 03 04; 05; 06 07; 08 Factor 0.8 1.0 1.2 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna Table 4- 28 Minimum distances antennas ANT 3S ANT 1 100 ANT 3 80 All values are in mm You will find detailed information on the minimum distances between antennas the section
"Minimum distance between antennas (Page 200)". ANT 18 100 ANT 30 100 ANT 8 50 ANT 12 20 70 Note Effect on inductive fields by not maintaining the minimum distances of the readers If the values fall below the values specified in the "Minimum distance readers" and "Minimum distances antennas" tables , there is a risk of the function being affected by inductive fields. In this case, the data transfer time would increase unpredictably or a command would be aborted with an error. Keeping to the values specified in the "Minimum distance readers" and "Minimum distances antennas" tables is therefore essential. If the specified minimum distance cannot be complied with due to the physical configuration, the SET-ANT command can be used to activate and deactivate the RF field of the reader. The application software must be used to ensure that only one reader is active (antenna is switched on) at a time. Note Please also observe the graphic representations of the minimum distances in the respective chapters on readers. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 61 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.1 Overview The transponder and reader complete with their antennas are inductive devices. Any type of metal in the vicinity of these devices affects their functionality. Some points need to be considered during planning and installation if the values described in the "Field data
(Page 48)" section are to retain their validity:
Minimum spacing between two readers or their antennas Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories Metal-free area for flush-mounting of readers or their antennas and transponders in metal Mounting of multiple readers or their antennas on metal frames or racks The following sections describe the impact on the operation of the RFID system when mounted in the vicinity of metal. 4.3.2 Reduction of interference due to metal Table 4- 29 Interference due to metal rack Representation 62 Description Problem:
A metal rack is located above the transmission window of the reader. This affects the entire field. In par-
ticular, the transmission window between reader and transponder is reduced. Remedy:
The transmission window is no longer affected if the transponder is mounted differently. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Table 4- 30 Flush-mounting of transponders and readers Representation Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Description Problem:
Flush-mounting of transponders and readers is possible in principle. However, the size of the transmis-
sion window is significantly reduced. The following measures can be used to counteract the reduction of the window:
Remedy:
Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer below the transponder and/or reader. The transponder and/or reader are 10 to 20 mm higher than the metal surround.
(The value x 100 mm is valid, e.g. for RF310R. It indicates that, for a distance x 100 mm, the reader can no longer be significantly affect-
ed by metal.) Remedy:
Increase the distances a, b to metal. The following rule of thumb can be used:
Increase a, b by a factor of 2 to 3 over the values specified for metal-free areas Increasing a, b has a greater effect for readers or transpond-
ers with a large limit distance than for readers or transponders with a small limit distance. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 63 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Mounting of several readers on metal frames or racks Any reader mounted on metal couples part of the field to the metal frame. There is normally no interaction as long as the minimum distance D and metal-free areas a, b are maintained. However, interaction may take place if an iron frame is positioned unfavorably. Longer data transfer times or sporadic error messages at the communication module are the result. Table 4- 31 Mounting several readers on metal frames or racks Representation Description Problem:
Interaction between readers Remedy:
Increase the distance D between the two readers. Remedy:
Introduce one or more iron struts in order to short-
circuit the stray fields. Remedy:
Insert a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 millimeter thickness between the reader and the iron frame. This will significantly reduce the induction of stray fields on the rack:
4.3.3 Effects of metal on different transponders and readers Mounting different transponders and readers on metal or flush-mounting Certain conditions have to be observed when mounting the transponders and readers on metal or flush-mounting. For more information, please refer to the descriptions of the individual transponders and readers in the relevant section. 64 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.4 Impact on the transmission window by metal In general, the following points should be considered when mounting RFID components:
Direct mounting on metal is allowed only in the case of specially approved transponders. Flush-mounting of the components in metal reduces the field data; a test is recommended in critical applications. When working inside the transmission window, make sure that no metal rail (or similar part) intersects the transmission field. The metal rail would affect the field data. With readers with a large antenna surface (e.g. RF260R) for reasons of communication reliability, when the transponders are flush mounted in metal, a metal-free space around the transponders is recommended. This metal-free space should match the size of the antenna surface. The impact of metal on the field data (Sg, Sa, L) is shown in a table in this section. The values in the tables describe field data reduction and show the reduced range as a percentage. The range relates to use in a non-metallic environment. A value of 100% means no influence on the range. Note Possible reader-transponder combinations The tables of the following section show the possible reader-transponder combinations. 4.3.4.1 Impact on the transmission window by metal With RF300 transponders Table 4- 32 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF310R reader On metal Without metal Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance 100 100 80 100 100 85 30 95 80 70 95 85 80 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 80 70 60 80 75 70 25 65 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 100 80 70 100 70 60 100 100 60
??
??
??
95 80 70 95 65 60 95 95 60
??
??
??
80 80 70 85 65 60 85 75 60
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 33 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 100 75 55 100 90 80 100 85 80 95 70 55 95 95 75 90 80 75 80 65 50 80 85 60 85 75 70 66 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D339 without metal on metal; distance 30 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 100 100 100 100 75 100 90 100 80 60 100 90 100 80 80
??
??
??
100 65 55 100 1502) 70 100 80 60 100 90 100 85 80 90 90 90 90 75 90 80 90 70 60 80 75 95 80 75
??
??
??
80 60 50 95 1402) 60 90 80 60 100 85 90 80 75 80 80 80 80 75 85 75 80 65 60 85 80 75 75 70
??
??
??
75 55 45 90 1402) 60 80 70 50 95 80 80 70 65 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 67 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) without metal on metal; distance 25 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm 100 100 100 80
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
100 100 100 80
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
75 75 80 60
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. With ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 34 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF310R reader on metal without metal flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6111) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 75 55 100 75 55 95 70 55 95 70 55 80 65 50 80 65 50 68 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF310R reader on metal without metal flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS E6241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 90 80 95 95 75 80 85 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 4.3.4.2 RF340R With RF300 transponders Table 4- 35 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) RF320T RF330T1) RF340T RF350T RF360T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 85 75 100 90 65 100 65 60 100 75 55 100 75 70 95 85 75 95 90 65 95 65 60 90 70 55 95 70 60 90 80 65 90 80 60 80 55 55 85 70 45 80 65 50 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 69 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all-round 40 mm 100 95 70 100 100 80 95 90 65 95 95 75 80 75 65 75 70 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 36 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm 100 70 60 100 85 80 100 80 75 100 100 100 100 85 100 90 90 65 45 95 85 80 90 80 75 95 90 90 95 85 95 80 75 60 45 80 75 45 85 70 65 80 75 75 80 75 85 75 70 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D339 Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 100 90 75 100 70 100 90 80 100 100 100 100 70 55 100 1202) 65 100 85 75 100 100 100 80 75 100 95 100 85
??
??
??
95 85 50 100 95 95 85 80 95 90 90 90 65 50 95 1202) 60 95 85 75 95 90 90 75 70 95 80 95 85
??
??
??
90 80 65 100 90 80 75 60 80 75 75 80 80 50 85 1152) 60 80 75 70 95 90 80 70 65 80 75 95 85
??
??
??
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 71 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D525 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) without metal on metal; distance 25 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. With ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 37 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader without metal on metal flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6111) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 70 60 100 70 60 100 85 80 90 65 45 90 65 45 95 85 80 75 60 45 75 60 45 80 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 72 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 4.3.4.3 RF350R Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 38 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 40 mm ANT 1 without metal ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) 100 85 75 100 95 65 100 65 60 100 75 55 100 75 65 100 95 70 100 100 80 90 85 75 90 85 60 90 65 60 90 70 55 90 75 60 90 88 65 90 90 75 90 75 65 90 75 60 90 60 55 85 65 45 85 65 50 85 75 65 80 70 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 73 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 39 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder ANT 1 without metal MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D3391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 70 60 100 85 85 100 85 80 100 95 95 100 85 100 90 100 85 75 100 85 100 90 80 100 95 95 100 80 65 ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) 85 60 45 95 85 80 85 75 70 90 85 85 95 85 85 80 85 75 65 90 80 85 80 75 90 85 85 90 70 60 80 65 45 85 80 50 85 75 70 85 85 85 90 80 85 75 80 75 65 85 80 85 80 65 85 85 85 85 65 60 74 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 1 without metal ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) without metal on metal; distance 25 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm 100 1152) 80 90 1152) 65 90 1152) 65 100 85 75 100 90 100 85 80 100 85 100 85
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
90 80 70 95 85 90 80 75 90 80 90 80
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
75 75 70 95 85 85 75 x 85 80 80 75
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 75 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 40 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder ANT 1 without metal ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6111) without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 70 60 100 70 60 100 85 85 85 60 45 85 60 45 95 85 80 80 65 45 80 65 45 85 80 50 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 41 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) RF320T1) RF330T RF340T without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
76 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) RF350T RF360T without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 42 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D1241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1601) without metal on metal; distance 10 mm MDS D3241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D422 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D423 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 77 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D4241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D428 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) without metal on metal; distance 10 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 43 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS E6241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 78 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 12 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 44 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 12 Transponder ANT 12 without metal MDS D117 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D127 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D421 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D521 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm 100 90 65 100 95 65 100 100 100 90 70 100 95 100 100
??
??
??
??
??
ANT 12 mounted in met-
(0 mm all-round) al 85 85 65 85 85 65 80 80 80 75 60 75 75 80 80
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 79 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 12 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 45 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 12 Transponder ANT 12 without metal ANT 12 mounted in met-
al
(0 mm all-round) MDS E623 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 100 90 70 80 75 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 46 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF340T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm ANT 18 without metal 100 85 75 100 1202) 1152) 95 100 65 60 ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al 65 55 45 85 100 95 90 85 60 55 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. 80 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 47 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder ANT 18 without metal MDS D1241) Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm MDS D127 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D421 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D422 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm MDS D521 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 100 85 85 100 95 60 100 85 100 90 80 100 90 40 100 95 90 100 85 75 100 100 100 95 100 95
??
??
??
ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al 85 75 45 90 85 60 80 75 80 75 65 85 65 20 85 85 80 85 80 75 85 85 95 95 95 95
??
??
??
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 81 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 18 without metal MDS D522 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 48 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder ANT 18 without metal ANT 18 mounted in met-
al
(10 mm all-round) MDS E623 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS E6241) without metal on metal, distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm 100 90 40 100 85 85 85 65 20 85 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 82 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 49 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder Mounting the antenna ANT 30 without metal RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal;
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal Directly on metal Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm without metal on metal; distance 20 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 85 75 100 1102) 1052) 90 100 65 60 100 75 55
??
??
??
ANT 30 mounted in met-
(20 mm all-round) al 90 75 65 90 100 95 80 85 55 55 85 65 45
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 50 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder ANT 30 without metal ANT 30 mounted in met-
al
(20 mm all-round) MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm 100 85 80 85 75 45 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 83 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 30 without metal MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D422 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D423 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D522 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm 100 90 85 100 85 100 90 80 100 95 90 100 1252) 80 100 95 85 100 95 100 90 80 100 95 100 95
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
ANT 30 mounted in met-
(20 mm all-round) al 85 75 70 80 75 80 70 65 85 85 80 80 1152) 70 85 85 75 80 80 85 75 70 90 90 90 85
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
84 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 30 without metal ANT 30 mounted in met-
al
(20 mm all-round) MDS D5261) without metal on metal; distance 25 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 51 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder ANT 30 without metal ANT 30 mounted in met-
al
(20 mm all-round) MDS E6241) without metal on metal; distance 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm 100 85 80 85 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 4.3.4.4 RF380R With RF300 transponders Table 4- 52 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF380R Transponder Reader RF380R (RF300 mode) Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) RF320T1) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 85 60 95 75 55 90 70 50 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 85 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder Reader RF380R (RF300 mode) Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T1) RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all-round 40 mm 100 70 100 70 60 100 70 55 100 75 60 100 90 65 100 95 65 90 65 90 65 60 85 65 50 95 70 55 95 85 60 95 90 60 80 60 80 60 55 80 60 45 85 65 50 85 80 60 85 80 55 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 53 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF380R Transponder Reader RF380R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 65 55 95 60 50 80 55 45 86 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Transponder MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D3391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF380R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal 100 95 70 100 80 75 100 95 90 100 85 100 80 100 80 65 100 85 100 85 70 100 85 80 100 75 60 100 100 75 95 90 65 90 75 65 90 85 80 95 85 90 75 90 75 60 95 80 95 85 65 90 80 75 90 70 60 95 100 65 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 90 85 50 80 70 65 75 70 70 90 80 80 70 80 70 55 85 75 85 80 60 80 75 70 80 60 55 85 90 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 87 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder Reader RF380R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 90 75 55 70 70 90 75 65 90 80 95 75 100 75 60 100 75 100 80 75 100 85 100 80 MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) without metal on metal 15 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 without metal on metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) without metal on metal; distance 25 mm flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 without metal on metal, distance 0 mm 75 60 40 90 60 80 70 65 80 65 80 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 88 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 4.3.4.5 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines RF382R Note RF382R not suitable for metallic surroundings The RF382R was not developed for reading transponders in a metallic environment. With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 54 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): Transponder and RF382R Transponder Reader RF382R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal MDS D124 Without metal MDS D160 Without metal MDS D324 Without metal MDS D424 Without metal MDS D460 Without metal 1) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
1101) 100 1101) 1051) 1151) 100 100 100 100 100 lic surroundings. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 89 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders 4.4.1 Overview of the transponders and their housing materials The following sections describe the resistance to chemicals of the various transponders. Resistance to chemicals depends on the housing materials used to manufacture the transponders. The following table provides an overview of the housing materials of the transponders:
Table 4- 55 Overview of the housing materials of the transponders Housing material Polyamide 12 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Polycarbonate (PC) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Epoxy resin Transponder RF340T RF350T RF370T RF380T MDS D117 MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC10) MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D339 MDS D423 MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD10) MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD00-0AX0) MDS D200 MDS D400 RF320T RF360T MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC00) MDS D324 MDS D421 MDS D424 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D524 MDS E610 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 90 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Housing material PA6 PA6.6 GF30 Transponder MDS D127 MDS D126 MDS D422 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D522 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 Note Chemical substances not listed The following sections describe the resistance of the various transponders to specific substances. If you require information about chemical substances that are not listed, contact Customer Support. 4.4.2 Polyamide 12 The resistance of the plastic housing to chemicals used in the automobile sector (e.g.: oils, greases, diesel fuel, gasoline, etc,) is not listed extra. Table 4- 56 Chemical resistance - Polyamide 12 Substance Battery acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, w. Benzene Bleach solution (12.5% effective chlo-
rine) Butane, gas, liquid Butyl acetate (acetic acid butyl ester) n(n) Calcium chloride, w. Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
30%
conc. 10%
20 60 60 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 60 20 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 91 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Substance Calcium nitrate, w. Chlorine Chrome baths, tech. Iron salts, w. Acetic acid, w. Ethyl alcohol, w., undenaturated Formaldehyde, w. Formalin Glycerine Isopropyl alcohol Potassium hydroxide, w. Lysol Magnesium salts, w. Methyl alcohol, w. Lactic acid, w. Sodium carbonate, w. (soda) Sodium chloride, w. Sodium hydroxide Nickel salts, w. Nitrobenzene Phosphoric acid Propane Mercury Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Sulfur dioxide Sulfuric acid Hydrogen sulfide Carbon tetrachloride Toluene Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
c. s. c. s. c. s. 50%
95%
95%
50%
30%
10%
10%
50%
c. s. 50%
50%
10%
10%
c. s. c. s. c. s. 10%
10%
10%
low 25%
10%
low 20 60 20 20 60 20 20 60 60 20 20 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 60 60 20 20 60 60 60 60 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 20 60 20 20 60 60 20 60
-
-
-
92 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Substance Detergent Plasticizer Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
high 60 60 Explanation of the rating
-
w. c. s. Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant Water solution Cold saturated 4.4.3 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) The data memory has special chemical resistance to solutions up to a temperature of 200 C. A reduction in the mechanical properties has been observed in aqueous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80 C. The plastic housings are resistant to all types of fuel including methanol. Table 4- 57 Chemical resistance - polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Substance Test conditions Rating Acetone n-Butanol (butyl alcohol) Butanone-2 (methyl ethyl ketone) n-Butyl acetate Brake fluid Calcium chloride (saturated) Diesel fuel Diethyl ether Frigen 113 Anti-freeze Kerosene Methanol Engine oil Sodium chloride (saturated) Sodium hydroxide Sodium hypochlorite
(30 or 180 days) Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
55 80 60 80 80 80 80 23 23 120 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 30%
5%
5%
-
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 93 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Substance Sodium hydroxide solution Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Sulfuric acid Tested fuels FAM testing fluid acc. to DIN 51 604-A Toluene 1, 1, 1-Trichloroethane Xylene Zinc chloride (saturated) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
30%
10%
10%
10%
10%
30%
90 23 80 23 80 23 80 80 80 80 75
-
Explanation of the rating
-
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.4.4 Polycarbonate (PC) Table 4- 58 Chemical resistance - polycarbonate (PPS) Substance Test conditions Rating Mineral lubricants Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Gasoline Weak mineral acids Strong mineral acids Weak organic acids Strong organic acids Oxidizing acids Weak alkaline solutions Strong alkaline solutions Trichloroethylene Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
94 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Substance Test conditions Rating Perchloroethylene Acetone Alcohols Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
Explanation of the rating
-
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.4.5 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Table 4- 59 Chemical resistance - polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Substance Salt water Sugared water Acetic acid, w. Sodium carbonate, w. Ethyl alcohol, w. Ethylene glycol Fuel B
(acc. to ISO 1817) Human sweat Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
5%
10%
5%
5%
60%
50%
Explanation of the rating
-
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 95 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders 4.4.6 Epoxy resin Table 4- 60 Chemical Resistance - epoxy resin Substance Allyl chloride Formic acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, liquid, water-free Ammonium hydroxide Ethanol Ethyl acrylate Ethyl glycol Gasoline, aroma-free Gasoline, containing benzene Benzoates (Na, Ca among others) Benzoic acid Benzene Borax Boric acid Bromine, liquid Bromides (K, Na among others) Bromoform Bromine water Butadiene (1,3) Butane, gaseous Butanol Butyric acid Carbonates (ammonium, Na among others) Chlorine, liquid Chlorine, gaseous, dry Chlorobenzene Chlorides (ammonium, Na among others) Chloroform Chlorophyll Chlorosulfuric acid Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chromates (K, Na among others) Chromic acid Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
50%
100%
10%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Up to 50 %
Up to 30 %
20 20 20 20 20 20 40 60 20 60 20 20 40 20 20 60 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 40 20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
96 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Substance Chromosulfuric acid Citric acid Cyanamide Cyanides (K, Na among others) Dextrin, w. Diethyl ether Diethylene glycol Dimethyl ether Dioxane Developer Acetic acid Ethanol Fixing bath Fluorides (ammonium, K, Na among others) Hydrofluoric acid Formaldehyde Formamide Gluconic acid Glycerine Glycol Urine Uric acid Hydroxides (ammonium...) Hydroxides (Na, K) Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal) Hypochlorites (K, Na among others) Iodides (K, Na among others) Silicic acid Cresol Methanol Methylene chloride Lactic acid Mineral oils Nitrates (ammonium..., K among others) Nitroglycerin Oxalic acid Phenol Phosphates (ammonium..., Na among others) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
100%
Up to 40 %
50%
100%
10%
40%
Up to 90 %
100%
100%
1%
20 20 20 60 60 20 60 20 20 40 20 60 40 40 20 20 20 20 60 60 20 20 20 20 60 60 60 60 20 40 20 20 40 60 20 20 20 60
-
-
-
-
-
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 97 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the transponders Substance Phosphoric acid Propanol Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Brine Sulfur dioxide Carbon disulfide Sulfuric acid Sulfurous acid Soap solution Sulphates (ammonium..., Na among others) Sulfites (ammonium..., Na among others) Tar, aroma-free Turpentine Trichloroethylene Hydrogen peroxide Tartaric acid Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
50%
85%
25%
10%
100%
100%
40%
30%
60 20 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 60 60 60 60 20 20 20 20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Explanation of the rating
-
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.4.7 PA6.6 GF30 Table 4- 61 Chemical resistance - PA6.6 GF30 Substance Mineral lubricants Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Gasoline Weak mineral acids Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
98 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Substance Test conditions Rating Strong mineral acids Weak organic acids Strong organic acids Oxidizing acids Weak alkaline solutions Strong alkaline solutions Trichloroethylene Perchloroethylene Acetone Alcohols Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
Explanation of the rating
-
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.1 Overview These EMC Guidelines answer the following questions:
Why are EMC guidelines necessary?
What types of external interference have an impact on the system?
How can interference be prevented?
How can interference be eliminated?
Which standards relate to EMC?
Examples of interference-free plant design SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 99 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The description is intended for "qualified personnel":
Project engineers and planners who plan system configurations with RFID modules and have to observe the necessary guidelines. Fitters and service engineers who install the connecting cables in accordance with this description or who rectify defects in this area in the event of interference. Note Failure to observe notices drawn to the reader's attention can result in dangerous conditions in the plant or the destruction of individual components or the entire plant. 4.5.2 What does EMC mean?
The increasing use of electrical and electronic devices is accompanied by:
Higher component density More switched power electronics Increasing switching rates Lower power consumption of components due to steeper switching edges The higher the degree of automation, the greater the risk of interaction between devices. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with the environment over and above certain limits. EMC can be broken down into three different areas:
Internal immunity to interference:
Immunity to internal (own) electrical disturbance External immunity to interference:
Immunity to external electromagnetic disturbances Degree of interference emission:
Emission of interference and its effect on the electrical environment All three areas are considered when testing an electrical device. The RFID modules are tested for conformity with the limit values required by the CE and R&TTE directives. Since the RFID modules are merely components of an overall system, and sources of interference can arise as a result of combining different components, certain directives have to be followed when setting up a plant. 100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EMC measures usually consist of a complete package of measures, all of which need to be implemented in order to ensure that the plant is immune to interference. Note The plant manufacturer is responsible for the observance of the EMC directives; the plant operator is responsible for radio interference suppression in the overall plant. All measures taken when setting up the plant prevent expensive retrospective modifications and interference suppression measures. The plant operator must comply with the locally applicable laws and regulations. They are not covered in this document. 4.5.3 Basic rules It is often sufficient to follow a few elementary rules in order to ensure electromagnetic compatiblity (EMC). The following rules must be observed:
Shielding by enclosure Protect the device against external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The housing or enclosure must be connected to the chassis ground. Use metal plates to shield against electromagnetic fields generated by inductances. Use metal connector housings to shield data conductors. Wide-area ground connection Plan a meshed grounding concept. Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large-area and low-HF-
impedance contact. Establish a large-area connection between the passive metal parts and the central grounding point. Don't forget to include the shielding bus in the chassis ground system. That means the actual shielding busbars must be connected to ground by large-area contact. Aluminium parts are not suitable for ground connections. Plan the cable installation Break the cabling down into cable groups and install these separately. Always route power cables, signal cables and HF cables through separated ducts or in separate bundles. Feed the cabling into the cabinet from one side only and, if possible, on one level only. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 101 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Route the signal cables as close as possible to chassis surfaces. Twist the feed and return conductors of separately installed cables. Routing HF cables:
avoid parallel routing of HF cables. Do not route cables through the antenna field. Shielding for the cables Shield the data cables and connect the shield at both ends. Shield the analog cables and connect the shield at one end, e.g. on the drive unit. Always apply large-area connections between the cable shields and the shielding bus at the cabinet inlet and make the contact with clamps. Feed the connected shield through to the module without interruption. Use braided shields, not foil shields. Line and signal filter Use only line filters with metal housings Connect the filter housing to the cabinet chassis using a large-area low-HF-impedance connection. Never fix the filter housing to a painted surface. Fix the filter at the control cabinet inlet or in the direction of the source. 4.5.4 Propagation of electromagnetic interference Three components have to be present for interference to occur in a system:
Interference source Coupling path Interference sink Figure 4-11 Propagation of interference If one of the components is missing, e.g. the coupling path between the interference source and the interference sink, the interference sink is unaffected, even if the interference source is transmitting a high level of noise. 102 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The EMC measures are applied to all three components, in order to prevent malfunctions due to interference. When setting up a plant, the manufacturer must take all possible measures in order to prevent the occurrence of interference sources:
Only devices fulfilling limit class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a plant. Interference suppression measures must be introduced on all interference-emitting devices. This includes all coils and windings. The design of the system must be such that mutual interference between individual components is precluded or kept as small as possible. Information and tips for plant design are given in the following sections. Interference sources In order to achieve a high level of electromagnetic compatibility and thus a very low level of disturbance in a plant, it is necessary to recognize the most frequent interference sources. These must then be eliminated by appropriate measures. Table 4- 62 Interference sources: origin and effect Interference source Contactors, electronic valves Electrical motor Electric welding device Interference results from Contacts Coils Collector Winding Contacts Transformer Power supply unit, switched-
mode High-frequency appliances Transmitter
(e.g. service radio) Ground or reference potential difference Operator Power cable Circuit Circuit Antenna Static charge Current flow High-voltage cable Voltage difference Effect on the interference sink System disturbances Magnetic field Electrical field Magnetic field Electrical field Magnetic field, system disturbance, transient currents Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance Electromagnetic field Electromagnetic field Electrical discharge currents, electrical field Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance Electrical field Voltage difference Transient currents SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 103 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) What interference can affect RFID?
Interference source Switched-mode power supply Interference emitted from the Cause Interference injected through the cables connected in series HF interference over the antennas current infeed Cable is inadequately shield-
ed The reader is not connected to ground. caused by another reader Remedy Replace the power supply Better cable shielding Ground the reader Position the antennas further apart. Erect suitable damping materials between the antennas. Reduce the power of the readers. Please follow the instructions in the section Installation guidelines/reducing the effects of metal Coupling paths A coupling path has to be present before the disturbance emitted by the interference source can affect the system. There are four ways in which interference can be coupled in:
Figure 4-12 Ways in which interference can be coupled in 104 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) When RFID modules are used, different components in the overall system can act as a coupling path:
Table 4- 63 Causes of coupling paths Coupling path Conductors and cables Control cabinet or housing Incorrect or inappropriate installation Inappropriate physical arrangement of cables Invoked by Missing or incorrectly connected shield Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing conductor Missing or incorrect earthing Inappropriate physical arrangement Components not mounted securely Unfavorable cabinet configuration SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 105 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.5 Cabinet configuration The influence of the user in the configuration of an electromagnetically compatible plant encompasses cabinet configuration, cable installation, ground connections and correct shielding of cables. Note For information about electromagnetically compatible cabinet configuration, please consult the installation guidelines for SIMATIC PLCs. Shielding by enclosure Magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves can be kept away from the interference sink by using a metal enclosure. The easier the induced interference current can flow, the greater the intrinsic weakening of the interference field. All enclosures and metal panels in the cabinet should therefore be connected in a manner allowing good conductance. Figure 4-13 Shielding by enclosure If the control cabinet panels are insulated from each other, a high-frequency-conducting connection can be established using ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conducting paste. The larger the area of the connection, the greater the high-frequency conductivity. This is not possible using single-wire connections. Prevention of interference by optimum configuration Good interference suppression can be achieved by installing SIMATIC PLCs on conducting mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the control cabinet, interference can be prevented easily by observing certain guidelines. Power components (transformers, drive units, load power supply units) should be arranged separately from the control components
(relay control unit, SIMATIC S7). 106 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) As a rule:
The effect of the interference decreases as the distance between the interference source and interference sink increases. The interference can be further decreased by installing grounded shielding plates. The load connections and power cables should be installed separately from the signal cables with a minimum clearance of 10 cm. Figure 4-14 Prevention of interference by optimum configuration SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 107 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Filtering of the supply voltage External interference from the mains can be prevented by installing line filters. Correct installation is extremely important, in addition to appropriate dimensioning. It is essential that the line filter is mounted directly at the cabinet inlet. As a result, interference is filtered promptly at the inlet, and is not conducted through the cabinet. Figure 4-15 Filtering of the supply voltage 108 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.6 Prevention of interference sources A high level of immunity to interference can be achieved by avoiding interference sources. All switched inductances are frequent sources of interference in plants. Suppression of inductance Relays, contactors, etc. generate interference voltages and must therefore be suppressed using one of the circuits below. Even with small relays, interference voltages of up to 800 V occur on 24 V coils, and interference voltages of several kV occur on 230 V coils when the coil is switched. The use of freewheeling diodes or RC circuits prevents interference voltages and thus stray interference on conductors installed parallel to the coil conductor. Figure 4-16 Suppression of inductance Note All coils in the cabinet should be suppressed. The valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the control cabinet should be tested in particular. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 109 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.7 Equipotential bonding Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design of the plant components and different voltage levels. If the plant components are connected across signal cables, transient currents flow across the signal cables. These transient currents can corrupt the signals. Proper equipotential bonding is thus essential. The equipotential bonding conductor must have a sufficiently large cross section (at least 10 mm2). The distance between the signal cable and the associated equipotential bonding conductor must be as small as possible (antenna effect). A fine-strand conductor must be used (better high-frequency conductivity). When connecting the equipotential bonding conductors to the centralized equipotential bonding strip (EBS), the power components and non-power components must be combined. The equipotential bonding conductors of the separate modules must lead directly to the equipotential bonding strip. Figure 4-17 Equipotential bonding (EBS = Equipotential bonding strip) The better the equipotential bonding in a plant, the smaller the chance of interference due to fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with protective earthing of a plant. Protective earthing prevents the occurrence of excessive contact voltages in the event of equipment faults whereas equipotential bonding prevents the occurrence of differences in potential. 110 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.8 Cable shielding Signal cables must be shielded in order to prevent coupling of interference. The best shielding is achieved by installing the cables in steel tubes. However, this is only necessary if the signal cable is routed through an environment prone to particular interference. It is usually adequate to use cables with braided shields. In either case, however, correct connection is vital for effective shielding. Note An unconnected or incorrectly connected shield has no shielding effect. As a rule:
For analog signal cables, the shield should be connected at one end on the receiver side For digital signals, the shield should be connected to the enclosure at both ends Since interference signals are frequently within the HF range (> 10 kHz), a large-area HF-
proof shield contact is necessary Figure 4-18 Cable shielding The shielding bus should be connected to the control cabinet enclosure in a manner allowing good conductance (large-area contact) and must be situated as close as possible to the cable inlet. The cable insulation must be removed and the cable clamped to the shielding bus (high-frequency clamp) or secured using cable ties. Care should be taken to ensure that the connection allows good conductance. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 111 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Figure 4-19 Connection of shielding bus The shielding bus must be connected to the PE busbar. If shielded cables have to be interrupted, the shield must be continued via the corresponding connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used for this purpose. Figure 4-20 Interruption of shielded cables If intermediate connectors, which do not have a suitable shield connection, are used, the shield must be continued by fixing cable clamps at the point of interruption. This ensures a large-area, HF-conducting contact. 112 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x
1 2 | Users manual 1 of 3 | Users Manual | 3.47 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 |
1 ___________________ Introduction 2 ___________________ Safety information ___________________ 3 System overview ___________________ 4 Planning the RF300 system ___________________ 5 Readers ___________________ 6 Antennas ___________________ 7 RF300 transponder ___________________ 8 ISO transponder ___________________ 9 System integration ___________________ 10 System diagnostics ___________________ A Appendix SIMATIC Ident RFID systems SIMATIC RF300 System Manual 07/2017 C79000-G8976-C345-07 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following:
WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NRNBERG GERMANY 07/2017 Subject to change Copyright Siemens AG 2005 - 2017. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 2 3 4 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 15 1.1 Navigating in the system manual ............................................................................................ 15 1.2 Preface .................................................................................................................................... 15 Safety information ................................................................................................................................. 19 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 23 RFID systems ......................................................................................................................... 23 3.1 SIMATIC RF300 ...................................................................................................................... 24 3.2 3.2.1 System overview of SIMATIC RF300 ..................................................................................... 24 RFID components and their function ...................................................................................... 25 3.2.2 Application areas of RF300 .................................................................................................... 33 3.2.3 3.3 System configuration .............................................................................................................. 34 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 34 3.3.1 Assembly line example: Use of RF300 transponders ............................................................. 34 3.3.2 3.3.3 Example of container and cardboard container handling: Use of ISO transponders ............. 36 Planning the RF300 system .................................................................................................................. 39 Fundamentals of application planning .................................................................................... 39 4.1 Selection criteria for SIMATIC RF300 components ................................................................ 39 4.1.1 Transmission window and read/write distance ....................................................................... 39 4.1.2 4.1.3 Width of the transmission window .......................................................................................... 42 Impact of secondary fields ...................................................................................................... 43 4.1.4 Setup help of the readers of the second generation ............................................................... 46 4.1.5 Permissible directions of motion of the transponder ............................................................... 47 4.1.6 4.1.7 Operation in static and dynamic mode ................................................................................... 47 Dwell time of the transponder ................................................................................................. 49 4.1.8 Communication between communications module, reader and transponder ........................ 50 4.1.9 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas ................................................................ 51 4.2 4.2.1 Field data of RF300 transponders .......................................................................................... 52 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) ................................................................................ 56 4.2.2 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS E) ................................................................................ 61 4.2.3 4.2.4 Minimum clearances ............................................................................................................... 64 Installation guidelines.............................................................................................................. 67 4.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 67 4.3.1 Reduction of interference due to metal ................................................................................... 67 4.3.2 4.3.3 Effects of metal on different transponders and readers .......................................................... 70 Impact on the transmission window by metal ......................................................................... 70 4.3.4 Impact on the transmission window by metal ......................................................................... 71 4.3.4.1 RF340R ................................................................................................................................... 75 4.3.4.2 RF350R ................................................................................................................................... 79 4.3.4.3 4.3.4.4 RF380R ................................................................................................................................... 93 RF382R ................................................................................................................................... 96 4.3.4.5 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 3 Table of contents Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders .......................................................... 97 4.4 Readers .................................................................................................................................. 97 4.4.1 Overview of the readers and their housing materials ............................................................ 97 4.4.1.1 Polyamide 12 ......................................................................................................................... 97 4.4.1.2 Transponder ........................................................................................................................... 99 4.4.2 Overview of the transponders and their housing materials ................................................... 99 4.4.2.1 Polyamide 6 and Polyamide 6.6 GF30 ................................................................................ 101 4.4.2.2 Polyamide 12 ....................................................................................................................... 102 4.4.2.3 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) ............................................................................................... 104 4.4.2.4 Polycarbonate (PC) .............................................................................................................. 105 4.4.2.5 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) ...................................................................................................... 106 4.4.2.6 Epoxy resin .......................................................................................................................... 106 4.4.2.7 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 109 4.5 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 109 4.5.1 What does EMC mean? ....................................................................................................... 110 4.5.2 Basic rules ............................................................................................................................ 111 4.5.3 Propagation of electromagnetic interference ....................................................................... 112 4.5.4 Cabinet configuration ........................................................................................................... 116 4.5.5 Prevention of interference sources ...................................................................................... 119 4.5.6 Equipotential bonding .......................................................................................................... 120 4.5.7 4.5.8 Cable shielding..................................................................................................................... 121 Readers ............................................................................................................................................... 123 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R ................................................................................................................ 124 Features ............................................................................................................................... 124 5.1.1 RF310R ordering data ......................................................................................................... 124 5.1.2 Pin assignment RF310R with RS-422 interface .................................................................. 125 5.1.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 125 5.1.4 5.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 125 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 126 5.1.6 Minimum distance between RF310R readers ...................................................................... 126 5.1.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 127 5.1.8 5.1.9 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 129 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 130 5.1.10 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode ...................................................................................... 131 5.2 5.2.1 Features ............................................................................................................................... 131 Ordering data for RF310R with Scanmode .......................................................................... 131 5.2.2 Pin assignment RF310R special version Scanmode RS-422 interface ............................... 132 5.2.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 132 5.2.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 132 5.2.5 5.2.6 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 133 Minimum distance between several readers ....................................................................... 133 5.2.7 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 134 5.2.8 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 135 5.2.9 5.2.10 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 136 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation ..................................................................................... 137 5.3 Features ............................................................................................................................... 137 5.3.1 5.3.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 137 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface .............................................................................. 138 5.3.3 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 138 5.3.4 5.3.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 139 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5 4 Table of contents 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 5.3.11 5.3.11.1 5.3.11.2 5.3.11.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.1.1 5.4.1.2 5.4.1.3 5.4.1.4 5.4.1.5 5.4.1.6 5.4.1.7 5.4.1.8 5.4.1.9 5.4.1.10 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.4.2.5 5.4.2.6 5.4.2.7 5.4.2.8 5.4.2.9 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.3.2 5.4.3.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.1.3 5.5.1.4 5.5.1.5 5.5.1.6 5.5.1.7 5.5.1.8 5.5.1.9 5.5.1.10 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.3 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 139 Minimum distance between RF310R readers ...................................................................... 140 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 141 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 142 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 144 Using the reader in hazardous area ..................................................................................... 144 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases ..................................................................... 148 Using the reader in hazardous area for dust ........................................................................ 148 Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas: .................................................. 149 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R .................................................................................................. 150 SIMATIC RF340R ................................................................................................................. 150 Features ................................................................................................................................ 150 Ordering data for RF340R .................................................................................................... 150 Pin assignment of RF340R RS422 interface ........................................................................ 151 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 151 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 151 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 152 Minimum distance between RF340R readers ...................................................................... 152 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 153 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 155 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 156 SIMATIC RF350R ................................................................................................................. 157 Features ................................................................................................................................ 157 Ordering data for RF350R .................................................................................................... 157 Pin assignment of RF350R RS422 interface ........................................................................ 158 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 158 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 158 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 158 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 159 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 161 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 162 Use of the reader in hazardous areas .................................................................................. 163 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for gases ................................................................. 164 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for dusts .................................................................. 164 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area ............................................... 165 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation ....................................................................... 166 SIMATIC RF340R - 2nd generation ...................................................................................... 166 Features ................................................................................................................................ 166 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 166 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface ............................................................................... 167 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 167 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 167 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 168 Minimum distance between RF340R readers ...................................................................... 168 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 169 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 171 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 172 SIMATIC RF350R - 2nd generation ...................................................................................... 173 Features ................................................................................................................................ 173 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 173 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface ............................................................................... 174 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5 Table of contents 5.5.2.4 5.5.2.5 5.5.2.6 5.5.2.7 5.5.2.8 5.5.2.9 5.5.3 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 5.5.3.3 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.11.1 5.6.11.2 5.6.11.3 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.7.10 5.7.11 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5 5.8.6 5.8.7 5.8.8 5.8.9 5.8.10 5.8.11 5.8.11.1 5.8.11.2 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 174 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 174 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 175 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 175 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 177 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 178 Using the readers in a hazardous area ................................................................................ 179 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases ..................................................................... 182 Using the reader in hazardous area for dust ....................................................................... 182 Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas: ................................................. 183 SIMATIC RF380R ................................................................................................................ 184 Features ............................................................................................................................... 184 RF380R ordering data ......................................................................................................... 184 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface......................................................... 184 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 185 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 185 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 186 Minimum distance between RF380R readers ...................................................................... 186 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 187 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 189 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 190 Use of the reader in a hazardous ......................................................................................... 190 Use of the reader in a hazardous area ................................................................................ 190 Use of the reader in hazardous areas for gases .................................................................. 191 Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas: ................................................. 192 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode ...................................................................................... 193 Features ............................................................................................................................... 193 Ordering data for RF380R with Scanmode .......................................................................... 193 Pin assignment RF380R Scanmode RS-232 interface........................................................ 194 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 194 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 194 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 195 Minimum distance between several RF380R Scanmode readers ....................................... 195 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 196 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 197 Certificates and Approvals ................................................................................................... 198 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 199 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation ..................................................................................... 200 Features ............................................................................................................................... 200 RF380R ordering data ......................................................................................................... 200 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface......................................................... 201 LED operating display .......................................................................................................... 201 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 202 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 202 Minimum distance between RF380R readers ...................................................................... 203 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 204 Approvals ............................................................................................................................. 205 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 207 Using the reader in hazardous area..................................................................................... 207 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases ..................................................................... 210 Using the reader in hazardous area for dust ....................................................................... 211 6 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 6 7 Table of contents Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas: .................................................. 211 5.8.11.3 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode ....................................................................................... 212 5.9 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 212 5.9.1 RF382R with Scanmode ordering data................................................................................. 212 5.9.2 Pin assignment RF382R Scanmode RS232 interface .......................................................... 213 5.9.3 LED operating display ........................................................................................................... 213 5.9.4 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 213 5.9.5 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 214 5.9.6 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers ....................................... 214 5.9.7 Transmission window............................................................................................................ 214 5.9.8 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 218 5.9.9 Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 219 5.9.10 5.9.11 Dimensional diagram ............................................................................................................ 220 Antennas ............................................................................................................................................ 221 6.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 221 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 224 6.2 Ensuring reliable data exchange .......................................................................................... 224 6.3 6.4 Metal-free area ...................................................................................................................... 225 Minimum distance between antennas .................................................................................. 228 6.5 6.6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 229 6.7 Dimensional drawings ........................................................................................................... 230 RF300 transponder ............................................................................................................................. 233 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders ............................................................... 234 SIMATIC RF320T ................................................................................................................. 236 7.2 Features ................................................................................................................................ 236 7.2.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 236 7.2.2 7.2.3 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 237 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 238 7.2.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 239 7.2.5 SIMATIC RF330T ................................................................................................................. 240 7.3 7.3.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 240 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 240 7.3.2 Mounting on/in metal............................................................................................................. 240 7.3.3 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 242 7.3.4 7.3.5 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 243 SIMATIC RF340T ................................................................................................................. 244 7.4 Features ................................................................................................................................ 244 7.4.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 244 7.4.2 7.4.3 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 245 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 246 7.4.4 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 247 7.4.5 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T ................................................................................................................. 248 Features ................................................................................................................................ 248 7.5.1 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 248 7.5.2 7.5.3 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 249 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7 Table of contents Mounting options .................................................................................................................. 250 7.5.4 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 251 7.5.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 252 7.5.6 SIMATIC RF360T................................................................................................................. 253 7.6 Features ............................................................................................................................... 253 7.6.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 253 7.6.2 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 254 7.6.3 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 257 7.6.4 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 258 7.6.5 SIMATIC RF370T................................................................................................................. 259 7.7 Features ............................................................................................................................... 259 7.7.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 259 7.7.2 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 260 7.7.3 Mounting instructions ........................................................................................................... 261 7.7.4 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 261 7.7.5 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 262 7.7.6 SIMATIC RF380T................................................................................................................. 263 7.8 Features ............................................................................................................................... 263 7.8.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 263 7.8.2 Installation guidelines for RF380T ....................................................................................... 264 7.8.3 Mounting instructions ........................................................................................................... 264 7.8.3.1 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 267 7.8.3.2 Configuring instructions ....................................................................................................... 268 7.8.4 Temperature dependence of the transmission window ....................................................... 268 7.8.4.1 Temperature response in cyclic operation ........................................................................... 268 7.8.4.2 Use of the transponder in the Ex protection area ................................................................ 271 7.8.5 Use of the transponder in hazardous areas for gases ......................................................... 272 7.8.5.1 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area .............................................. 272 7.8.5.2 Cleaning the mobile data memory ....................................................................................... 272 7.8.6 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 273 7.8.7 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 274 7.8.8 ISO transponder .................................................................................................................................. 275 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders ................................................................... 276 8.1 8.2 MDS D100 ............................................................................................................................ 278 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 278 8.2.1 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 278 8.2.2 Metal-free area ..................................................................................................................... 279 8.2.3 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 281 8.2.4 8.2.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 282 MDS D117 ............................................................................................................................ 283 8.3 Features ............................................................................................................................... 283 8.3.1 8.3.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 283 Mounting in metal ................................................................................................................. 284 8.3.3 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 284 8.3.4 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 285 8.3.5 8.4 MDS D124 ............................................................................................................................ 286 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 286 8.4.1 8.4.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 286 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8 8 Table of contents 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 8.7.5 8.7.6 8.7.7 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 8.8.6 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.10 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 8.10.5 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.12 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 287 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 288 Use of the MDS D124 in hazardous area ............................................................................. 289 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 291 MDS D126 ............................................................................................................................ 292 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 292 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 292 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 293 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 294 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 295 MDS D127 ............................................................................................................................ 296 Features ................................................................................................................................ 296 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 296 Mounting in metal .................................................................................................................. 297 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 298 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 299 MDS D139 ............................................................................................................................ 300 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 300 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 301 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 301 Cleaning the mobile data memory ........................................................................................ 302 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 303 Use of the MDS D139 in hazardous areas ........................................................................... 304 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................. 306 MDS D160 ............................................................................................................................ 307 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 307 Information for RF300 compatibility ...................................................................................... 307 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 308 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 308 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 309 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................. 311 MDS D165 ............................................................................................................................ 312 Features ................................................................................................................................ 312 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 312 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 312 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 314 MDS D200 ............................................................................................................................ 314 Features ................................................................................................................................ 314 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 315 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 315 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 316 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 318 MDS D261 ............................................................................................................................ 319 Features ................................................................................................................................ 319 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 319 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 319 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 321 MDS D324 ............................................................................................................................ 321 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 9 Table of contents 8.12.1 8.12.2 8.12.3 8.12.4 8.12.5 8.13 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 8.13.6 8.13.7 8.14 8.14.1 8.14.2 8.14.3 8.14.4 8.14.5 8.15 8.15.1 8.15.2 8.15.3 8.15.4 8.15.5 8.16 8.16.1 8.16.2 8.16.3 8.16.4 8.16.5 8.17 8.17.1 8.17.2 8.17.3 8.17.4 8.17.5 8.18 8.18.1 8.18.2 8.18.3 8.18.4 8.18.5 8.19 8.19.1 8.19.2 8.19.3 8.19.4 8.19.5 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 321 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 322 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 322 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 323 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 325 MDS D339 ............................................................................................................................ 326 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 326 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 326 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 327 Cleaning the mobile data memory ....................................................................................... 328 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 328 Use of the MDS D339 in hazardous areas .......................................................................... 330 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 332 MDS D400 ............................................................................................................................ 333 Features ............................................................................................................................... 333 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 333 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 334 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 335 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 337 MDS D421 ............................................................................................................................ 338 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 338 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 338 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 339 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 341 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 342 MDS D422 ............................................................................................................................ 343 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 343 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 343 Mounting in metal ................................................................................................................. 344 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 344 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 346 MDS D423 ............................................................................................................................ 346 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 346 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 346 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 347 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 348 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................ 350 MDS D424 ............................................................................................................................ 350 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 350 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 351 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 351 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 352 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 354 MDS D425 ............................................................................................................................ 354 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 354 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 355 Application example ............................................................................................................. 355 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 355 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 357 10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Table of contents 8.20 8.20.1 8.20.2 8.20.3 8.20.4 8.20.5 8.21 8.21.1 8.21.2 8.21.3 8.21.4 8.21.5 8.22 8.22.1 8.22.2 8.22.3 8.22.4 8.22.5 8.23 8.23.1 8.23.2 8.23.3 8.23.4 8.23.5 8.24 8.24.1 8.24.2 8.24.3 8.24.4 8.24.5 8.25 8.25.1 8.25.2 8.25.3 8.25.4 8.25.5 8.25.6 8.26 8.26.1 8.26.2 8.26.3 8.26.4 8.26.5 8.27 8.27.1 8.27.2 8.27.3 8.27.4 8.27.5 MDS D426 ............................................................................................................................ 357 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 357 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 358 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 358 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 359 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 360 MDS D428 ............................................................................................................................ 361 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 361 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 361 Application example .............................................................................................................. 362 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 362 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 364 MDS D460 ............................................................................................................................ 364 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 364 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 365 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 365 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 366 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................. 367 MDS D521 ............................................................................................................................ 368 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 368 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 368 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 368 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 370 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 372 MDS D522 ............................................................................................................................ 372 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 372 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 372 Mounting in metal .................................................................................................................. 373 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 373 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 375 MDS D522 special variant .................................................................................................... 375 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 375 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 375 Mounting in metal .................................................................................................................. 376 Installation instructions.......................................................................................................... 376 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 378 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................................. 379 MDS D524 ............................................................................................................................ 380 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 380 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 380 Mounting on metal ................................................................................................................ 381 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 382 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 383 MDS D525 ............................................................................................................................ 384 Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 384 Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 384 Application example .............................................................................................................. 385 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................ 385 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 387 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 11 Table of contents 8.28 MDS D526 ............................................................................................................................ 388 8.28.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 388 8.28.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 388 8.28.3 Mounting on metal ............................................................................................................... 389 8.28.4 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 390 8.28.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 391 8.29 MDS D528 ............................................................................................................................ 392 8.29.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 392 8.29.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 392 8.29.3 Application example ............................................................................................................. 393 8.29.4 Technical specifications ....................................................................................................... 393 8.29.5 Dimension drawing .............................................................................................................. 395 System integration ............................................................................................................................... 397 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 397 9.1 9.2 ASM 456 .............................................................................................................................. 399 ASM 475 .............................................................................................................................. 400 9.3 Features ............................................................................................................................... 400 9.3.1 9.3.2 Ordering data ....................................................................................................................... 401 Indicators .............................................................................................................................. 402 9.3.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 404 9.3.4 Shield connection ................................................................................................................. 406 9.3.5 9.3.6 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 406 RF120C ................................................................................................................................ 408 9.4 RF160C ................................................................................................................................ 409 9.5 9.6 RF170C ................................................................................................................................ 410 RF180C ................................................................................................................................ 411 9.7 9.8 RF182C ................................................................................................................................ 411 System diagnostics .............................................................................................................................. 413 Error codes of the RF300 readers ....................................................................................... 413 10.1 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 ........................................................................................... 415 10.2 10.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 415 Reader diagnostics with "reader status" (SLG-STATUS) .................................................... 416 10.2.2 10.2.3 Transponder diagnostics with "Tag status" (MDS-STATUS) ............................................... 420 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 423 Certificates and approvals ................................................................................................... 423 A.1 Accessories .......................................................................................................................... 425 A.2 Transponder holders ............................................................................................................ 425 A.2.1 A.2.2 MOBY I migration ................................................................................................................. 432 DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" ............................................................... 435 A.2.3 Connecting cable ................................................................................................................. 436 A.3 A.3.1 RF3xxR reader (RS-422) with ASM 456 / RF160C / RF170C / RF180C / RF182C ............ 436 Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 ............................................................................. 438 A.3.2 Reader RF3xxR (RS-422) with RF120C .............................................................................. 439 A.3.3 A.3.4 Reader RF380R (RS232) - PC ............................................................................................ 440 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 9 10 A 12 Table of contents Ordering data ........................................................................................................................ 441 A.4 A.5 Service & Support ................................................................................................................. 451 Index................................................................................................................................................... 453 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 13 Table of contents 14 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Introduction 1 1.1 Navigating in the system manual Structure of the content Contents Introduction Safety Information System overview Planning the RF300 system Reader Antennas RF300 transponder ISO transponder System integration System diagnostics Appendix Content Detailed organization of the documentation, including the index of pages and chapters Purpose, structure and description of the important topics. Refers to all the valid technical safety aspects which have to be adhered to while installing, commissioning and operating from the product/system view and with reference to statutory regulations. Overview of all RF identification systems, system overview of SIMATIC RF300 Information about possible applications of SIMATIC RF300, support for application plan-
ning, tools for finding suitable SIMATIC RF300 components. Description of readers which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of antennas which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of RF300 transponders which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of ISO transponders which can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Overview of the communications modules and function blocks that can be used for SIMATIC RF300 Description of system diagnostics available for SIMATIC RF300 Certificates and approvals Accessories Connecting cables Ordering data Service & Support 1.2 Preface Purpose of this document This system manual contains all the information needed to plan and configure the system. It is intended both for programming and testing/debugging personnel who commission the system themselves and connect it with other units (automation systems, further programming devices), as well as for service and maintenance personnel who install expansions or carry out fault/error analyses. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 15 Introduction 1.2 Preface Scope of validity of this document This documentation is valid for all variants of the SIMATIC RF300 system and describes the devices shipped as of July 2016. Additional information You will find further information about the readers RF350M, RF310R Scanmode and RF382R Scanmode in the relevant manuals. Additional information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15033/man) Registered trademarks SIMATIC , SIMATIC RF , MOBY , RF MANAGER and SIMATIC Sensors are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. History Currently released versions of the SIMATIC RF300 system manual:
Edition 05/2005 11/2005 04/2006 12/2006 07/2007 09/2007 06/2008 01/2009 Remark First Edition Revised edition, components added: RF310R with RS-422 interface, RF350T and RF360T; ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475 Revised edition, components added: RF340R as well as RF350R with the antenna types ANT 1, ANT 18 and ANT 30 Revised edition, components added: RF370T, RF380T and RF170C Revised edition, degrees of protection changed for the RF300 readers Revised edition, components added: RF380R and RF180C Revised edition Revised edition, expanded by the reader functionalities "RF300 transponder" and "ISO transponder" for the SIMATIC RF310R and SIMATIC RF380R readers 16 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Introduction 1.2 Preface Edition 03/2014 Remark Revised edition, expanded by the reader functionalities "RF300 transponder" and "ISO transponder" for the SIMATIC RF340R and SIMATIC RF350R readers Expanded by the following components:
Reader RF310R with Scanmode, RF382R with Scanmode Communications module RF120C Antennas ANT 12 (in conjunction with RF350R) and ANT 8 (in conjunction with RF310M) RF300 transponder RF330T ISO transponder MDS D117, D126, D127, D165, D200, D261, D339, D400, D422, D423, D425, D426 10/2016 Revised and expanded edition Expanded by the following components:
Readers of the second generation RF310R, RF340R, RF350R Reader RF380R Scanmode Antenna ANT 3, ANT 3S ISO transponder MDS D5xx 05/2017 MOBY I migration in SIMATIC RF300 Revised and expanded edition Expanded by the following components:
Readers of the second generation RF380R Abbreviations and naming conventions The following terms/abbreviations are used synonymously in this document:
Reader Transponder, tag Communications module (CM) Write/read device (SLG) Data carrier, mobile data storage, (MDS) Interface module (ASM) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 17 Introduction 1.2 Preface 18 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Safety information 2 SIMATIC RFID products comply with the salient safety specifications acc. to IEC, VDE, EN, UL and CSA. If you have questions about the permissibility of the installation in the planned environment, please contact your service representative. WARNING Opening the device Do not open the device when when the power supply is on. Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user. NOTICE Alterations not permitted Alterations to the devices are not permitted. Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment approval, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty. Installation instructions NOTICE Switch/fuse to disconnect the reader from the power supply Make sure that the readers can be disconnected from the power supply with a switch or a fuse. The function of the switch or fuse must be clearly recognizable. Operating temperature CAUTION Danger of burns Note that some outer components of the reader are made of metal. Depending on the environmental conditions temperatures can occur on the device that are higher than the maximum permitted operating temperature. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 19 Safety information Repairs WARNING Repairs only by authorized qualified personnel Repairs may only be carried out by authorized qualified personnel. Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user. System expansions Only install system expansions intended for this system. If you install other expansions, you may damage the system or violate the safety requirements and regulations for radio frequency interference suppression. Contact Technical Support or your local sales department to find out which system expansions are suitable for installation. NOTICE Warranty conditions If you cause system defects by installing or exchanging system expansion devices, the warranty becomes void. Safety distances CAUTION Safety distance between reader/antenna and persons Note that for permanent exposure, the following safety distances must be adhered to:
RF310R: 80 mm RF340R: 130 mm RF350R + ANT 1: 140 mm RF350R + ANT 3: 80 mm RF350R + ANT 12: 25 mm RF350R + ANT 18: 50 mm RF350R + ANT 30: 80 mm RF380R: 250 mm RF382R: 130 mm Note Safety distance with pacemakers A safety distance between reader/antenna and persons with pacemakers is not necessary. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 20 Security information Safety information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit Link: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customers exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under Link: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 21 Safety information 22 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.1 RFID systems 3 RFID systems from Siemens control and optimize material flow. They identify reliably, quickly and economically, are insensitive to contamination and store data directly on the product or workpiece carrier. Table 3- 1 Overview of SIMATIC RFID systems SIMATIC RF200 Frequency range RFID system Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Range, max. Protocols
(air interface) 650 mm ISO 15693 ISO 18000-3 Standards, specifica-
tions, approvals Memory capacity, max. Maximum data transfer rate for wireless trans-
mission Multitag capability Special characteristics EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA 992 bytes
(EEPROM) 8192 bytes (FRAM) 25.5 kbps With RF290R reader only Particularly com-
pact designs For particularly low-cost RFID solutions IO-Link for simple identification tasks HF SIMATIC RF300 13.56 MHz 240 mm ISO 15693 ISO 14443 (MOBY E) RF300 (proprie-
tary) EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA ATEX 64 kB (EEPROM) 8192 bytes (FRAM) MOBY D 13.56 MHz 380 mm ISO 15693 ISO 18000-3 UHF SIMATIC RF600 865 ... 928 MHz 1) 8 m EPCglobal Class 1 Gen 2 ISO 18000-6B ISO 18000-6C EN 300330, EN 301489, CE FCC Part 15 UL/CSA ETSI EN 3002208, CE FCC UL 922 bytes (EEPROM) 2000 bytes (FRAM) 496 bits (EPC), 3424 bytes 106 kbps 26.5 kbps 300 kbps No Yes Yes High data trans-
mission speed Extended diagnos-
tics options High memory ca-
pacity Simple migration from old systems MOBY I/E SIMATIC or PC/IT integration External antennas for industrial appli-
cations SIMATIC or PC/IT integration Data preprocessing in the readers Special antennas for industrial appli-
cations 1) Depends on the country of deployment and the frequency range permitted there SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 23 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 3.2.1 System overview of SIMATIC RF300 SIMATIC RF300 is an inductive identification system specially designed for use in industrial production for the control and optimization of material flow. Thanks to its compact dimensions, RF300 is the obvious choice where installation conditions are restricted, especially for assembly lines, handling systems and workpiece carrier systems. RF300 is suitable for both simple and demanding RFID applications and it stands out for its persuasive price/performance ratio. Scanmode applications In applications without command control, the transponders are read automatically. The type of data acquisition and transfer is preset in the reader using parameters. Medium-performance applications RF300 in conjunction with ISO transponders provides a cost-effective solution for medium-
performance applications. High-performance applications The high-performance components of RF300 in conjunction with the RF300 transponders provide advantages in terms of high data transmission speeds and storage capacities. SIMATIC RF300 - second generation With the current delivery stage an innovative second generation of the readers RF310R, RF340R, RF350R and RF380R is available. These readers apart from additional performance characteristics are 100% compatible with the RF300s of the first generation. The second generation of the RF380R comes later. Additional performance features:
Additional transponder protocol ISO 14443 (air interface) for MDS E transponders Automatic detection of different transponder types (RF300, ISO 15693, ISO 14443) Emulation of MOBY I write/read devices (SLG 4x) in conjunction with RF300 transponders for simplified migration Setup help integrated in the reader The setup help serves the simple optimization of the reader-transponder positioning during installation/commissioning. Further installation or software are not necessary. The setup help becomes active directly after turning the device on. Improved 5-color LED display 24 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 User-friendly parameter assignment and configuration with TIA Portal technological object
(as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1) Expanded functions for trained users:
Address information for the "INIT" command no longer necessary Expanded "RESET" parameter The MDS-STATUS "Mode 3" functions with all transponder types Automatic antenna recognition with the reader RF350R (depending on the antenna) Table 3- 2 Differences in the features Feature SIMATIC RF300 first generation
--
--
--
--
Single (3 colors)
--
--
Transponder protocol RF300 Transponder protocol ISO 15693 Transponder protocol ISO 14443 Multi-transponder mode MOBY I emulation to the controller Integrated setup help LED display Technology object "SIMATIC Ident"
Fast Command (MDS D1xx, D4xx, D5xx) 1) With the TIA Portal as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1 SIMATIC RF300 second generation
--
Double (5 colors) 1) 3.2.2 RFID components and their function System components overview Table 3- 3 RF300 system components Component Communications module Reader Transponder Description A communications module is used to integrate the RF identification system in controllers/automation systems. The reader ensures inductive communication and power supply to the tran-
sponder, and handles the connection to the various controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7) through the communications module (e.g. ASM 456). The transponder stores all data relevant for production and is used, for exam-
ple, instead of barcode. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 25 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for high-performance applications Figure 3-1 High performance system overview 26 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Table 3- 4 Reader-transponder combination options for high-performance applications Transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R with ANT 1 RF350R with ANT 3 RF350R with ANT 18 RF350R with ANT 30 RF380R RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T 1) as of reader version "AS D"
1)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 27 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for medium-performance applications Figure 3-2 System overview medium-performance 28 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Table 3- 5 Reader-transponder combination options for medium-performance applications Transponder /
MDS RF310R
(RS-422) RF340R RF350R with ANT RF350R with ANT
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
MDS D100 MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 1) MDS D400 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 MDS E600 2) MDS E611 2) MDS E623 2) MDS E624 2) 1) as of reader version "AS D"
2) Product to be discontinued; only relevant for migration projects.
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 18
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF350R with ANT 30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RF380R
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 29 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Note Note on operation of the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx Note that the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx can only be operated in conjunction with the readers of the second generation (article number "6GT2801-xBAxx"). 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 RF300 system components for Scanmode applications Figure 3-3 Scanmode system overview SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 31 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 Table 3- 6 Reader-transponder combination options for Scanmode applications Transponder /
MDS MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T RF310R RF380R RF382R
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
32 Combination possible
-- Combination not possible Combination possible, but not recommended Note Note on operation of the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx Note that the transponders MDS D5xx and MDS E6xx can only be operated in conjunction with the readers of the second generation (article number "6GT2801-xBAxx"). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 3.2.3 Application areas of RF300 System overview 3.2 SIMATIC RF300 SIMATIC RF300 is primarily used for non-contact identification of containers, palettes and workpiece holders in a closed production circuit. The data carriers (transponders) remain in the production chain and are not supplied with the products. SIMATIC RF300, with its compact transponder and reader enclosure dimensions, is particularly suitable in confined spaces. Main applications Mechanical engineering, automation systems, conveyor systems Ancillary assembly lines in the automotive industry, component suppliers Small assembly lines Application examples Production lines for engines, gearboxes, axles, etc. Assembly lines for ABS systems, airbags, brake systems, doors, cockpits, etc. Assembly lines for household electrical appliances, consumer electronics and electronic communication equipment Assembly lines for PCs, small-power motors, contactors, switches Advantages Reading and writing of large data volumes within a short time results in shorter production cycle times and helps to boost productivity Can be used in harsh environments thanks to rugged components with high degree of protection Simple system integration into TCP/IP networks, SIMATIC S7, PROFINET and PROFIBUS (TIA) with little effort Shorter commissioning times and fewer plant failures and downtimes thanks to integral diagnostic functionalities Cost savings thanks to maintenance-free components SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 33 System overview 3.3 System configuration 3.3 System configuration 3.3.1 Overview The SIMATIC RF300 system is characterized by a high level of standardization of its components. This means that the system follows the TIA principle throughout: Totally Integrated Automation. It provides maximum transparency at all levels with its reduced interface overhead. This ensures optimum interaction between all system components. The RF300 system with its flexible components offers many possibilities for system configuration. This chapter shows you how you can use the RF300 components on the basis of various example scenarios. 3.3.2 Assembly line example: Use of RF300 transponders In assembly lines, such as in engine manufacturing, many work steps are completed in succession. Automated or manual assembly work is carried out at the individual workstations in relatively short periods of time. The special features of the RF300 transponders, which stand out for their large data memory and high transmission speeds, bring about many advantages in regard to the production unit numbers of such plants. The possibility of saving large volumes of data means savings in terms of data management on the HOST system and considerably contributes to data security (redundant data management e.g. HOST database or controller and data carrier) Advantages at a glance:
redundant data storage on the basis of large memory, availability of decentralized data high data rate data management savings on the host system Features of the scenario In this example scenario, engine blocks that are placed on metal pallets are conveyed on an assembly line. The engines are assembled piece-by-piece at the individual workstations. The RFID transponder of the type SIMATIC RF340T is mounted permanently on the underside of the pallet. The transport speed is approx. 0.5 m/s. In this scenario, it is an advantage that the transponder can be directly secured to metal on the metal pallets. The small-dimensioned SIMATIC RF310R reader is integrated in the conveyor elements in such a manner that it can communicate with the transponders from below. Thus, it is not necessary to align the pallets or to attach several transponders. The data of the entire production order (5000 bytes) is stored on the transponder. This data is read at each workstation and changed or supplemented depending on the workstation, and then written back again. Thus, the status of the engine block assembly can be determined at any point in time, even if there is a failure at the HOST level. Thanks to the extremely high data rate, a very short cycle time for the work steps can be planned, which results in high end product unit numbers "engines". 34 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.3 System configuration The entire production order that is saved on the transponder can also be read manually via the WIN-LC terminal located at each workstation. This means that virtually no additional data management is required on the control computer. The production order data can also be read for servicing purposes via the mobile SIMATIC RF350M reader. Figure 3-4 Example of engine block production SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 35 System overview 3.3 System configuration 3.3.3 Example of container and cardboard container handling: Use of ISO transponders Containers of varying sizes are conveyed to picking workstations in a delivery center. There, the individual goods are removed and packed in cartons according to the delivery note. These cartons are marked with low-cost transponder labels and sorted to small or large packaging workstations (according to the delivery note) by being guided or transported via the corresponding conveyor system. The containers are marked using the MDS D100 ISO transponder. Advantages at a glance:
Decision points in the conveyor system can be installed in a more favorable way
(mechanically) Different sizes of containers with different depths can be identified due to the range In contrast to bar codes, the transponders can also be written to Different types of transponders can be processed using one and the same reader Features of the scenario In this example scenario, containers of varying sizes are conveyed on a conveyor system. Only the unique identification number (8 bytes) is read. The containers to be picked are sorted to the corresponding workstations. The maximum transport speed is 1.0 m/s. In this scenario, it is an advantage that the RF380R reader can read and write the transponders at different distances on the containers without a great deal of mechanical or control system effort due to the reading range. During the picking process, the goods are immediately placed in different containers or packed in cartons depending on the destination (small packaging or large packaging station). The containers are equipped with the MDS D100 ISO transponder. The low-cost "one-way tag" (label) is used on the cartons: it is simply glued onto the carton. Thus the goods can be identified at any time. Again, one and the same reader hardware is used for this. The maximum transport speed is 0.8 m/s. In addition, flexible identification is possible at each location and at any time using the mobile SIMATIC RF350M reader. 36 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 System overview 3.3 System configuration Figure 3-5 Example of container and cardboard container handling SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 37 System overview 3.3 System configuration 38 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.1 Selection criteria for SIMATIC RF300 components Assess your application according to the following criteria, in order to choose the right SIMATIC RF300 components:
Transmission distance (read/write distance) Tracking tolerances Static or dynamic data transfer Data volume to be transferred Speed in case of dynamic transfer Metal-free rooms for transponders and readers Ambient conditions such as relative humidity, temperature, chemical impacts, etc. 4.1.2 Transmission window and read/write distance The reader generates an inductive alternating field. The field is strongest close to the reader;
however, a read/write distance of "zero" between reader and transponder is not recommended. The field strength of the alternating field decreases strongly the further away from the reader. The distribution of the antenna field depends on the structure and geometry of the antennas in the reader and transponder. For the transponder to function correctly, a minimum field strength at the transponder must be achieved at a distance Sg from the reader or the antenna. The figures below show the transmission window between transponder and reader or between transponder and antenna:
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 39 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Sa Sg Lx Ly Operating distance between transponder and reader Limit distance (maximum clear distance between upper surface of the reader and the tran-
sponder, at which the transmission can still just function under normal conditions) Length of a transmission window in the x direction while maintaining the working distance (Lx Ly with RF380R and RF382R) Length of a transmission window in the y direction while maintaining the working distance (Lx Ly with RF380R and RF382R) Field centerpoint Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the transponder Transmission window and read/write distance reader M SP Figure 4-1 40 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Note Transmission window with RF380R and RF382R Note that the transmission window of the reader RF380R is not square (Lx Ly). To obtain as large a transmission window as possible, make sure that the transponder only crosses the reader in the x direction. Sa Sg Operating distance between transponder and reader Limit distance (maximum clear distance between upper surface of the reader and the tran-
sponder, at which the transmission can still just function under normal conditions) Diameter of a transmission window Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the transponder Transmission window and read/write distance round antenna Ld SP Figure 4-2 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 41 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning The transponder can be used as soon as the intersection (SP) of the transponder enters the area of the transmission window. From the diagrams above, it can also be seen that operation is possible within the area between Sa and Sg. The active operating area reduces as the distance increases, and shrinks to a single point at distance Sg. Only static mode should thus be used in the area between Sa and Sg. Aids for calculating the field data Note Determining the operating distance, limit distance and transmission window Remember that you can obtain the values Sa, Sg and L simply and quickly using the tool for field data acquisition. You will find this on the DVD "Ident Systems, Software &
Documentation". 4.1.3 Width of the transmission window Determining the width of the transmission window The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications:
B:
L:
Width of the transmission window Length of the transmission window Tracking tolerances The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the mechanical tracking tolerance. The formula for the dwell time is valid without restriction when B is observed. 42 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.4 Impact of secondary fields Secondary fields in the range from 0 mm to 30% of the limit distance (Sg) generally always exist. They should, however, only be used during configuration in exceptional cases, since the read/write distances are very limited. Exact details of the secondary field geometry cannot be given, since these values depend heavily on the operating distance and the application. When working in dynamic mode, remember that during the transition from the secondary field to the main field the presence of the tag is lost temporarily. It is therefore advisable to select a distance > 30 % of Sg. Main field Figure 4-3 Gap in the field resulting from secondary fields Secondary field SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 43 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Secondary fields without shielding The following graphic shows typical primary and secondary fields, if no shielding measures are taken. Main field Figure 4-4 Secondary field Secondary field without shielding In this arrangement, the reader can also read tags via the secondary field. Shielding is required in order to prevent unwanted reading via the secondary field, as shown and described in the following. 44 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Secondary fields with shielding Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning The following graphic shows typical primary and secondary fields, with metal shielding this time. The metal shielding prevents the reader from detecting tags via the secondary field. Main field Figure 4-5 Secondary field Secondary field with shielding SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 45 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.5 Setup help of the readers of the second generation After turning on the reader (connection to the power supply) and the following startup phase, the reader automatically changes to the "Setup" mode. During this the antenna (reader-
internal or external) is turned on, in contrast to generation 1 in which the antenna is turned on by a RESET. In this status "search for transponders" the reader scans the antenna field for transponders with all air interface protocols (RF300, ISO 15693, ISO 14443). If a transponder is recognized in the antenna field of the reader only the HF protocol of the recognized transponder type is used and there is a change in the status to "Show quality". In this status you obtain direct feedback about the quality of the communication with the transponder via the LED. Depending on the environment (metal, interference) or the field coupling with the transponder (size of the transponder antenna) as well as the individual field geometry (shape of the main and side lobe) of the reader, communication can be very good (permanent light) or good (flickering) at certain locations in the antenna field. These factors give users the option of finding the optimal area in the specific installation situation or in a combination. If no transponder is recognized for a longer period of time, the reader changes back to the
"Search for transponders" status. When a "RESET" command is received, the reader changes back to the normal operation as known from the RF300. Meaning of the LED operating display in the "Setup" mode The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing . Table 4- 1 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the quality of the communication, the LED flickers or is lit perma-
nently. 46 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.6 Permissible directions of motion of the transponder Detection area and direction of motion of the transponder The transponder and reader have no polarization axis, i.e. the transponder can come in from any direction, assume any position as parallel as possible to the reader, and cross the transmission window. The figure below shows the active area for various directions of transponder motion:
Transmission window Direction of motion of the transponder Detection area L x W Figure 4-6 Detection areas of the reader for different directions of transponder motion 4.1.7 Operation in static and dynamic mode Operation in static mode If working in static mode, the transponder can be operated up to the limit distance (Sg). The transponder must then be positioned exactly over the reader:
Figure 4-7 Operation in static mode SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 47 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Operation in dynamic mode When working in dynamic mode, the transponder moves past the reader. The transponder can be used as soon as the intersection (SP) of the transponder enters the circle of the transmission window. In dynamic mode, the operating distance (Sa) is of primary importance.
[Operating distances, see Chapter Field data for transponders, readers and antennas
(Page 51)]
Figure 4-8 Operation in dynamic mode 48 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.8 Dwell time of the transponder The dwell time is the time in which the transponder remains within the transmission window of the reader. The reader can exchange data with the transponder during this time. The dwell time is calculated as follows:
tV:
L:
vTag:
0.8:
Dwell time of the transponder Length of the transmission window Speed of the transponder (tag) in dynamic mode Constant factor used to compensate for temperature influence and production toler-
ances The dwell time can be of any duration in static mode. The dwell time must be sufficiently long to allow communication with the transponder. The dwell time is defined by the system environment in dynamic mode. The volume of data to be transferred must be matched to the dwell time or vice versa. As a general rule:
Dwell time of the data memory in the field of the reader Communication time between transponder and communication module tV::
tK:
or Calculation of the maximum amount of user data tK:
K Communication time between transponder and communication module Constant; the constant is an internal system time. This includes the time for power buildup on the MDS and for command transfer Transmission time for 1 byte Amount of user data in bytes tByte n nmax Maximum amount of user data in bytes in dynamic mode tV Dwell time of the data memory in the field of the reader SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 49 Planning the RF300 system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.9 Communication between communications module, reader and transponder Aids for calculating the data transmission times User-friendly calculation tools are available for the communications modules ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C and RF180C to calculate data transfer times. The calculation tools can be found on the DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation", article number 6GT2080-
2AA20. Figure 4-9 User interface of the calculation tool for command processing time 50 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Aids for calculating the field data You will also find a tool for calculating field data on the DVD "Ident Systems, Software &
Documentation". Using this tool, among other things you can calculate the operating distance (Sa), limit distance (Sg) and transmission window (L). Figure 4-10 User interface of the calculation tool for field data acquisition 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas The following tables show the field data for all SIMATIC RF300 components of transponders and readers. This makes the correct selection of a transponder and reader particularly easy. All the technical specifications listed are typical data and are applicable for an ambient temperature between 0 C and +50 C, a supply voltage between 22 and 27 VDC and a metal-free environment. Tolerances of 20 % are permitted due to production or temperature conditions. If the entire voltage range at the reader of 20 VDC to 30 VDC and/or the entire temperature range of transponders and readers is used, the field data is subject to further tolerances. Note Transmission gaps If the minimum operating distance (Sa) is not observed, a transmission gap can occur in the center of the field. Communication with the transponder is not possible in the transmission gap, see section "Impact of secondary fields (Page 43)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 51 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Note Possible reader-transponder combinations The tables of the following section show the possible reader-transponder combinations. 4.2.1 Field data of RF300 transponders The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. Table 4- 2 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T All values are in mm The values relate to the RF310R reader as of version "D". 30 30 40 45 45 70 1...23 2...18 2...36 2...47 2...60 2...45 26 21 41 53 68 60 52 Table 4- 3 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm 45 40 80 80 90 85 90 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1...20 2...18 2...50 2...60 2...65 5...60 5...80 25 23 58 75 85 80 100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 4 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm 45 40 80 80 90 85 90 1...30 1...25 2...55 2...65 2...75 5...65 5...90 37 30 70 85 100 85 110 Table 4- 5 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 3 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T All values are in mm 25 25 40 1...15 1...10 2...25 18 15 30 Table 4- 6 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) RF320T RF330T RF340T All values are in mm 10 10 20 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...10 0...11 0...18 13 13 22 Table 4- 7 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T All values are in mm 15 22 35 35 80 0...15 0...15 0...25 0...35 2...32 20 18 30 40 38 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 53 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 8 Field data RF380R reader Length of the transmission window in the x direction (Lx) in the y direction (Ly) 100 120 120 140 160 160 180 RF320T RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T All values are in mm 40 30 50 60 70 65 75 Limit distance (Sg) 60 52 105 125 150 135 160 Operating distance
(Sa) 2...45 5...45 2...80 2...100 2...120 5...100 5...125 RF380R reader: Setting the transmit power The RF380R reader (6GT2801-3AB10) allows the transmission output power to be set with the aid of the "distance_limiting" input parameter (you will find more detailed information in the document "Input parameters for the RF300 system for programming via communications modules"). For this, values from 0.5 W to 2.0 W can be set in 0.25 W increments. When doing this, remember that the change to the transmit power will affect the detection in the limit range (upper/ lower operating distance), as well as the minimum distance that is to be maintained between adjacent RF380Rs. A higher working version is not to be expected. Table 4- 9 Adjustable transmit power of the RF380R reader with the aid of the "distance_limiting"
parameter Value 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Transmit power 0.5 W 0.75 W 1.0 W 1.25 W (default) 1.5 W 1.75 W 2.0 W 54 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Note Setting outside the range Settings outside the specified range (02 ... 08) have the effect that the default value (1.25 W) is set. In this case for reasons of compatibility there is no error message. This setting is not necessary with the RF380R readers of the 2nd generation (6GT2801-
3BAx0) because the power limits are optimized automatically depending on the reader-
transponder distance. For reasons of compatibility this setting can nevertheless be made. Note that the values "02", "03" and "04" bring about a reduction of the power of approximately 50%. You will find more information on this subject in the chapter "Minimum clearances (Page 64)"
section "Minimum distance from reader to reader". See also Product Information "Input parameters for the RF300 system for programming via communications modules" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15033/man) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 55 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 4.2.2 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. Observe the following information for field data of ISO transponders:
A maximum median deviation of 2 mm is permitted in static mode (without affecting the field data). In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. Table 4- 10 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 40 30 90 105 30 130 120 80 30 85 90 55 35 30 90 30 30 35 30 90 30 2...93 2...64 2...65 5...96 2...39 2...90 2...80 2...74 2...47 5...74 2...104 2...35 1...68 1...22 5...75 1...40 1...32 1...70 1...22 5...80 1...43 105 72 73 109 44 102 90 83 63 84 115 40 75 25 90 45 38 78 25 90 48 56 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 11 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 1) When operating the reader of the second generation and an ambient temperature > 50 C, the 5...110 2...60 2...85 5...80 2...35 15...120 10...100 1) 15...60 2) 2...55 5...75 2...100 5...40 2...55 2...20 0...80 2...40 2...25 2...55 2...20 0...80 2...40 90 60 80 90 50 130 125 95 50 100 140 65 50 45 110 45 45 50 45 110 45 140 75 110 110 60 140 115 70 70 85 130 48 70 30 100 50 40 70 30 100 50 operating distance (Sa) is 15 ... 80 mm. 2) When operating the reader of the second generation the operating distance (Sa) is 40 ... 100 mm and the limit distance .(Sg) is 150 mm. All values are in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 57 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 12 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 80 55 150 75 50 140 130 100 50 110 140 85 50 40 110 40 40 50 40 110 40 5...110 2...65 2...90 5...85 2...35 5...100 5...95 5...80 2...66 5...90 2...110 10...40 2...75 2...25 2...85 2...40 2...32 2...65 2...25 2...85 2...35 140 85 120 115 60 120 115 95 78 105 135 50 88 35 95 50 38 85 35 105 50 Table 4- 13 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 3 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D124 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D428 MDS D460 All values are in mm 40 40 40 20 30 40 25 30 30 1...35 1...28 1...22 1...11 5...20 1...40 2...18 2...28 1...20 42 35 32 18 30 48 22 30 28 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 58 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 14 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 12 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D117 MDS D127 MDS D160 MDS D421 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D528 All values are in mm 2 2 15 6 15 8 6 15 0...2 0...3 0...8 0...3 1...10 1...8 0...3 1...10 3 4 12 5 17 10 5 17 Table 4- 15 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D127 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D528 All values are in mm 3 27 3 20 25 10 20 25 17 17 15 10 20 25 17 17 0...5 2...24 0...5 1...18 1...22 0...6 1...10 1...27 1...10 1...15 1...12 0...6 1...10 1...27 1...10 1...15 6 28 6 20 28 8 13 35 14 20 16 8 13 35 14 20 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 59 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 16 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D522 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 30 70 25 30 30 45 28 25 65 25 22 30 28 25 65 25 1...35 0...42 1...24 1...35 0...14 5...22 0...45 1...15 0...45 1...25 1...18 0...15 0...45 1...15 0...45 1...25 40 50 28 40 16 28 50 20 48 28 20 19 50 20 48 28 Table 4- 17 Field data RF380R reader Length of the transmission window in the x direction (Lx) in the y direction (Ly) Operating distance
(Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D1001) MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 1) MDS D2002) MDS D2613) MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 140 80 180 140 80 200 200 190 100 290 240 110 100 80 100 80 140 90 40 140 160 120 60 140 120 60 70 45 10...170 1...120 2...145 5...160 2...64 10...170 20...150 20..120 2...96 5...160 10...200 5...75 2...120 2...35 210 140 190 200 80 200 195 160 120 180 240 90 140 50 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 60 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Length of the transmission window in the x direction (Lx) in the y direction (Ly) Operating distance Limit distance (Sg) 220 80 80 100 80 220 80 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D524 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 All values are in mm 1) Keep in mind that the minimum distance must be increased by 10 mm with ambient temperatures 160 50 70 70 45 160 50 195 95 90 140 50 195 95
(Sa) 0...155 270 265 2...120 2...35 0...155 270 of 40 C and higher. 2) Keep in mind that the minimum distance of the reader to the transponder must be increased by 7 mm (1st generation) or 6 mm (2nd generation) for every 5 C rise in temperature with ambient temperatures of 25 C and higher. The minimum distance must be increased by 15 mm with ambi-
ent temperatures of 50 C and higher (1st and 2nd generation). 3) Keep in mind that the minimum distance of the reader to the transponder must be increased by 5 mm (1st generation) or 3 mm (2nd generation) for every 5 C rise in temperature with ambient temperatures of 25 C and higher. The minimum distance must be increased by 9 mm (1st genera-
tion) or 14 mm (2nd generation) with ambient temperatures of 50 C and higher. Table 4- 18 Field data RF382R reader Length of the transmission window in the y direction in the x direction (Lx) Operating distance
(Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 40...65 35...50 40...65 40...65 30...50 75 65 75 75 60
(Ly) 130 100 120 120 80 MDS D124 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D460 All values are in mm 70 50 60 65 40 4.2.3 Field data of ISO transponders (MDS E) The limit distances (Sg) and operating distances (Sa) along with the length of the transmission window for each reader-transponder combination are listed in the tables below. Observe the following information for field data of ISO transponders:
A maximum median deviation of 2 mm is possible in static mode (without affecting the field data). In dynamic mode, make sure that rectangular transponders cross the antenna field in the longitudinal direction. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 61 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 62 Note Relenace of the MDS E transponders The MDS E transponders are products that will be discontinued. These are relevant for migration projects in which existing RFID systems are replaced by SIMATIC RF300, generation 2. Note that the MDS E transponders can only be operated in conjunction with the readers of the second generation!
Table 4- 19 Field data RF310R reader Length of the transmission window (L) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 80 80 45 Table 4- 20 Field data RF340R reader Length of the transmission window (L) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 90 90 60 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 2...30 2...40 2...25 43 60 36 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 5...50 10...50 2...35 65 65 45 Table 4- 21 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 1 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 70 100 55 10...50 10...50 2...35 60 65 45 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas Table 4- 22 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 12 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E623 All values are in mm 6 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...3 5 Table 4- 23 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 18 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E623 MDS E624 All values are in mm 10 25 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 0...6 2...15 8 20 Table 4- 24 Field data RF350R reader / ANT 30 Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld) MDS E624 All values are in mm 28 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1...20 24 Table 4- 25 Field data RF380R reader Length of the transmission window (Lx/y) MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 All values are in mm 100/70 110/100 90/50 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 10...80 10...115 5...50 95 135 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 63 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 4.2.4 Minimum clearances Minimum distance from transponder to transponder The specified distances refer to a metal-free environment. For a metallic environment, the specified minimum distances must be multiplied by a factor of 1.5. The transponders designed specifically for installation in/on metal are an exception to this. Table 4- 26 Minimum distances RF300 transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R /
RF350R /
ANT 3 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R 120 RF320T 120 RF330T 140 RF340T 150 RF350T 120 RF360T 130 RF370T RF380T 150 All values are in mm, relative to the operating distance (Sa) between reader and transponder, and between transponder 40 30 40 50 50
--
--
20 20 40
--
--
--
--
70 50 80 80 80 80 80 50 40 60 60 60
--
--
40 60 60 70
--
--
--
ANT 1 70 50 80 80 80 80 80 edge and transponder edge Table 4- 27 Minimum distances ISO transponder RF310R RF340R RF350R /
MDS D100 MDS D117 MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D423 64 120
--
100 120
--
200 120 120 120 160 120 200 220
--
--
240
--
180 140
--
200 150 140 150 200 180 140 240
--
--
ANT 1 240
--
180 140
--
200 150 140 150 200 180 140 240
--
--
100 120 120 RF350R /
ANT 3 RF350R /
ANT 12 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R RF382R 1)
--
--
90
--
--
--
60
--
--
--
85
--
--
--
60 60
--
20
--
--
25
--
30
--
--
--
--
--
--
15
--
--
--
30 50
--
30
--
50
--
--
--
50
--
--
15 30 40
--
--
80 100
--
80 60
--
--
--
80
--
--
--
40 60 420
--
360 400
--
450 300 500 500 400 360 450 500
--
--
250
--
--
100, 150
--
--
--
100, 120
--
--
--
100, 150
--
--
--
--
--
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 100, 180
--
--
--
100, 120
--
--
100, 180
--
--
--
--
RF310R RF340R RF350R /
ANT 1 180 RF350R /
ANT 3 80 MDS D424 100 180 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D524 70 120 100 100
--
--
100 100 120 150 150
--
--
180 100 140 150 150
--
--
180 60
--
60 60
--
--
--
Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas RF350R /
ANT 12 RF350R /
ANT 18 RF350R /
ANT 30 RF380R RF382R 1)
--
--
--
30 30 15
--
--
50
--
30 50 50 15 30 50 80 60 60 60 60
--
40 80 360 250 400 300 300
--
--
360
--
30 50
--
--
--
30
--
60
--
--
--
70 120 100 120 100 140 150 240 100 120 150 240 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 MDS E600 2) MDS E611 2) MDS E623 2) MDS E624 2) 1) The first value is the minimum distance of the transponders in the horizontal field, the second value is the minimum 250 400 300 420 60 60 60
--
240 120 240 180 100 15 15 50 80 80 500 180 360
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
distance of the transponders in the vertical field. 2) Product being discontinued; only relevant for migration projects with the readers of the second generation. All values are in mm, relative to the operating distance (Sa) between reader and transponder, and between transponder edge and transponder edge Minimum distance from reader to reader Table 4- 28 Minimum distances reader RF380R to RF380R2) RF310R to RF310R 150 200 RF340R to RF340R1) 200 / 350 250 / 500 with 2 readers with several readers All values are in mm 1) The value on the left refers to the first generation; the value on the right refers to the second generation of the RF340R. 400 500 RF382R to RF382R 200 200 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 65 Planning the RF300 system 4.2 Field data for transponders, readers and antennas 2) The permissible minimum distance between two RF380Rs depends on the transmit power that is set. The specified minimum distance must be multiplied by the following factor, depending on the output:
Table 4- 29 Effect on the minimum distance of the transmit power with RF380R
"distance_limiting"
value
(hexadecimal) 02; 03 04; 05; 06 07; 08 Transmit power Factor 0.5 - 0.75 W 1.0 - 1.5 W 1.75 - 2.0 W 0.8 1.0 1.2 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna Table 4- 30 Minimum distances antennas ANT 1 300 ANT 3 150 ANT 3S 20 ANT 8 50 ANT 12 70 ANT 18 100 ANT 30 100 All values are in mm You will find detailed information on the minimum distances between antennas the section
"Minimum distance between antennas (Page 228)". Note Effect on inductive fields by not maintaining the minimum distances of the readers If the values fall below the values specified in the "Minimum distance readers" and "Minimum distances antennas" tables , there is a risk of the function being affected by inductive fields. In this case, the data transfer time would increase unpredictably or a command would be aborted with an error. Keeping to the values specified in the "Minimum distance readers" and "Minimum distances antennas" tables is therefore essential. If the specified minimum distance cannot be complied with due to the physical configuration, the SET-ANT command can be used to activate and deactivate the RF field of the reader. The application software must be used to ensure that only one reader is active (antenna is switched on) at a time. Note Please also observe the graphic representations of the minimum distances in the respective chapters on readers. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 66 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.1 Overview The transponder and reader complete with their antennas are inductive devices. Any type of metal in the vicinity of these devices affects their functionality. Some points need to be considered during planning and installation if the values described in the "Field data
(Page 51)" section are to retain their validity:
Minimum spacing between two readers or their antennas Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories Metal-free area for flush-mounting of readers or their antennas and transponders in metal Mounting of multiple readers or their antennas on metal frames or racks The following sections describe the impact on the operation of the RFID system when mounted in the vicinity of metal. 4.3.2 Reduction of interference due to metal Table 4- 31 Interference due to metal rack Representation Description Problem:
A metal rack is located above the transmission window of the reader. This affects the entire field. In par-
ticular, the transmission window between reader and transponder is reduced. Remedy:
The transmission window is no longer affected if the transponder is mounted differently. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 67 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Table 4- 32 Flush-mounting of transponders and readers Representation Description Problem:
Flush-mounting of transponders and readers is possible in principle. However, the size of the transmis-
sion window is significantly reduced. The following measures can be used to counteract the reduction of the window:
Remedy:
Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer below the transponder and/or reader. The transponder and/or reader are 10 to 20 mm higher than the metal surround.
(The value x 100 mm is valid, e.g. for RF310R. It indicates that, for a distance x 100 mm, the reader can no longer be significantly affect-
ed by metal.) Remedy:
Increase the distances a, b to metal. The following rule of thumb can be used:
Increase a, b by a factor of 2 to 3 over the values specified for metal-free areas Increasing a, b has a greater effect for readers or transpond-
ers with a large limit distance than for readers or transponders with a small limit distance. Mounting of several readers on metal frames or racks Any reader mounted on metal couples part of the field to the metal frame. There is normally no interaction as long as the minimum distance D and metal-free areas a, b are maintained. However, interaction may take place if an iron frame is positioned unfavorably. Longer data transfer times or sporadic error messages at the communication module are the result. 68 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Note that antenna cables should not be coiled (cable coil = antenna) and should not be mounted directly on metal when coiled to avoid coupling. Antenna cables should be laid separately in a cable channel and not together with the signal/power supply cable of devices
(including those of the reader) or other power cables. NOTICE Installation of the readers on a metal construction and mixed mode Note that if the readers are installed on a metal construction and in mixed mode 1) the minimum spacing needs to be doubled. This also applies if you are working with external antennas. Moreover the non-metal base on which the reader is mounted should be at least 40 mm thick. 1) RF300 operation along with ISO 15693 operation or ISO 15693 operation with MOBY E operation etc. Table 4- 33 Mounting of several readers on metal frames or racks Representation Description Problem:
Interaction between readers Remedy:
Increase the distance D between the two readers. Remedy:
Introduce one or more iron struts in order to short-
circuit the stray fields. Remedy:
Insert a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 millimeter thickness between the reader and the iron frame. This will significantly reduce the induction of stray fields on the rack:
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 69 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.3 Effects of metal on different transponders and readers Mounting different transponders and readers on metal or flush-mounting Certain conditions have to be observed when mounting the transponders and readers on metal or flush-mounting. For more information, please refer to the descriptions of the individual transponders and readers in the relevant section. 4.3.4 Impact on the transmission window by metal In general, the following points should be considered when mounting RFID components:
Direct mounting on metal is allowed only in the case of specially approved transponders. Flush-mounting of the components in metal reduces the field data; a test is recommended in critical applications. When working inside the transmission window, make sure that no metal rail (or similar part) intersects the transmission field. The metal rail would affect the field data. With readers with a large antenna surface (e.g. RF340R) for reasons of communication reliability, when the transponders are flush-mounted in metal, a metal-free space around the transponders is recommended. This metal-free space should match the size of the antenna surface. The reduction of field data is also based on the minimum distance between the reader and transponder. The respective recommendations are listed in the following table. The impact of metal on the field data (Sg, Sa, L) is shown in a table in this section. The values in the tables describe field data reduction and show the reduced range as a percentage. The range relates to use in a non-metallic environment. A value of 100% means no influence on the range. Note Possible reader-transponder combinations The tables of the following section show the possible reader-transponder combinations. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 70 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.4.1 Impact on the transmission window by metal With RF300 transponders Table 4- 34 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance 2) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) 100 100 80 100 100 85 30 100 80 70 100 70 60 100 100 60 100 95 70 95 80 70 95 85 80 30 95 80 70 95 65 60 95 95 60 95 90 65 80 70 60 80 75 70 25 80 80 70 85 65 60 85 75 60 80 75 65 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 71 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 35 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 4) MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 3) MDS D339 Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 4) MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm 100 75 55 100 90 80 100 85 80 100 100 100 100 75 100 90 100 80 60 100 90 100 80 80 100 100 100 100 65 95 70 55 95 95 75 90 80 75 90 90 90 90 75 90 80 90 70 60 80 75 95 80 75 90 90 90 80 60 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 80 65 50 80 85 60 85 75 70 80 80 80 80 75 85 75 80 65 60 85 80 75 75 70 80 80 80 75 55 72 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 2) MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 2) MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 2) MDS D525 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D528 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm 55 100 1505) 70 100 80 60 100 90 100 85 80 100 100 100 80 100 80 60 100 90 100 85 80 100 100 50 95 1405) 60 90 80 60 100 85 90 80 75 100 100 100 80 90 80 60 100 85 90 80 75 100 100 45 90 1405) 60 80 70 50 95 80 80 70 65 75 75 80 60 80 70 50 95 80 80 70 65 75 75 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm 5) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 73 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines With ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 36 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF310R Transponder RF310R reader On metal Without metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS E6111) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS E6241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) 100 75 55 100 75 55 100 90 80 95 70 55 95 70 55 95 95 75 80 65 50 80 65 50 80 85 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 74 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 4.3.4.2 RF340R With RF300 transponders Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Table 4- 37 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal RF320T RF330T1) RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 40 mm 4) 100 85 75 100 90 65 100 65 60 100 75 55 100 75 70 100 95 70 100 100 80 95 85 75 95 90 65 95 65 60 90 70 55 95 70 60 95 90 65 95 95 75 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 90 80 65 90 80 60 80 55 55 85 70 45 80 65 50 80 75 65 75 70 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 75 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 38 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 4) MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal, distance 25 mm 4) MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS D261 Without metal On metal, distance 25 mm 3) MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 2) MDS D339 Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 4) MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm 100 70 60 100 85 80 100 80 75 100 100 100 100 85 100 90 100 90 75 100 70 100 90 80 100 100 100 100 70 90 65 45 95 85 80 90 80 75 95 90 90 95 85 95 80 95 85 50 100 95 95 85 80 95 90 90 90 65 75 60 45 80 75 45 85 70 65 80 75 75 80 75 85 75 90 80 65 100 90 80 75 60 80 75 75 80 80 76 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 2) MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 3) MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 3) MDS D525 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D528 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm 55 100 1205) 65 100 85 75 100 100 100 80 75 100 95 100 85 100 85 75 100 100 100 80 75 100 95 50 95 1205) 60 50 85 1155) 60 95 85 75 95 90 90 75 70 95 80 95 85 95 85 75 95 90 90 75 70 95 80 80 75 70 95 90 80 70 65 80 75 95 85 80 75 70 95 90 80 70 65 80 75 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm 5) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 77 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines With ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 39 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF340R Transponder RF340R reader Without metal On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS E6111) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS E6241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) 100 70 60 100 70 60 100 85 80 90 65 45 90 65 45 95 85 80 75 60 45 75 60 45 80 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm 78 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 4.3.4.3 RF350R Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 40 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 40 mm ANT 1 without metal ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) 100 85 75 100 95 65 100 65 60 100 75 55 100 75 65 100 95 70 100 100 80 90 85 75 90 85 60 90 65 60 90 70 55 90 75 60 90 88 65 90 90 75 90 75 65 90 75 60 90 60 55 85 65 45 85 65 50 85 75 65 80 70 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Note The minimum distances are listed in section "RF340R (Page 75)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 79 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 41 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder ANT 1 without metal MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D165 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D261 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D3391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 70 60 100 85 85 100 85 80 100 95 95 100 85 100 90 100 85 75 100 85 100 90 80 100 95 95 100 80 65 ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) 85 60 45 95 85 80 85 75 70 90 85 85 95 85 85 80 85 75 65 90 80 85 80 75 90 85 85 90 70 60 80 65 45 85 80 50 85 75 70 85 85 85 90 80 85 75 80 75 65 85 80 85 80 65 85 85 85 85 65 60 80 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Transponder ANT 1 without metal Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D423 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D5241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D5261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm 100 1152) 80 90 1152) 65 90 1152) 65 100 85 75 100 90 100 85 80 100 85 100 85 100 85 75 100 90 100 85 80 100 85 90 80 70 95 85 90 80 75 90 80 90 80 90 80 70 95 85 90 80 75 90 80 75 75 70 95 85 85 75 70 85 80 80 75 75 75 70 95 85 85 75 70 85 80 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Note The minimum distances are listed in section "RF340R (Page 75)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 81 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 1 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 42 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 1 Transponder ANT 1 without metal ANT 1 on metal ANT 1 mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS E6001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6111) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS E6241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 70 60 100 70 60 100 85 85 85 60 45 85 60 45 95 85 80 80 65 45 80 65 45 85 80 50 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Note The minimum distances are listed in section "RF340R (Page 75)". Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 43 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) RF320T1) RF330T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm 2) 100 35 35 100 117 128 90 35 25 100 106 128 90 35 15 100 106 128 82 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) RF340T RF350T Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) 100 70 63 100 70 63 75 75 63 75 75 63 70 63 58 75 75 58 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 44 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 10 mm MDS D3241) Without metal MDS D421 MDS D521 MDS D422 MDS D522 On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 0 mm Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 33 24 100 16 24 100 47 29 100 110 90 100 111 83 100 24 24 100 16 18 100 34 24 100 110 50 100 111 56 90 21 17 95 21 13 92 29 18 100 110 50 83 111 39 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 83 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS D423 Without metal MDS D4241) MDS D524 MDS D425 MDS D525 MDS D428 MDS D528 On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 20 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 20 mm 100 125 125 100 23 17 100 89 71 100 93 93 100 33 33 100 125 143 100 23 13 100 100 54 93 93 93 93 33 33 93 121 136 94 21 10 100 71 36 83 83 83 90 20 17 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. 84 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 3 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 45 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 3 Transponder ANT 3 without metal ANT 3 on metal ANT 3 flush-
mounted in metal
(40 mm all-
round) MDS E6241) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 23 17 100 23 13 94 21 10 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 12 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 46 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 12 Transponder ANT 12 without metal MDS D117 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D127 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D421 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal; distance 10 mm MDS D521 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 100 90 65 100 95 65 100 100 100 90 70 100 95 100 100 100 90 70 ANT 12 mounted in met-
(0 mm all-round) al 85 85 65 85 85 65 80 80 80 75 60 75 75 80 80 80 75 60 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 85 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 12 without metal ANT 12 mounted in met-
al
(0 mm all-round) MDS D528 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm 100 95 75 75 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. Reader RF350R with ANT 12 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 47 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 12 Transponder ANT 12 without metal ANT 12 mounted in met-
al
(0 mm all-round) MDS E623 Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm 100 90 70 80 75 60 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 86 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 48 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder RF320T1) RF330T RF340T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm ANT 18 without metal 100 85 75 100 1202) 1152) 95 100 65 60 ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al 65 55 45 85 100 95 90 85 60 55 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 49 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder ANT 18 without metal MDS D1241) Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm MDS D127 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm 100 85 85 100 95 60 100 85 100 90 ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al 85 75 45 90 85 60 80 75 80 75 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 87 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 18 without metal Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D421 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D422 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm MDS D521 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D522 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D5241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D528 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm 80 100 90 40 100 95 90 100 85 75 100 100 100 95 100 95 100 90 40 100 95 90 100 85 75 100 100 100 95 ANT 18 mounted in met-
(10 mm all-round) al 65 85 65 20 85 85 80 85 80 75 85 85 95 95 95 95 85 65 20 85 85 80 85 80 75 85 85 95 95 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 88 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 18 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 50 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 18 Transponder ANT 18 without metal ANT 18 mounted in met-
al
(10 mm all-round) MDS E623 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS E6241) Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm 100 90 40 100 85 85 85 65 20 85 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 89 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with RF300 transponders Table 4- 51 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder Mounting the antenna ANT 30 without metal RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal;
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
without surrounding clearance Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal Directly on metal Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 100 85 75 100 1102) 1052) 90 100 65 60 100 75 55 100 75 50 ANT 30 mounted in met-
(20 mm all-round) al 90 75 65 90 100 95 80 85 55 55 85 65 45 75 55 35 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. 90 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 52 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder ANT 30 without metal MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D1601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D422 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D423 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D4241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D425 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D428 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D4601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm MDS D522 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm 100 85 80 100 90 85 100 85 100 90 80 100 95 90 100 1252) 80 100 95 85 100 95 100 90 80 100 95 100 95 100 95 ANT 30 mounted in met-
(20 mm all-round) al 85 75 45 85 75 70 80 75 80 70 65 85 85 80 80 1152) 70 85 85 75 80 80 85 75 70 90 90 90 85 85 85 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 91 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Transponder ANT 30 without metal Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 0 mm MDS D5241) Without metal On metal 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm MDS D525 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm MDS D5261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm MDS D528 Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm 90 100 95 85 100 95 100 90 80 100 95 ANT 30 mounted in met-
(20 mm all-round) al 80 85 85 75 80 80 85 75 70 90 90 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
lic surroundings. Reader RF350R with ANT 30 and with ISO transponders (MDS E) Table 4- 53 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF350R with ANT 30 Transponder ANT 30 without metal ANT 30 mounted in met-
al
(20 mm all-round) MDS E6241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 15 mm 100 85 80 85 75 45 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 92 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 4.3.4.4 RF380R With RF300 transponders Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Table 4- 54 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF380R Transponder Reader RF380R (RF300 mode) Without metal On metal RF320T1) RF330T RF340T RF350T RF360T1) RF370T RF380T Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 5) Without metal on metal, distance 0 mm 4) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) Without metal On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 40 mm 4) 6) 100 85 60 100 70 100 70 60 100 70 55 100 75 60 100 90 65 100 95 65 95 75 55 90 65 90 65 60 85 65 50 95 70 55 95 85 60 95 90 60 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 90 70 50 80 60 80 60 55 80 60 45 85 65 50 85 80 60 85 80 55 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm 5) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 20 mm 6) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 25 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 93 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 55 Reduction of field data due to metal, range as %: Transponder and RF380R Transponder MDS D1001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) MDS D1241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 2) MDS D1261) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) MDS D1391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 4) MDS D1601) Without metal on metal, distance 10 mm 2) MDS D165 Without metal On metal, distance 25 mm 4) MDS D2001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 3) MDS D261 Without metal On metal, distance 25 mm 4) MDS D3241) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 2) MDS D3391) Without metal On metal; distance 30 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 100 mm 5) MDS D4001) Without metal On metal; distance 20 mm Reader RF380R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal 100 65 55 100 95 70 100 80 75 100 95 90 100 85 100 80 100 80 65 100 85 100 85 70 100 85 80 100 75 95 60 50 95 90 65 90 75 65 90 85 80 95 85 90 75 90 75 60 95 80 95 85 65 90 80 75 90 70 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 80 55 45 90 85 50 80 70 65 75 70 70 90 80 80 70 80 70 55 85 75 85 80 60 80 75 70 80 60 94 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Transponder Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 20 mm 4) MDS D423 Without metal MDS D4241) MDS D5241) MDS D425 MDS D525 MDS D4261) MDS D5261) On metal; distance 0 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 10 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 25 mm 3) Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm 2) Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all round 50 mm 3) Without metal On metal, distance 0 mm 2) MDS D428 MDS D528 MDS D4601) Without metal On metal, distance 10 mm 2) MDS E600 Without metal On metal, distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 20 mm MDS E611 Without metal On metal, distance 20 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 20 mm MDS E624 Without metal On metal, distance 15 mm Flush-mounted in metal; dis-
tance all round 25 mm Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines Reader RF380R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal 60 100 100 75 100 75 60 100 75 100 80 75 100 85 100 80 100 80 65 100 65 50 100 75 60 60 95 100 65 90 75 55 70 70 90 75 65 90 80 95 75 95 75 65 95 60 50 95 75 60 Flush-mounted in metal
(20 mm all-
round) 55 85 90 60 75 60 40 90 60 80 70 65 80 65 80 60 90 60 60 85 55 45 90 70 55 1) Mounting the transponder on or in metal is only possible with the appropriate spacer or if there is adequate clearance to the metal. 2) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 5 mm 3) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 10 mm 4) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 15 mm 5) Transponder flush-mounted in metal; minimum distance to the reader is 20 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 95 Planning the RF300 system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.4.5 RF382R Note RF382R not suitable for metallic surroundings The RF382R was not developed for reading transponders in a metallic environment. With ISO transponders (MDS D) Table 4- 56 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): Transponder and RF382R Transponder Reader RF382R (ISO mode) Without metal On metal MDS D124 Without metal MDS D160 Without metal MDS D324 Without metal MDS D424 Without metal MDS D460 Without metal 1) Values of > 100 % can occur if transponders were developed specifically for mounting in/on metal-
1101) 100 1101) 1051) 1151) 100 100 100 100 100 lic surroundings. 96 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 4.4 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders 4.4.1 Readers 4.4.1.1 Overview of the readers and their housing materials Resistance to chemicals depends on the housing materials used to manufacture the reader. The following table provides you with an overview of the housing materials that are used with the RF310R, RF340R, RF350R, RF380R and RF382R readers:
Individual part of the reader Top cover and bottom Fiber-optic cable Decorative membrane 1) Socket 1) Housing material of the reader Polyamide 12;
The chemical resistance of this plastic is listed in section
"Polyamide 12 (Page 97)". Makrolon2405 Autotex V200 Brass (copper alloy) CuZn40Pb2 1) Non-relevant component for resistance of complete housing Note In case of questions please contact Siemens Support (section "Service & Support
(Page 451)"). 4.4.1.2 Polyamide 12 The resistance of the plastic housing to chemicals used in the automobile sector (e.g.: oils, greases, diesel fuel, gasoline, etc,) is not listed extra. Table 4- 57 Chemical resistance - Polyamide 12 Substance Battery acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, w. Benzene Bleach solution (12.5% effective chlo-
rine) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
30%
-
conc. 10%
-
-
-
20 60 60 60 20 60 20
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 97 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Substance Butane, gas, liquid Butyl acetate (acetic acid butyl ester) n(n) Calcium chloride, w. Calcium nitrate, w. Chlorine Chrome baths, tech. Iron salts, w. Acetic acid, w. Ethyl alcohol, w., undenaturated Formaldehyde, w. Formalin Glycerine Isopropyl alcohol Potassium hydroxide, w. Lysol Magnesium salts, w. Methyl alcohol, w. Lactic acid, w. Sodium carbonate, w. (soda) Sodium chloride, w. Sodium hydroxide Nickel salts, w. Nitrobenzene Phosphoric acid Propane Mercury Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Sulfur dioxide Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
c. s. c. s.
-
-
c. s. 50%
95%
95%
50%
30%
10%
10%
-
-
-
-
50%
-
c. s. 50%
50%
10%
10%
c. s. c. s.
-
c. s.
-
-
10%
-
-
10%
10%
low 60 60 20 60 20 60 20 60 20 20 60 20 20 60 60 20 20 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 60 60 20 20 60 60 60 60 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 20 60
++++
++++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
+++
+++
++++
++++
+++
++++
++
++++
++++
++
+++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++
+
++++
++++
+
+
++++
98 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Substance Sulfuric acid Hydrogen sulfide Carbon tetrachloride Toluene Detergent Plasticizer Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
25%
10%
low
-
-
-
high
-
20 20 60 60 20 60 60 60
++
+++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++++
++++
Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
w. c. s. Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant Water solution Cold saturated 4.4.2 Transponder 4.4.2.1 Overview of the transponders and their housing materials The following sections describe the resistance to chemicals of the various transponders. Resistance to chemicals depends on the housing materials used to manufacture the transponders. The following table provides an overview of the housing materials of the transponders:
Table 4- 58 Overview of the housing materials of the transponders Housing material Polyamide 12 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Transponder RF340T RF350T RF370T RF380T MDS D117 MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC10) MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D339 MDS D423 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 99 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Housing material Polycarbonate (PC) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Epoxy resin PA6 PA6.6 GF30 Transponder MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD10) MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD00-0AX0) MDS D200 MDS D400 RF320T RF360T MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC00) MDS D324 MDS D421 MDS D424 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D524 MDS E610 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 MDS D127 MDS D126 MDS D422 MDS D425 MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D522 MDS D525 MDS D526 MDS D528 Note Chemical substances not listed The following sections describe the resistance of the various transponders to specific substances. If you require information about chemical substances that are not listed, contact Customer Support. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 100 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders 4.4.2.2 Polyamide 6 and Polyamide 6.6 GF30 Table 4- 59 Chemical resistance - PA6 and PA6.6 GF30 Substance Mineral lubricants Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Gasoline Weak mineral acids Strong mineral acids Weak organic acids Strong organic acids Oxidizing acids Weak alkaline solutions Strong alkaline solutions Trichloroethylene Perchloroethylene Acetone Alcohols Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
++++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 101 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders 4.4.2.3 Polyamide 12 The resistance of the plastic housing to chemicals used in the automobile sector (e.g.: oils, greases, diesel fuel, gasoline, etc,) is not listed extra. Table 4- 60 Chemical resistance - Polyamide 12 Substance Battery acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, w. Benzene Bleach solution (12.5% effective chlo-
rine) Butane, gas, liquid Butyl acetate (acetic acid butyl ester) n(n) Calcium chloride, w. Calcium nitrate, w. Chlorine Chrome baths, tech. Iron salts, w. Acetic acid, w. Ethyl alcohol, w., undenaturated Formaldehyde, w. Formalin Glycerine Isopropyl alcohol Potassium hydroxide, w. Lysol Magnesium salts, w. Methyl alcohol, w. Lactic acid, w. Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
30%
-
conc. 10%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
c. s. c. s.
-
-
c. s. 50%
95%
95%
50%
30%
10%
10%
-
-
-
-
50%
-
c. s. 50%
50%
10%
20 60 60 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 60 20 60 20 60 20 20 60 20 20 60 60 20 20 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 60 60 20 20
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
++++
+++
++++
+++
++++
+++
+++
++++
++++
+++
++++
++
++++
++++
++
+++
102 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Substance Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
10%
c. s. c. s.
-
c. s.
-
-
10%
-
-
10%
10%
low 25%
10%
low
-
-
-
high
-
60 60 60 60 60 20 60 20 60 60 20 20 60 20 20 60 60 20 60 60 60
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++
+
++++
++++
+
+
++++
++
+++
++++
++++
++++
+++
++++
++++
Sodium carbonate, w. (soda) Sodium chloride, w. Sodium hydroxide Nickel salts, w. Nitrobenzene Phosphoric acid Propane Mercury Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Sulfur dioxide Sulfuric acid Hydrogen sulfide Carbon tetrachloride Toluene Detergent Plasticizer Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
w. c. s. Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant Water solution Cold saturated SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 103 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders 4.4.2.4 Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) The data memory has special chemical resistance to solutions up to a temperature of 200 C. A reduction in the mechanical properties has been observed in aqueous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80 C. The plastic housings are resistant to all types of fuel including methanol. Table 4- 61 Chemical resistance - polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Substance Acetone n-Butanol (butyl alcohol) Butanone-2 (methyl ethyl ketone) n-Butyl acetate Brake fluid Calcium chloride (saturated) Diesel fuel Diethyl ether Frigen 113 Anti-freeze Kerosene Methanol Engine oil Sodium chloride (saturated) Sodium hydroxide Sodium hypochlorite
(30 or 180 days) Sodium hydroxide solution Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Sulfuric acid Tested fuels FAM testing fluid acc. to DIN 51 604-A Toluene 1, 1, 1-Trichloroethane Xylene Zinc chloride (saturated) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30%
5%
5%
30%
10%
10%
10%
10%
30%
-
-
-
-
-
55 80 60 80 80 80 80 23 23 120 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 90 23 80 23 80 23 80 80 80 80 75
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
-
++++
++++
-
++++
++
++++
++++
++
++++
++
++++
104 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.4.2.5 Polycarbonate (PC) Table 4- 62 Chemical resistance - polycarbonate (PPS) Substance Mineral lubricants Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Gasoline Weak mineral acids Strong mineral acids Weak organic acids Strong organic acids Oxidizing acids Weak alkaline solutions Strong alkaline solutions Trichloroethylene Perchloroethylene Acetone Alcohols Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
++
++++
++++
++
++++
++
++
Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 105 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders 4.4.2.6 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Table 4- 63 Chemical resistance - polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Substance Salt water Sugared water Acetic acid, w. Sodium carbonate, w. Ethyl alcohol, w. Ethylene glycol Fuel B
(acc. to ISO 1817) Human sweat Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
5%
10%
5%
5%
60%
50%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
Explanation of the rating
++++
++++
++
+
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.4.2.7 Epoxy resin Table 4- 64 Chemical Resistance - epoxy resin Substance Allyl chloride Formic acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, liquid, water-free Ammonium hydroxide Ethanol Ethyl acrylate Ethyl glycol Gasoline, aroma-free Gasoline, containing benzene Benzoates (Na, Ca among others) Benzoic acid Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
50%
100%
-
-
10%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20 20 20 20 20 20 40 60 20 60 20 20 40 20
++++
++++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
106 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Substance Benzene Borax Boric acid Bromine, liquid Bromides (K, Na among others) Bromoform Bromine water Butadien (1.3) Butane, gaseous Butanol Butyric acid Carbonates (ammonium, Na among others) Chlorine, liquid Chlorine, gaseous, dry Chlorobenzene Chlorides (ammonium, Na among others) Chloroform Chlorophyll Chlorosulfuric acid Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chromates (K, Na among others) Chromic acid Chromosulfuric acid Citric acid Cyanamide Cyanides (K, Na among others) Dextrin, w. Diethyl ether Diethylene glycol Dimethyl ether Dioxane Developer Acetic acid Ethanol Fixing bath Fluorides (ammonium, K, Na among others) Hydrofluoric acid Formaldehyde Formamide Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
100%
-
-
-
-
100%
-
-
100%
-
-
-
-
100%
-
Up to 50 %
Up to 30 %
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
100%
-
-
-
Up to 40 %
50%
100%
20 60 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 40 20 20 20 20 60 60 20 60 20 20 40 20 60 40 40 20 20 20
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 107 Planning the RF300 system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders Substance Gluconic acid Glycerine Glycol Urine Uric acid Hydroxides (ammonium...) Hydroxides (Na, K) Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal) Hypochlorites (K, Na among others) Iodides (K, Na among others) Silicic acid Cresol Methanol Methylene chloride Lactic acid Mineral oils Nitrates (ammonium..., K among others) Nitroglycerin Oxalic acid Phenol Phosphates (ammonium..., Na among others) Phosphoric acid Propanol Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Brine Sulfur dioxide Carbon disulfide Sulfuric acid Sulfurous acid Soap solution Sulphates (ammonium..., Na among others) Sulfites (ammonium..., Na among others) Tar, aroma-free Turpentine Trichloroethylene Test conditions Rating Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
-
-
-
-
-
10%
40%
-
-
-
-
Up to 90 %
100%
-
100%
-
-
-
-
1%
50%
85%
-
25%
10%
-
100%
100%
40%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20 60 60 20 20 20 20 60 60 60 60 20 40 20 20 40 60 20 20 20 60 60 20 20 20 20 60 20 20 20 20 60 60 60 60 20 20
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++++
++
++
++++
++++
++++
++++
108 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Substance Hydrogen peroxide Tartaric acid Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Test conditions Concentration [%] Temperature [C]
30%
-
20 20 Rating
++++
++++
Explanation of the rating
++++
+++
++
+
Resistant Practically resistant Conditionally resistant Less resistant Not resistant 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.1 Overview These EMC Guidelines answer the following questions:
Why are EMC guidelines necessary?
What types of external interference have an impact on the system?
How can interference be prevented?
How can interference be eliminated?
Which standards relate to EMC?
Examples of interference-free plant design The description is intended for "qualified personnel":
Project engineers and planners who plan system configurations with RFID modules and have to observe the necessary guidelines. Fitters and service engineers who install the connecting cables in accordance with this description or who rectify defects in this area in the event of interference. Note Failure to observe notices drawn to the reader's attention can result in dangerous conditions in the plant or the destruction of individual components or the entire plant. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 109 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.2 What does EMC mean?
The increasing use of electrical and electronic devices is accompanied by:
Higher component density More switched power electronics Increasing switching rates Lower power consumption of components due to steeper switching edges The higher the degree of automation, the greater the risk of interaction between devices. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with the environment over and above certain limits. EMC can be broken down into three different areas:
Internal immunity to interference:
Immunity to internal (own) electrical disturbance External immunity to interference:
Immunity to external electromagnetic disturbances Degree of interference emission:
Emission of interference and its effect on the electrical environment All three areas are considered when testing an electrical device. The RFID modules are tested for conformity with the limit values required by the CE and R&TTE directives. Since the RFID modules are merely components of an overall system, and sources of interference can arise as a result of combining different components, certain directives have to be followed when setting up a plant. EMC measures usually consist of a complete package of measures, all of which need to be implemented in order to ensure that the plant is immune to interference. Note The plant manufacturer is responsible for the observance of the EMC directives; the plant operator is responsible for radio interference suppression in the overall plant. All measures taken when setting up the plant prevent expensive retrospective modifications and interference suppression measures. The plant operator must comply with the locally applicable laws and regulations. They are not covered in this document. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 110 4.5.3 Basic rules Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) It is often sufficient to follow a few elementary rules in order to ensure electromagnetic compatiblity (EMC). The following rules must be observed:
Shielding by enclosure Protect the device against external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The housing or enclosure must be connected to the chassis ground. Use metal plates to shield against electromagnetic fields generated by inductances. Use metal connector housings to shield data conductors. Wide-area ground connection Plan a meshed grounding concept. Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large-area and low-HF-
impedance contact. Establish a large-area connection between the passive metal parts and the central grounding point. Don't forget to include the shielding bus in the chassis ground system. That means the actual shielding busbars must be connected to ground by large-area contact. Aluminium parts are not suitable for ground connections. Plan the cable installation Break the cabling down into cable groups and install these separately. Always route power cables, signal cables and HF cables through separated ducts or in separate bundles. Feed the cabling into the cabinet from one side only and, if possible, on one level only. Route the signal cables as close as possible to chassis surfaces. Twist the feed and return conductors of separately installed cables. Routing HF cables:
avoid parallel routing of HF cables. Do not route cables through the antenna field. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 111 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Shielding for the cables Shield the data cables and connect the shield at both ends. Shield the analog cables and connect the shield at one end, e.g. on the drive unit. Always apply large-area connections between the cable shields and the shielding bus at the cabinet inlet and make the contact with clamps. Feed the connected shield through to the module without interruption. Use braided shields, not foil shields. Line and signal filter Use only line filters with metal housings Connect the filter housing to the cabinet chassis using a large-area low-HF-impedance connection. Never fix the filter housing to a painted surface. Fix the filter at the control cabinet inlet or in the direction of the source. 4.5.4 Propagation of electromagnetic interference Three components have to be present for interference to occur in a system:
Interference source Coupling path Interference sink Figure 4-11 Propagation of interference If one of the components is missing, e.g. the coupling path between the interference source and the interference sink, the interference sink is unaffected, even if the interference source is transmitting a high level of noise. 112 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The EMC measures are applied to all three components, in order to prevent malfunctions due to interference. When setting up a plant, the manufacturer must take all possible measures in order to prevent the occurrence of interference sources:
Only devices fulfilling limit class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a plant. Interference suppression measures must be introduced on all interference-emitting devices. This includes all coils and windings. The design of the system must be such that mutual interference between individual components is precluded or kept as small as possible. Information and tips for plant design are given in the following sections. Interference sources In order to achieve a high level of electromagnetic compatibility and thus a very low level of disturbance in a plant, it is necessary to recognize the most frequent interference sources. These must then be eliminated by appropriate measures. Table 4- 65 Interference sources: origin and effect Interference source Contactors, electronic valves Electrical motor Electric welding device Interference results from Contacts Coils Collector Winding Contacts Transformer Power supply unit, switched-
mode High-frequency appliances Transmitter
(e.g. service radio) Ground or reference potential difference Operator Power cable Circuit Circuit Antenna Static charge Current flow High-voltage cable Voltage difference Effect on the interference sink System disturbances Magnetic field Electrical field Magnetic field Electrical field Magnetic field, system disturbance, transient currents Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance Electromagnetic field Electromagnetic field Electrical discharge currents, electrical field Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance Electrical field Voltage difference Transient currents SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 113 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) What interference can affect RFID?
Interference source Switched-mode power supply Interference emitted from the Cause Interference injected through the cables connected in series HF interference over the antennas current infeed Cable is inadequately shield-
ed The reader is not connected to ground. caused by another reader Remedy Replace the power supply Better cable shielding Ground the reader Position the antennas further apart. Erect suitable damping materials between the antennas. Reduce the power of the readers. Please follow the instructions in the section Installation guidelines/reducing the effects of metal Coupling paths A coupling path has to be present before the disturbance emitted by the interference source can affect the system. There are four ways in which interference can be coupled in:
Figure 4-12 Ways in which interference can be coupled in 114 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) When RFID modules are used, different components in the overall system can act as a coupling path:
Table 4- 66 Causes of coupling paths Coupling path Conductors and cables Control cabinet or housing Incorrect or inappropriate installation Inappropriate physical arrangement of cables Invoked by Missing or incorrectly connected shield Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing conductor Missing or incorrect earthing Inappropriate physical arrangement Components not mounted securely Unfavorable cabinet configuration SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 115 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.5 Cabinet configuration The influence of the user in the configuration of an electromagnetically compatible plant encompasses cabinet configuration, cable installation, ground connections and correct shielding of cables. Note For information about electromagnetically compatible cabinet configuration, please consult the installation guidelines for SIMATIC PLCs. Shielding by enclosure Magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves can be kept away from the interference sink by using a metal enclosure. The easier the induced interference current can flow, the greater the intrinsic weakening of the interference field. All enclosures and metal panels in the cabinet should therefore be connected in a manner allowing good conductance. Figure 4-13 Shielding by enclosure If the control cabinet panels are insulated from each other, a high-frequency-conducting connection can be established using ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conducting paste. The larger the area of the connection, the greater the high-frequency conductivity. This is not possible using single-wire connections. 116 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Prevention of interference by optimum configuration Good interference suppression can be achieved by installing SIMATIC PLCs on conducting mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the control cabinet, interference can be prevented easily by observing certain guidelines. Power components (transformers, drive units, load power supply units) should be arranged separately from the control components
(relay control unit, SIMATIC S7). As a rule:
The effect of the interference decreases as the distance between the interference source and interference sink increases. The interference can be further decreased by installing grounded shielding plates. The load connections and power cables should be installed separately from the signal cables with a minimum clearance of 10 cm. Figure 4-14 Prevention of interference by optimum configuration SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 117 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Filtering of the supply voltage External interference from the mains can be prevented by installing line filters. Correct installation is extremely important, in addition to appropriate dimensioning. It is essential that the line filter is mounted directly at the cabinet inlet. As a result, interference is filtered promptly at the inlet, and is not conducted through the cabinet. Figure 4-15 Filtering of the supply voltage 118 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.6 Prevention of interference sources A high level of immunity to interference can be achieved by avoiding interference sources. All switched inductances are frequent sources of interference in plants. Suppression of inductance Relays, contactors, etc. generate interference voltages and must therefore be suppressed using one of the circuits below. Even with small relays, interference voltages of up to 800 V occur on 24 V coils, and interference voltages of several kV occur on 230 V coils when the coil is switched. The use of freewheeling diodes or RC circuits prevents interference voltages and thus stray interference on conductors installed parallel to the coil conductor. Figure 4-16 Suppression of inductance Note All coils in the cabinet should be suppressed. The valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the control cabinet should be tested in particular. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 119 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.7 Equipotential bonding Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design of the plant components and different voltage levels. If the plant components are connected across signal cables, transient currents flow across the signal cables. These transient currents can corrupt the signals. Proper equipotential bonding is thus essential. The equipotential bonding conductor must have a sufficiently large cross section (at least 10 mm2). The distance between the signal cable and the associated equipotential bonding conductor must be as small as possible (antenna effect). A fine-strand conductor must be used (better high-frequency conductivity). When connecting the equipotential bonding conductors to the centralized equipotential bonding strip (EBS), the power components and non-power components must be combined. The equipotential bonding conductors of the separate modules must lead directly to the equipotential bonding strip. Figure 4-17 Equipotential bonding (EBS = Equipotential bonding strip) The better the equipotential bonding in a plant, the smaller the chance of interference due to fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with protective earthing of a plant. Protective earthing prevents the occurrence of excessive contact voltages in the event of equipment faults whereas equipotential bonding prevents the occurrence of differences in potential. 120 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4.5.8 Cable shielding Signal cables must be shielded in order to prevent coupling of interference. The best shielding is achieved by installing the cables in steel tubes. However, this is only necessary if the signal cable is routed through an environment prone to particular interference. It is usually adequate to use cables with braided shields. In either case, however, correct connection is vital for effective shielding. Note An unconnected or incorrectly connected shield has no shielding effect. As a rule:
For analog signal cables, the shield should be connected at one end on the receiver side For digital signals, the shield should be connected to the enclosure at both ends Since interference signals are frequently within the HF range (> 10 kHz), a large-area HF-
proof shield contact is necessary Figure 4-18 Cable shielding The shielding bus should be connected to the control cabinet enclosure in a manner allowing good conductance (large-area contact) and must be situated as close as possible to the cable inlet. The cable insulation must be removed and the cable clamped to the shielding bus (high-frequency clamp) or secured using cable ties. Care should be taken to ensure that the connection allows good conductance. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 121 Planning the RF300 system 4.5 Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Figure 4-19 Connection of shielding bus The shielding bus must be connected to the PE busbar. If shielded cables have to be interrupted, the shield must be continued via the corresponding connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used for this purpose. Figure 4-20 Interruption of shielded cables If intermediate connectors, which do not have a suitable shield connection, are used, the shield must be continued by fixing cable clamps at the point of interruption. This ensures a large-area, HF-conducting contact. 122 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers Features of the RF300 reader 5 The reader provides inductive communication with the transponders and serial connection to the communications modules. Communication between the transponder and reader takes place over inductive alternating fields. The transmittable data volume between reader and transponder depends on the speed at which the transponder moves through the transmission window of the reader. the length of the transmission window, the transponder type used (RF300- / ISO 15693- (MDS D)/ ISO 14443 transponder (MDS E)), the memory type (FRAM, EEPROM; with RF300 transponders). ISO 15693 functionality With all readers of the RF300 family, you can use ISO 15693 transponders. Note that the readers for RF300, ISO 15963 or ISO 14443 operation must have parameters assigned. The parameter assignment done with the aid of the RESET frame (INIT-Run). For more detailed information on software parameter assignment refer to the manuals. Function manual "Ident profile and Ident blocks
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/106368029)", Product Information "Input parameters for the RF300 system for programming via communications modules
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15033/man)", Function manual "FB 45 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/21738808)"
as of version "AS A3". ISO 14443 functionality With all readers of the second generation of the RF300 family, you can use ISO 14443 transponders. The RF300 readers of the second generation therefore replace the MOBY E readers SLG 72 and SLG 75. Note that the readers for RF300, ISO 15963 or ISO 14443 operation must have parameters assigned. The parameter assignment done with the aid of the RESET frame (INIT-Run). The following commands are supported in ISO 14443 operation of the readers:
READ WRITE SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 123 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R MDS-STATUS (mode 3) INIT REPEAT Special ISO 14443 commands such as "INCREMENT", "DECREMENT" or "SET-VALUE"
are not supported. 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF310R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.1.2 RF310R ordering data Table 5- 1 RF310R ordering data RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) horizontal base plate RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) base plate turned through 90 Article number 6GT2801-1AB10 6GT2801-1AB10-0AX1 124 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.3 Pin assignment RF310R with RS-422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 2 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the cur-
rent error. You will find more information on error messages in the section
"System diagnostics (Page 413)". 5.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 125 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.6 Metal-free area The RF310R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. Figure 5-1 Metal-free area for RF310R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.1.7 Minimum distance between RF310R readers RF310R side by side D 150 mm (with 2 readers) D 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-2 Minimum distance between RF310R readers 126 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF310R face-of-face Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R D 300 mm Figure 5-3 Face-of-face distance between two RF310Rs 5.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 3 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with RS-422 interface Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material SIMATIC RF310R 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-1AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
170 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 integrated Plastic PA 12 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 127 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-1AB10 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 50 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 200 g 4 x M5 screw;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 128 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.1.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF310R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 129 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-4 Dimension drawing for RF310R Dimensions in mm 130 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.2 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15034). 5.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF310R special version Scanmode Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.2.2 Ordering data for RF310R with Scanmode Table 5- 4 Ordering data RF310R Scanmode RF310R special version Scanmode with RS-422 interface Article number 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 131 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 5.2.3 Pin assignment RF310R special version Scanmode RS-422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 5 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diagnostics
(Page 413)". 5.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 132 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.2.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode The RF310R special version can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. Figure 5-5 Metal-free area for RF310R special version To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.2.7 Minimum distance between several readers RF310R special version side by side D 150 mm (with 2 readers) D 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-6 Minimum distance between RF310R readers SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 133 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode RF310R special version face-to-face D 300 mm Figure 5-7 Face-to-face distance between two RF310R special version 5.2.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 6 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with Scanmode Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF310R Scanmode 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder ISO transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
170 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (Scanmode) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 134 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 24 VDC 50 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 170 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 5.2.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1); FCC ID NXW-RF310R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 135 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode IC information Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. 5.2.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-8 Dimension drawing RF310R special version Scanmode Dimensions in mm 136 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3 5.3.1 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation Features SIMATIC RF310R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.3.2 Ordering data Table 5- 7 RF310R ordering data RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-1BA10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 137 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 8 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.3.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 9 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flickers or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. The reader is turned on, the antenna is turned off. Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 413)". 138 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 5.3.6 Metal-free area The RF310R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. To avoid any influence on the field data, the distance "a" should be kept to. 20 mm a Figure 5-9 Metal-free area for RF310R SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 139 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.7 Minimum distance between RF310R readers RF310R side by side 150 mm (with 2 readers) 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) D D Figure 5-10 Minimum distance between RF310R readers RF310R face-of-face 300 mm D Figure 5-11 Face-of-face distance between two RF310Rs 140 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 10 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with RS-422 interface Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation 6GT2801-1BA10 SIMATIC RF310R 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
273 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 integrated Plastic PA 12 TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 60 mA
-25 to +70 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 141 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 5.3.9 Approvals FCC information 6GT2801-1BA10
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 100 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC 61010), Ex approval Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF310R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. 142 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 IC information Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. UL information (IEC 61010-1 / IEC 61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required g) the device is categorized as pollution degree 3/4 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 143 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-12 Dimension drawing for RF310R Dimensions in mm 5.3.11 Using the reader in hazardous area WARNING Explosion hazard In a flammable or combustible environment, no cables may be connected to or disconnected from the device. 144 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ATEX ATEX mark Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to ATEX. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document EN 60079-0 EN 60079-7 EN 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid ATEX certificates. NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the Ex mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un = 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ DEMKO 17 ATEX 1767 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 145 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation IECEx The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to IECEx. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document IEC 60079-0 IEC 60079-7 IEC 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid IECEx certificates. IECEx mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the IECEx mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ IECEx ULD 17.0031 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
146 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 UL HAZ. LOC. Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to UL HAZ. LOC. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Title Document Hazardous areas UL 60079-0 Part 0: Equipment - General requirements CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-0 Hazardous areas UL 60079-7 Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-7 Potentially explosive atmosphere UL 60079-31 Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-31 You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid UL HAZ. LOC. certificates UL HAZ. LOC. mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the UL HAZ. LOC. mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
E223122 IND.CONT.EQ FOR HAZ.LOC. CL.I, DIV.2, GP.C,D T4 CL.II, DIV.2, GP.F,G T80C AEx ec IIB T4, Ex ec IIB T4 AEx tc IIIC T80C, Ex tc IIIC T80C
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 147 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation 5.3.11.1 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 ... +70 Temperature class T4 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature class is adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. 5.3.11.2 Using the reader in hazardous area for dust The equipment is suitable for dusts whose ignition temperatures for a dust layer of 5 mm are higher than 80 C (smoldering temperature). Ambient temperature range
-25 C < Ta < +70 C Temperature value T80 C WARNING Ignitions of dust-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature values are adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature range while using the reader can lead to ignitions of dust-air mixtures. 148 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.3.11.3 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - 2nd generation Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
NOTICE Risk of explosion Risk of explosion of dust-air mixtures or gas-air mixtures and the device can be damaged. Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous area:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The grounding of the plug (8-pin) on the reader must be via its supply cable. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of ANT 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). The device sockets incl. the metal parts of the connecting cable must have a shrink-on sleeve pulled over them, in other words, all metal parts apart from the securing sockets of the housing must be fully covered and be inaccessible. After disconnecting the connections (antenna cable, signal/supply cable), before the plugs are inserted again, they must be checked for contamination and if necessary cleaned. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 149 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1 SIMATIC RF340R 5.4.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF340R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.4.1.2 Ordering data for RF340R Table 5- 11 Ordering data for RF340R RF340R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-2AB10 150 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07
1 2 | Users manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.94 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
Readers Features of the RF300 reader 5 The reader provides inductive communication with the transponders and serial connection to the communications modules. Communication between the transponder and reader takes place over inductive alternating fields. The transmittable data volume between reader and transponder depends on the speed at which the transponder moves through the transmission window of the reader. the length of the transmission window, the transponder type used (RF300- / ISO 15693- (MDS D)/ ISO 14443 transponder (MDS E)), the memory type (FRAM, EEPROM; with RF300 transponders). ISO 15693 functionality With all readers of the RF300 family, you can use ISO 15693 transponders. Note that the readers for RF300, ISO 15963 or ISO 14443 operation must have parameters assigned. The parameter assignment done with the aid of the RESET frame (INIT-Run). For more detailed information on software parameter assignment refer to the manuals. Function manual "Ident profile and Ident blocks
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/106368029)", Product Information "FB 45 and FC 45 input parameters for RF300 and ISO transponders
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/33315697)", Function manual "FB 45 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/21738808)"
as of version "AS A3". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 113 Readers ISO 14443 functionality With all readers of the second generation of the RF300 family, you can use ISO 14443 transponders. The RF300 readers of the second generation therefore replace the MOBY E readers SLG 72 and SLG 75. Note that the readers for RF300, ISO 15963 or ISO 14443 operation must have parameters assigned. The parameter assignment done with the aid of the RESET frame (INIT-Run). The following commands are supported in ISO 14443 operation of the readers:
READ WRITE MDS-STATUS (mode 3) INIT REPEAT Special ISO 14443 commands such as "INCREMENT", "DECREMENT" or "SET-VALUE"
are not supported. 114 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF310R Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.1.2 RF310R ordering data Table 5- 1 RF310R ordering data RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) horizontal base plate RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) base plate turned through 90 Article number 6GT2801-1AB10 6GT2801-1AB10-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 115 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.3 Pin assignment RF310R with RS-422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off
, on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 2 LED operating display on the reader Color 1) Meaning Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Transponder present Error has occurred, the type of flashing corresponds to the error code in the table in the section Error codes. The optical error display is only reset if the corresponding reset parameter ("option_1", see FC 45 / FB 45 documentation, section Input parameters) is set. 1) Only in the "with presence" mode. 5.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 116 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.1.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R The RF310R can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. Figure 5-1 Metal-free area for RF310R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.1.7 Minimum distance between RF310R readers RF310R side by side D 150 mm (with 2 readers) D 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-2 Minimum distance between RF310R readers SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 117 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R RF310R face-of-face D 300 mm Figure 5-3 Face-of-face distance between two RF310Rs 5.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 3 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with RS-422 interface Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna SIMATIC RF310R 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-1AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
170 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 integrated 118 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 6GT2801-1AB10 Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 50 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 200 g 4 x M5 screw;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 119 Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R 5.1.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF310R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information 120 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.1.10 Dimension drawing Readers 5.1 SIMATIC RF310R Figure 5-4 Dimension drawing for RF310R Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 121 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15034). 5.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF310R special version Scanmode Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.2.2 Ordering data for RF310R with Scanmode Table 5- 4 Ordering data RF310R Scanmode RF310R special version Scanmode with RS-422 interface Article number 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 122 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 5.2.3 Pin assignment RF310R special version Scanmode RS-422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 5 LED operating display on the reader Color Meaning Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Transponder present Red LED for error display is activated permanently if correct operation of the reader cannot be guaranteed (e. g. faulty start, checksum error during operation). 5.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 123 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 5.2.6 Metal-free area The RF310R special version can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. Figure 5-5 Metal-free area for RF310R special version To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.2.7 Minimum distance between several readers RF310R special version side by side D 150 mm (with 2 readers) D 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-6 Minimum distance between RF310R readers 124 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF310R special version face-to-face Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode D 300 mm Figure 5-7 Face-to-face distance between two RF310R special version 5.2.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 6 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with Scanmode Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF310R Scanmode 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder ISO transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
170 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (Scanmode) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 125 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 24 VDC 50 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 170 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 126 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.2.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1); FCC ID NXW-RF310R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 127 Readers 5.2 SIMATIC RF310R with Scanmode 5.2.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-8 Dimension drawing RF310R special version Scanmode Dimensions in mm 128 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.3 5.3.1 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation SIMATIC RF310R - second generation Features SIMATIC RF310R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.3.2 Ordering data Table 5- 7 RF310R ordering data RF310R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-1BA10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 129 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation 5.3.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 8 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.3.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 9 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flashes or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is ready. There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 395)". 5.3.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 130 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.3.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation The RF310R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. To avoid any influence on the field data, the distance "a" should be kept to. 20 mm a Figure 5-9 Metal-free area for RF310R 5.3.7 Minimum distance between RF310R readers RF310R side by side 150 mm (with 2 readers) 200 mm (with more than 2 readers) D D Figure 5-10 Minimum distance between RF310R readers SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 131 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation RF310R face-of-face 300 mm D Figure 5-11 Face-of-face distance between two RF310Rs 5.3.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 10 Technical specifications of the RF310R reader with RS-422 interface Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna 6GT2801-1BA10 SIMATIC RF310R 13.56 MHz 60 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
273 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 integrated 132 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation 6GT2801-1BA10 Plastic PA 12 TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 55 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 55 x 30 mm 100 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC61010 /
IEC61010-2-201), Ex approval SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 133 Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation 5.3.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF310R (MLFB 6GT2801-1BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF310R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information 134 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.3 SIMATIC RF310R - second generation UL information (IEC61010-1 / IEC61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required 5.3.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-12 Dimension drawing for RF310R Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 135 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1 SIMATIC RF340R 5.4.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF340R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.4.1.2 Ordering data for RF340R Table 5- 11 Ordering data for RF340R RF340R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-2AB10 136 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.3 Pin assignment of RF340R RS422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.4.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 12 LED operating display on the reader Color 1) Meaning Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Transponder present Error has occurred, the type of flashing corresponds to the error code in the table in the section Error codes. The optical error display is only reset if the corresponding reset parameter ("option_1", see FC 45 / FB 45 documentation, section Input parameters) is set. 1) Only in the "with presence" mode. 5.4.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 137 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.6 Metal-free area The RF340R can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. Figure 5-13 Metal-free area for RF340R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.4.1.7 Minimum distance between RF340R readers RF340R side by side D 200 mm (with 2 readers) D 250 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-14 Minimum distance between RF340R readers 138 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF340R face-of-face Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R D 500 mm Figure 5-15 Face-of-face distance between two RF340Rs 5.4.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 13 Technical specifications of the RF340R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna SIMATIC RF340R 13.56 MHz 140 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-2AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
140 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 139 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-2AB10 Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 100 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex approval 140 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.4.1.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 141 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-16 Dimension drawing for RF340R Dimensions in mm 142 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.4.2 SIMATIC RF350R Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF350R Characteristics Design Area of application Antenna connection RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks in assembly lines in harsh industrial environments; for external antennas
(ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) Note Reader requires external antennas Note that the RF350R reader is designed only for operation with external antennas and only works in conjunction with the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30. 5.4.2.2 Ordering data for RF350R Table 5- 14 Ordering data for RF350R RF350R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-4AB10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 143 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.3 Pin assignment of RF350R RS422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.4.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 15 LED operating display on the reader Color 1) Meaning Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Transponder present Error has occurred, the type of flashing corresponds to the error code in the table in the section Error codes. The optical error display is only reset if the corresponding reset parameter ("option_1", see FC 45 / FB 45 documentation, section Input parameters) is set. 1) Only in the "with presence" mode. 5.4.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 5.4.2.6 Metal-free area The RF350R reader does not have an internal antenna. Operation is not affected by mounting on metal or flush-mounting in metal. For information about the metal-free area required by the external antennas, refer to the corresponding section of the chapter Auto-
Hotspot. 144 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.7 Technical specifications Table 5- 16 Technical specifications of the RF350R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Antenna connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF350R 6GT2801-4AB10 13.56 MHz 140 mm 50 mm 16 mm 35 mm 55 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
140 years M12, 8-pin M8, 4-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) External, antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30 Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 145 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-4AB10 24 VDC 100 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP65 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex approval 146 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.4.2.8 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 147 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.9 Dimension drawing Figure 5-17 RF350R dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 148 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.3 Use of the reader in hazardous areas TV NORD CERT GmbH as accredited test center and certification body, no. 0044 as per Article 9 of the Directive 94/9/EC of the European Council of 23 March 1994, has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust -
Part 1: Protection through enclosure Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 IEC 61241 -0: 2006 IEC 61241 -1: 2004 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT. Identification The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex nA nC IIB T5 II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP6x T80 C
-25 C to +70 C Un = 20 to 30 VDC The equipment also has the following additional markings:
XXXYYYZZZ TV 10 ATEX 556039
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 149 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.3.1 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class delineation for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF340R/RF350R readers, check to ensure that the temperature class is observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. 5.4.3.2 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for dusts The equipment is suitable for dusts whose ignition temperatures for a dust layer of 5 mm are higher than 80 C (smoldering temperature). With the ignition temperature according to type of protection iD specified here in compliance with IEC 61241-0 and IEC 61241-11, the smoldering temperature of the dust layer is referenced in this case. Temperature class delineation for dusts Ambient temperature range
-25 C < Ta < +70 C Temperature value T80 C 150 WARNING Ignitions of dust-air mixtures When using the RF340R/RF350R readers, check to ensure that the temperature values are observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of dust-air mixtures. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.4.3.3 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area NOTICE Device may be damaged Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous zone to avoid damage:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The equipment must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The device sockets must be protected with a shrink-on tube. The 8 pin connector must be grounded via its supply line. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of antenna 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 151 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.1 SIMATIC RF340R - second generation 5.5.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF340R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.5.1.2 Ordering data Table 5- 17 Ordering data for RF340R RF340R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-2BA10 152 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.1.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 18 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.5.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 19 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flashes or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is ready. There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 395)". 5.5.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 153 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.1.6 Metal-free area The RF340R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. To avoid any influence on the field data, the distance "a" should be kept to. 20 mm a Figure 5-18 Metal-free area for RF340R 5.5.1.7 Minimum distance between RF340R readers RF340R side by side 200 mm (with 2 readers) 250 mm (with more than 2 readers) D D Figure 5-19 Minimum distance between RF340R readers 154 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF340R face-of-face Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 500 mm D Figure 5-20 Face-of-face distance between two RF340Rs 5.5.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 20 Technical specifications of the RF340R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna 6GT2801-2BA10 SIMATIC RF340R 13.56 MHz 140 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
260 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 155 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-2BA10 Plastic PA 12 TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 55 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 210 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC61010 /
IEC61010-2-201), Ex approval 156 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.5.1.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 157 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation UL information (IEC61010-1 / IEC61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required 5.5.1.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-21 Dimension drawing for RF340R Dimensions in mm 158 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.2 SIMATIC RF350R - second generation 5.5.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF350R Characteristics Design Area of application Antenna connection RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks in assembly lines in harsh industrial environments; for external antennas
(ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) Note Reader requires external antennas Note that the RF350R reader is designed only for operation with external antennas and only works in conjunction with the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30. 5.5.2.2 Ordering data Table 5- 21 Ordering data for RF350R RF350R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-4BA10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 159 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.2.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 22 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.5.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 23 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flashes or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is ready. There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 395)". 5.5.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 160 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.5.2.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation The RF350R reader does not have an internal antenna. Operation is not affected by mounting on metal or flush-mounting in metal. For information about the metal-free area required by the external antennas, refer to the corresponding section of the chapter
"Antennas (Page 193)". 5.5.2.7 Technical specifications Table 5- 24 Technical specifications of the RF350R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write 6GT2801-4BA10 SIMATIC RF350R 13.56 MHz 140 mm 50 mm 16 mm 35 mm 55 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Antenna connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
260 years M12, 8-pin M8, 4-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) External, antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 161 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-4BA10 Plastic PA 12 TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 55 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP65 50 g 20 g Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC61010 /
IEC61010-2-201), Ex approval 162 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.5.2.8 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 163 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation UL information (IEC61010-1 / IEC61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required 5.5.2.9 Dimension drawing Figure 5-22 RF350R dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 164 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - second generation 5.5.3 Use of the reader in hazardous areas NOTICE Approvals for the hazardous area The approvals for the hazardous area of the readers SIMATIC RF340R und RF350R are currently in preparation. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 165 Characteristics Design Area of application RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.1 Features SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.2 RF380R ordering data Table 5- 25 RF380R ordering data RF380R with RS-232/RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-3AB10 5.6.3 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface You can connect the RF380R reader to a higher-level system via the internal RS-422 interface or via the RS-232 interface. After connection, the interface module automatically detects which interface has been used. 166 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Note correct assignment of the pins here:
Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.6.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 26 LED operating display on the reader Color 1) Meaning Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Transponder present Error has occurred, the type of flashing corresponds to the error code in the table in the section Error codes. The optical error display is only reset if the corresponding reset parameter ("option_1", see FC 45 / FB 45 documentation, section Input parameters) is set. 1) Only in the "with presence" mode. 5.6.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 167 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.6 Metal-free area The RF380R can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. Figure 5-23 Metal-free area for RF380R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.6.7 Minimum distance between RF380R readers RF380R side by side D 400 mm (with 2 readers) D 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-24 Minimum distance between RF380R readers 168 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF380R face-to-face Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R D 800 mm Figure 5-25 Face-to-face distance between two RF380R 5.6.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 27 Technical specifications of the RF380R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna SIMATIC RF380R 13.56 MHz 200 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-3AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
109 years M12, 8-pin RS-232/RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 169 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-3AB10 Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 160 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 mm 600 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED RS-232 30 m Radio in accordance with R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex: II 3G Ex nC IIB T5 170 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.6.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF380R Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF380R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 171 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.10 Use of the reader in hazardous areas The TV SD Automotive GmbH as approved test center as well as the TV SD Product Service GmbH as certification center, identification number 0123, as per Article 9 of the Directive of the European Council of 23 March 1994 (94/9/EC), has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 DIN VDE 0848-5: 2001
(in parts) ZLS SK 107.1 Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Safety in electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields -
Part 5: Explosion protection Central office of the states for safety; test components Identification The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3G Ex nC IIB T5
-25 C to +70 C Um=30Vdc The equipment is assigned the following references:
XXXYYYZZZ TPS 09 ATEX 1 459 X
"No use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges"
"Do not disconnect plug on load"
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
172 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.11 Use of the reader in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class delineation for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 5.6.12 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF380R reader, check to ensure that the temperature class is observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area a) The connector on the RF380R must be grounded via its supply line. b) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. c) The plug of the RF380R must not be disconnected in a hazardous atmosphere or under load. d) The supply line for the RF380R is not part of this certificate. The supply line must exhibit a sufficient temperature resistance. e) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 173 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.13 Dimension drawing Figure 5-26 Dimension drawing RF380R Dimensions in mm 174 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.7 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode on the Industry Online Support - SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15037). 5.7.1 Features RF380R Scanmode Characteristics Design Field of application RS232 or RS422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.7.2 Ordering data for RF380R with Scanmode Table 5- 28 Ordering data RF380R Scanmode Product RF380R Scanmode Article number 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 175 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 5.7.3 Pin assignment RF380R Scanmode RS-232 interface You can connect the RF380R Scanmode reader via the internal RS-232/RS-422 interface to a higher-level system. (See section "Basic rules (Page 101)") Make sure that the pin assignment is correct. In the factory settings, the reader is set to RS-232. Siemens can change the interface to RS-422. Table 5- 29 Connector and reader pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.7.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 30 LED operating display on the reader Color Meaning Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Transponder present Red LED for error display is activated permanently if correct operation of the reader cannot be guaranteed (e. g. faulty start, checksum error during operation). 5.7.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 176 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 5.7.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode The RF380R can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. Figure 5-27 Metal-free area for RF380R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.7.7 Minimum distance between several RF380R Scanmode readers RF380R side by side D 400 mm (with 2 readers) D 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-28 Minimum distance between RF380R readers SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 177 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode RF380R face-to-face D 800 mm Figure 5-29 Face-to-face distance between two RF380R 5.7.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 31 Technical specifications of the RF380R Scanmode reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF380R Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 13.56 MHz 200 mm RF300 transponder ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57, 115.2 kBd see section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)"
109 years M12, 8-pin RS-232 / RS-422 integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 178 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted environmental conditions Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 24 VDC 160 mA
-25 to +70 C
-40 to +85 C IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 (without M12 device connector) Approx. 600 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED RS-232 30 m Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 179 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 5.7.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1); FCC ID NXW-RF380R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information 180 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 5.7.10 Certificates and Approvals Certificates for USA and Canada Underwriters Laboratories (UL) acc. to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Ca-
nadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or acc. to UL508 and C22.2 No. 142
(IND.CONT.EQ) 5.7.11 Dimension drawing Figure 5-30 Dimension drawing RF380R Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 181 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15038). 5.8.1 Characteristics RF382R Scanmode Characteristics Design Operating range RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Suitable for high speeds, e.g. in Suspension conveyor systems Assembly lines Production Order picking 5.8.2 RF382R with Scanmode ordering data Table 5- 32 RF382R Scanmode ordering data RF382R Scanmode Article number 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 182 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.8.3 Pin assignment RF382R Scanmode RS232 interface You can connect the RF382R Scanmode reader via the internal RS-232/RS-422 interface or via a higher-level system. (See section "Basic rules (Page 101)") Make sure that the pin assignment is correct. In the factory settings, the reader is set to RS-232. Siemens can change the interface to RS-422. Table 5- 33 Connector and reader pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.8.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 34 LED operating display on the reader Color Meaning Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Transponder present Red LED for error display is activated permanently if correct operation of the reader cannot be guaranteed (e. g. faulty start, checksum error during operation). 5.8.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 5.8.6 Mounting on metal The RF382R can be mounted directly on metal. Flush mounting on metal is not permitted. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 183 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.8.7 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers Figure 5-31 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers Minimum distance D from RF382R to RF382R D 200 mm 5.8.8 Transmission window Orientation of fields of the SIMATIC RF382R Scanmode For many applications it may be best to operate the reader so that the tags move from left to right (or from right to left) at a certain distance in front of the narrow edge of the reader. With this direction of movement, the horizontal reader field is used, see figure below. You also have the option of moving the tags up and down (or down and up) past the narrow edge of the reader. With this direction of movement, uses the vertical reader field is used. Figure 5-32 Definition of horizontal and vertical reader field 184 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Maximum field strength Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode The reader creates the maximum field approximately 13 mm below the upper reader edge. For the largest possible reading range the tags you want to read should move in this range. This applies regardless of whether the horizontal or the vertical field is used. Figure 5-33 Line of maximum magnetic field strength The area of the maximum field strength and, therefore, the maximum range is identified by a laser icon:
Figure 5-34 Laser labeling SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 185 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Transmission window horizontal field Figure 5-35 Distance definition horizontal field Green Blue Lx d Sa Sg Main field (processing field) Secondary fields, horizontal field Maximum length of the main field, horizontal field Distance from the reader edge at which maximum horizontal main field length L exists Operating range in the main field Limit distance Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Direction of motion of the transponder Operating range (Sa) The operating range lies between Level and Level . The operating range between Levels and includes secondary fields. The recommended operating range therefore lies in the green main field between Level 2 and Level 3. 186 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Limit distance (Sg) The limit distance lies on Level . Transmission window vertical field Figure 5-36 Distance definition vertical field Green Ly d Sa Sg Dopt Main field (processing field) Maximum length of the main field, vertical field Distance from the reader edge at which maximum vertical main field length Ly exists Operating range in the main field Limit distance
= 13 mm Direction of motion of the transponder SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 187 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.8.9 Technical specifications Table 5- 35 Technical specifications of the RF382R reader with Scanmode Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption SIMATIC RF382R Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 13.56 MHz 75 mm ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 48)."
115 years M12, 8-pin RS-232 (factory setting, can be changed to RS-
422) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 140 mA 188 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 mm 550 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 RS-232 30 m Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 5.8.10 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF382R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0); FCC ID NXW-RF382R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 189 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode IC information Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. Certificates for USA and Canada Underwriters Laboratories (UL) acc. to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Ca-
nadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or acc. to UL508 and C22.2 No. 142
(IND.CONT.EQ) 190 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.8.11 Dimensional diagram Figure 5-37 Dimension drawing SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 191 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 192 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x
1 2 | Users manual 2 of 3 | Users Manual | 5.54 MiB | May 06 2019 / June 06 2019 |
Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.3 Pin assignment of RF340R RS422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.4.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 12 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the cur-
rent error. You will find more information on error messages in the section
"System diagnostics (Page 413)". 5.4.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 151 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.6 Metal-free area The RF340R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. Figure 5-13 Metal-free area for RF340R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.4.1.7 Minimum distance between RF340R readers RF340R side by side D 200 mm (with 2 readers) D 250 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-14 Minimum distance between RF340R readers 152 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF340R face-of-face Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R D 500 mm Figure 5-15 Face-of-face distance between two RF340Rs 5.4.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 13 Technical specifications of the RF340R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material SIMATIC RF340R 13.56 MHz 140 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-2AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
140 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated Plastic PA 12 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 153 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-2AB10 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 100 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex approval 154 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.4.1.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 155 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.1.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-16 Dimension drawing for RF340R Dimensions in mm 156 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.4.2 SIMATIC RF350R Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF350R Characteristics Design Area of application Antenna connection RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks in assembly lines in harsh industrial environments; for external antennas
(ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) Note Reader requires external antennas Note that the RF350R reader is designed only for operation with external antennas and only works in conjunction with the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30. 5.4.2.2 Ordering data for RF350R Table 5- 14 Ordering data for RF350R RF350R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-4AB10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 157 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.3 Pin assignment of RF350R RS422 interface Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.4.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 15 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the cur-
rent error. You will find more information on error messages in the section
"System diagnostics (Page 413)". 5.4.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 5.4.2.6 Metal-free area The RF350R reader does not have an internal antenna. Operation is not affected by mounting on metal or flush-mounting in metal. For information about the metal-free area required by the external antennas, refer to the corresponding section of the chapter AUTOHOTSPOT. 158 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.7 Technical specifications Table 5- 16 Technical specifications of the RF350R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range ANT 1 ANT 3 / ANT 3 S ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Antenna connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF350R 13.56 MHz 140 mm 50 mm / 20 mm 16 mm 35 mm 55 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-4AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
140 years M12, 8-pin M8, 4-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) External, antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30 Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 159 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-4AB10 24 VDC 100 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP65 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 3-color LED Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex approval 160 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.4.2.8 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 161 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.2.9 Dimension drawing Figure 5-17 RF350R dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 162 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.3 Use of the reader in hazardous areas TV NORD CERT GmbH as accredited test center and certification body, no. 0044 as per Article 9 of the Directive 94/9/EC of the European Council of 23 March 1994, has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust -
Part 1: Protection through enclosure Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 IEC 61241 -0: 2006 IEC 61241 -1: 2004 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT. Identification The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex nA nC IIB T5 II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP6x T80 C
-25 C to +70 C Un = 20 to 30 VDC The equipment also has the following additional markings:
XXXYYYZZZ TV 10 ATEX 556039
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 163 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R 5.4.3.1 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class delineation for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF340R/RF350R readers, check to ensure that the temperature class is observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. 5.4.3.2 Use of the readers in hazardous areas for dusts The equipment is suitable for dusts whose ignition temperatures for a dust layer of 5 mm are higher than 80 C (smoldering temperature). With the ignition temperature according to type of protection iD specified here in compliance with IEC 61241-0 and IEC 61241-11, the smoldering temperature of the dust layer is referenced in this case. Temperature class delineation for dusts Ambient temperature range
-25 C < Ta < +70 C Temperature value T80 C 164 WARNING Ignitions of dust-air mixtures When using the RF340R/RF350R readers, check to ensure that the temperature values are observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of dust-air mixtures. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.4.3.3 Readers 5.4 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area NOTICE Device may be damaged Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous zone to avoid damage:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The equipment must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The device sockets must be protected with a shrink-on tube. The 8 pin connector must be grounded via its supply line. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of antenna 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 165 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.1 SIMATIC RF340R - 2nd generation 5.5.1.1 Features SIMATIC RF340R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.5.1.2 Ordering data Table 5- 17 Ordering data for RF340R RF340R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-2BA10 166 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.1.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 18 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.5.1.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 19 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flickers or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. The reader is turned on, the antenna is turned off. Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 413)". 5.5.1.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 167 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.1.6 Metal-free area The RF340R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. To avoid any influence on the field data, the distance "a" should be kept to. 20 mm a Figure 5-18 Metal-free area for RF340R 5.5.1.7 Minimum distance between RF340R readers RF340R side by side 350 mm (with 2 readers) 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) D D Figure 5-19 Minimum distance between RF340R readers 168 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF340R face-of-face Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 500 mm D Figure 5-20 Face-of-face distance between two RF340Rs 5.5.1.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 20 Technical specifications of the RF340R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure 6GT2801-2BA10 SIMATIC RF340R 13.56 MHz 140 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
260 years M12, 8-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 169 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation Material Plastic PA 12 6GT2801-2BA10 Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 60 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 210 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC 61010), Ex approval 170 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.5.1.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation Siemens SIMATIC RF340R (MLFB 6GT2801-2BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF340R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 171 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation UL information (IEC 61010-1 / IEC 61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required g) the device is categorized as pollution degree 3/4 5.5.1.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-21 Dimension drawing for RF340R Dimensions in mm 172 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.2 SIMATIC RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.2.1 Features SIMATIC RF350R Characteristics Design Area of application Antenna connection RS-422 interface LED operating display Identification tasks in assembly lines in harsh industrial environments; for external antennas
(ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) Note Reader requires external antennas Note that the RF350R reader is designed only for operation with external antennas and only works in conjunction with the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30. 5.5.2.2 Ordering data Table 5- 21 Ordering data for RF350R RF350R with RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-4BA10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 173 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.2.3 Pin assignment of the RS-422 interface Table 5- 22 Pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive Unassigned Earth (shield) 5.5.2.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 23 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flickers or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. The reader is turned on, the antenna is turned off. Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 413)". 5.5.2.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 174 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.5.2.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation The RF350R reader does not have an internal antenna. Operation is not affected by mounting on metal or flush-mounting in metal. For information about the metal-free area required by the external antennas, refer to the corresponding section of the chapter
"Antennas (Page 221)". 5.5.2.7 Technical specifications Table 5- 24 Technical specifications of the RF350R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write 6GT2801-4BA10 SIMATIC RF350R 13.56 MHz 140 mm 50 mm 16 mm 35 mm 55 mm RF300 transponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Antenna connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
260 years M12, 8-pin M8, 4-pin RS-422 (3964R protocol) External, antennas ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18 or ANT 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 175 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-4BA10 Plastic PA 12 TI-Grey 0 mm 24 VDC 60 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP65 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 250 g 2 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA (IEC 61010), Ex approval 176 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.5.2.8 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation Siemens SIMATIC RF350R (MLFB 6GT2801-4BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF350R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 177 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation UL information (IEC 61010-1 / IEC 61010-2-201) This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions:
a) indoor use;
b) altitude up to 2 000 m;
c) temperature -25 C to 70 C;
d) maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50
% relative humidity at 40 C;
e) TRANSIENT OVERVALTAGES up to the levels of OVERVALTAGE CATEGORY II, NOTE 1: These levels of transient overvoltage are typical for equipment supplied from the building wiring. f) using a "NEC Class 2" power supply is required g) the device is categorized as pollution degree 3/4 5.5.2.9 Dimension drawing Figure 5-22 RF350R dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 178 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.3 Using the readers in a hazardous area ATEX ATEX mark WARNING Explosion hazard In a flammable or combustible environment, no cables may be connected to or disconnected from the device. The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to ATEX. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document EN 60079-0 EN 60079-7 EN 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid ATEX certificates. NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the Ex mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un = 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ DEMKO 17 ATEX 1767 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 179 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation IECEx The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to IECEx. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document IEC 60079-0 IEC 60079-7 IEC 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid IECEx certificates. IECEx mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the IECEx mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ IECEx ULD 17.0031 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
180 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 UL HAZ. LOC. Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to UL HAZ. LOC. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Title Document Hazardous areas UL 60079-0 Part 0: Equipment - General requirements CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-0 Hazardous areas UL 60079-7 Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-7 Potentially explosive atmosphere UL 60079-31 Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-31 You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid UL HAZ. LOC. certificates UL HAZ. LOC. mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the UL HAZ. LOC. mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
E223122 IND.CONT.EQ FOR HAZ.LOC. CL.I, DIV.2, GP.C,D T4 CL.II, DIV.2, GP.F,G T80C AEx ec IIB T4, Ex ec IIB T4 AEx tc IIIC T80C, Ex tc IIIC T80C
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 181 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation 5.5.3.1 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 ... +70 Temperature class T4 5.5.3.2 182 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature class is adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. Using the reader in hazardous area for dust The equipment is suitable for dusts whose ignition temperatures for a dust layer of 5 mm are higher than 80 C (smoldering temperature). Ambient temperature range
-25 C < Ta < +70 C Temperature value T80 C WARNING Ignitions of dust-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature values are adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature range while using the reader can lead to ignitions of dust-air mixtures. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.5.3.3 Readers 5.5 SIMATIC RF340R/RF350R - 2nd generation Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
NOTICE Risk of explosion Risk of explosion of dust-air mixtures or gas-air mixtures and the device can be damaged. Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous area:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The grounding of the plug (8-pin) on the reader must be via its supply cable. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of ANT 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). The device sockets incl. the metal parts of the connecting cable must have a shrink-on sleeve pulled over them, in other words, all metal parts apart from the securing sockets of the housing must be fully covered and be inaccessible. After disconnecting the connections (antenna cable, signal/supply cable), before the plugs are inserted again, they must be checked for contamination and if necessary cleaned. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 183 Characteristics Design Area of application RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.1 Features SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.2 RF380R ordering data Table 5- 25 RF380R ordering data RF380R with RS-232/RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-3AB10 5.6.3 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface You can connect the RF380R reader to a higher-level system via the internal RS-422 interface or via the RS-232 interface. After connection, the interface module automatically detects which interface has been used. 184 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Note correct assignment of the pins here:
Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.6.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 26 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader not initialized or antenna switched off Operating voltage present, reader initialized and antenna switched on Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the cur-
rent error. You will find more information on error messages in the section
"System diagnostics (Page 413)". 5.6.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 185 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.6 Metal-free area The RF380R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. Figure 5-23 Metal-free area for RF380R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.6.7 Minimum distance between RF380R readers RF380R side by side D 400 mm (with 2 readers) D 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-24 Minimum distance between RF380R readers 186 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF380R face-to-face Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R D 800 mm Figure 5-25 Face-to-face distance between two RF380R 5.6.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 27 Technical specifications of the RF380R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color SIMATIC RF380R 13.56 MHz 200 mm RF300 transponder approx. 8000 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 6GT2801-3AB10 ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
109 years M12, 8-pin RS-232/RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 187 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 6GT2801-3AB10 0 mm 24 VDC 160 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 mm 600 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED RS-232 30 m Radio in accordance with R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex: II 3G Ex nC IIB T5 188 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.6.9 Approvals FCC information Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AA10); FCC ID NXW-RF380R Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB10); FCC ID NXW-RF380R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 189 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.10 Dimension drawing Figure 5-26 Dimension drawing RF380R Dimensions in mm 5.6.11 Use of the reader in a hazardous 5.6.11.1 Use of the reader in a hazardous area The TV SD Automotive GmbH as approved test center as well as the TV SD Product Service GmbH as certification center, identification number 0123, as per Article 9 of the Directive of the European Council of 23 March 1994 (94/9/EC), has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 DIN VDE 0848-5: 2001
(in parts) ZLS SK 107.1 190 Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Safety in electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields -
Part 5: Explosion protection Central office of the states for safety; test components SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Identification Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3G Ex nC IIB T5
-25C to +70C Um=30 V DC The equipment is assigned the following references:
XXXYYYZZZ TPS 09 ATEX 1 459 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
"No use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges"
"Do not disconnect plug on load"
5.6.11.2 Use of the reader in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class grading for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF380R reader, check to ensure that the temperature class is observed in respect of the requirements of the area of application Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 191 Readers 5.6 SIMATIC RF380R 5.6.11.3 192 Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
NOTICE Explosion hazard Risk of explosion of gas-air mixtures and the device can be damaged. Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous area:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The grounding of the plug (8-pin) on the reader must be via its supply cable. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of ANT 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). The device sockets incl. the metal parts of the connecting cable must have a shrink-on sleeve pulled over them, in other words, all metal parts apart from the securing sockets of the housing must be fully covered and be inaccessible. After disconnecting the connections (antenna cable, signal/supply cable), before the plugs are inserted again, they must be checked for contamination and if necessary cleaned. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.7 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode on the Industry Online Support - SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15037). 5.7.1 Features RF380R Scanmode Characteristics Design Area of application RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.7.2 Ordering data for RF380R with Scanmode Table 5- 28 Ordering data RF380R Scanmode Product RF380R Scanmode Article number 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 193 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 5.7.3 Pin assignment RF380R Scanmode RS-232 interface You can connect the RF380R Scanmode reader via the internal RS-232/RS-422 interface to a higher-level system. (See section "Basic rules (Page 111)") Make sure that the pin assignment is correct. In the factory settings, the reader is set to RS-232. Siemens can change the interface to RS-422. Table 5- 29 Connector and reader pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.7.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on
, flashing
:
Table 5- 30 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diagnostics
(Page 413)". 5.7.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 194 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.7.6 Metal-free area Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode The RF380R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. Figure 5-27 Metal-free area for RF380R To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 5.7.7 Minimum distance between several RF380R Scanmode readers RF380R side by side D 400 mm (with 2 readers) D 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) Figure 5-28 Minimum distance between RF380R readers SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 195 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode RF380R face-to-face D 800 mm Figure 5-29 Face-to-face distance between two RF380R 5.7.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 31 Technical specifications of the RF380R Scanmode reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal SIMATIC RF380R Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 13.56 MHz 200 mm RF300 transponder ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s approx. 8000 bytes/s 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
109 years M12, 8-pin RS-232 / RS-422 integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 196 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 24 VDC 160 mA
-25 to +70 C
-40 to +85 C IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 (without M12 device connector) Approx. 600 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED RS-232 30 m Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 5.7.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1); FCC ID NXW-RF380R01 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 197 Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC information 5.7.10 Certificates and Approvals Certificates for USA and Canada Underwriters Laboratories (UL) acc. to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Ca-
nadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or acc. to UL508 and C22.2 No. 142
(IND.CONT.EQ) 198 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.7.11 Dimension drawing Readers 5.7 SIMATIC RF380R with Scanmode Figure 5-30 Dimension drawing RF380R Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 199 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.1 Features SIMATIC RF380R Characteristics Design Area of application RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 5.8.2 RF380R ordering data Table 5- 32 RF380R ordering data RF380R with RS-232/RS-422 interface (3964R) Article number 6GT2801-3BA10 200 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.3 Pin assignment of RF380R RS-232/RS-422 interface You can connect the RF380R reader to a higher-level system via the internal RS-422 interface or via the RS-232 interface. After connection, the interface module automatically detects which interface has been used. Note correct assignment of the pins here:
Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.8.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by two LEDs. The LEDs can adopt the colors white green, red, yellow or blue and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 33 Display elements LED
/
Meaning The reader is turned off. The reader is turned on and is searching for transponders. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the "Search for transponders" status and has not yet received a "RESET" command and is not ready. There is transponder in the antenna field. The reader is in the "Setup" mode, in the status "Show quality", has not yet re-
ceived a "RESET" command and is not ready. Depending on the signal strength, the LED flickers or is lit permanently. The reader has received a "RESET" command. The reader is turned on, the antenna is turned off. Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diag-
nostics (Page 413)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 201 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 5.8.6 Metal-free area Figure 5-31 Metal-free space for RF380R - 2nd generation The RF380R can be flush-mounted in metal. Allow for a possible reduction in the field data. To avoid any impact on the field data, the distance a should be 20 mm. 202 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.7 Minimum distance between RF380R readers RF380R side by side 400 mm (with 2 readers) 500 mm (with more than 2 readers) D D Figure 5-32 Minimum distance between multiple RF380R - 2nd generation RF380R face-to-face D 800 mm Figure 5-33 Face-of-face distance between two RF380R - 2nd generation SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 203 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.8 Technical specifications Table 5- 34 Technical specifications of the RF380R reader Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Write Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation 6GT2801-3BA10 SIMATIC RF380R 13.56 MHz 240 mm RF300 tran-
sponder 8000 bytes/s 8000 bytes/s ISO tran-
sponder
(MDS D) 3300 bytes/s 1700 bytes/s ISO transponder
(MDS E) 3400 bytes/s 800 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
172.6 years M12, 8-pin RS-232/RS-422 (3964R protocol) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 130 mA
-25 to +70 204 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 mm 600 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 2 LEDs, 5 colors 6GT2801-3BA10 RS-232 30 m Radio in accordance with R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA, Ex: II 3G Ex nC IIB T4 5.8.9 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF380R (MLFB 6GT2801-3BA10); FCC ID NXW-RF380R02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 205 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation IC information Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. 206 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 5.8.10 Dimension drawing Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation Figure 5-34 Dimension drawing SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation Dimensions in mm 5.8.11 Using the reader in hazardous area WARNING Explosion hazard In a flammable or combustible environment, no cables may be connected to or disconnected from the device. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 207 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation ATEX The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to ATEX. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document EN 60079-0 EN 60079-7 EN 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid ATEX certificates. ATEX mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the Ex mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un = 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ DEMKO 17 ATEX 1767 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
208 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 IECEx IECEx mark UL HAZ. LOC. Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to IECEx. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document IEC 60079-0 IEC 60079-7 IEC 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid IECEx certificates. NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the IECEx mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
II 3 G Ex ec IIB T4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T80C Dc
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ IECEx ULD 17.0031 X
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
The SIMATIC Ident products meet the requirements of explosion protection acc. to UL HAZ. LOC. The products meet the requirements of the standards:
Document UL 60079-0 CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-0 UL 60079-7 CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-7 UL 60079-31 CSA C22.2 NO. 60079-31 Title Hazardous areas Part 0: Equipment - General requirements Hazardous areas Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Potentially explosive atmosphere Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 209 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid UL HAZ. LOC. certificates UL HAZ. LOC. mark NOTICE Validity only when the devices are marked There is a corresponding approval only with devices to which the UL HAZ. LOC. mark is applied. The identification of the electrical equipment as an enclosed unit is:
E223122 IND.CONT.EQ FOR HAZ.LOC. CL.I, DIV.2, GP.C,D T4 CL.II, DIV.2, GP.F,G T80C AEx ec IIB T4, Ex ec IIB T4 AEx tc IIIC T80C, Ex tc IIIC T80C
-25 C ... +70 C Un= 24 VDC The equipment also has the following additional information:
XXXYYYZZZ
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
5.8.11.1 Using the reader in hazardous area for gases The temperature class of the reader for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 ... +70 Temperature class T4 210 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature class is adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application Non-compliance with the permitted temperature ranges while using the reader can lead to ignitions of gas-air mixtures. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.8 SIMATIC RF380R - 2nd generation 5.8.11.2 Using the reader in hazardous area for dust The equipment is suitable for dusts whose ignition temperatures for a dust layer of 5 mm are higher than 80 C (smoldering temperature). Ambient temperature range
-25 C < Ta < +70 C Temperature value T80 C 5.8.11.3 WARNING Ignitions of dust-air mixtures When using the reader, check to make sure that the temperature values are adhered to in keeping with the requirements of the area of application. Non-compliance with the permitted temperature range while using the reader can lead to ignitions of dust-air mixtures. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
NOTICE Risk of explosion Risk of explosion of dust-air mixtures or gas-air mixtures and the device can be damaged. Note the following conditions when installing and operating the device in a hazardous area:
Making and breaking of circuits is permitted only in a de-energized state. The maximum surface temperature, corresponding to the marking, applies only for operation without a cover of dust. The device may only be operated in such a way that adequate protection against UV light is ensured. The device may not be operated in areas influenced by processes that generate high electrostatic charges. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. The grounding of the plug (8-pin) on the reader must be via its supply cable. The device may only be operated with accessories specified or supplied by the manufacturer. All the points above also apply to the accessories (cables and connectors) and to the antennas (exception: the housing of ANT 1 does not need to be installed with impact protection). The device sockets incl. the metal parts of the connecting cable must have a shrink-on sleeve pulled over them, in other words, all metal parts apart from the securing sockets of the housing must be fully covered and be inaccessible. After disconnecting the connections (antenna cable, signal/supply cable), before the plugs are inserted again, they must be checked for contamination and if necessary cleaned. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 211 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode You will find detailed information on the SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15038). 5.9.1 Characteristics RF382R Scanmode Characteristics Design Operating range RS-232 or RS-422 interface Status display Suitable for high speeds, e.g. in Suspension conveyor systems Assembly lines Production Order picking 5.9.2 RF382R with Scanmode ordering data Table 5- 35 RF382R Scanmode ordering data RF382R Scanmode Article number 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 212 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.9.3 Pin assignment RF382R Scanmode RS232 interface You can connect the RF382R Scanmode reader via the internal RS-232/RS-422 interface or via a higher-level system. (See section "Basic rules (Page 111)") Make sure that the pin assignment is correct. In the factory settings, the reader is set to RS-232. Siemens can change the interface to RS-422. Table 5- 36 Connector and reader pin assignment Pin Pin Device end 8-pin M12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232
+ 24 V RXD 0 V TXD not used not used not used Ground (shield) Assignment RS-422
+ 24 V
- Transmit 0 V
+ Transmit
+ Receive
- Receive not used Ground (shield) 5.9.4 LED operating display The operational statuses of the reader are displayed by the LEDs. The LED can adopt the colors green, red or yellow and the statuses off , on , flashing :
Table 5- 37 LED operating display on the reader LED Meaning The reader is turned off. Operating voltage present, reader ready for operation Operating mode "with presence": Transponder present Operating mode "without presence": Transponder present and command currently being executed There is an error. The number of flashes provides information about the current error. You will find more information on error messages in the section "System diagnostics
(Page 413)". 5.9.5 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 213 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.9.6 Mounting on metal The RF382R can be mounted directly on metal. Flush mounting on metal is not permitted. 5.9.7 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers Figure 5-35 Minimum distance between several RF382R Scanmode readers Minimum distance D from RF382R to RF382R D 200 mm 5.9.8 Transmission window Orientation of fields of the SIMATIC RF382R Scanmode For many applications it may be best to operate the reader so that the tags move from left to right (or from right to left) at a certain distance in front of the narrow edge of the reader. With this direction of movement, the horizontal reader field is used, see figure below. You also have the option of moving the tags up and down (or down and up) past the narrow edge of the reader. With this direction of movement, uses the vertical reader field is used. 214 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Figure 5-36 Definition of horizontal and vertical reader field Maximum field strength The reader creates the maximum field approximately 13 mm below the upper reader edge. For the largest possible reading range the tags you want to read should move in this range. This applies regardless of whether the horizontal or the vertical field is used. Figure 5-37 Line of maximum magnetic field strength The area of the maximum field strength and, therefore, the maximum range is identified by a laser icon:
Figure 5-38 Laser labeling SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 215 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Transmission window horizontal field Figure 5-39 Distance definition horizontal field Green Blue Lx d Sa Sg Main field (processing field) Secondary fields, horizontal field Maximum length of the main field, horizontal field Distance from the reader edge at which maximum horizontal main field length L exists Operating range in the main field Limit distance Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Direction of motion of the transponder Operating range (Sa) The operating range lies between Level and Level . The operating range between Levels and includes secondary fields. The recommended operating range therefore lies in the green main field between Level 2 and Level 3. 216 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Limit distance (Sg) The limit distance lies on Level . Transmission window vertical field Figure 5-40 Distance definition vertical field Green Ly d Sa Sg Dopt Main field (processing field) Maximum length of the main field, vertical field Distance from the reader edge at which maximum vertical main field length Ly exists Operating range in the main field Limit distance
= 13 mm Direction of motion of the transponder SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 217 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode 5.9.9 Technical specifications Table 5- 38 Technical specifications of the RF382R reader with Scanmode Product type designation Radio frequencies Operating frequency, rated value Electrical data Maximum range Maximum data transmission speed reader transponder Read Transmission speed Read/write distances of the reader MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Interfaces Electrical connector design Standard for interfaces for communication Antenna Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 SIMATIC RF382R Scanmode 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 13.56 MHz 75 mm ISO transponder approx. 1500 bytes/s 19.2, 57.6, 115.2 kBd See section "Field data for transponders, readers and antennas (Page 51)."
115 years M12, 8-pin RS-232 (factory setting, can be changed to RS-
422) integrated Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm 24 VDC 140 mA
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 218 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum LED display design Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability 200 m/s2 Not permitted 160 x 80 x 41 mm 550 g 4 x M5 screws;
1.5 Nm RS-422 1000 m 3-color LED 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 RS-232 30 m Radio to R&TTE directives EN 300330, EN 301489, CE, FCC, UL/CSA 5.9.10 Approvals FCC information Siemens SIMATIC RF382R (MLFB 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0); FCC ID NXW-RF382R This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 219 Readers 5.9 SIMATIC RF382R with Scanmode IC information This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L`exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) L`appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l`appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d`en compromettre le fonctionnement. Certificates for USA and Canada Underwriters Laboratories (UL) acc. to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Ca-
nadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or acc. to UL508 and C22.2 No. 142
(IND.CONT.EQ) 5.9.11 Dimensional diagram Figure 5-41 Dimension drawing 220 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Antennas 6 6.1 Antenna ANT 1 ANT 3 Features For the RF350R and RF350M readers, you can use the following plug-in antennas:
Product photo Limit distance Sg 1) Up to 140 mm Dimensions 75 x 75 x 20 mm
(L x W x H) Up to 50 mm 50 x 75 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 221 Antennas 6.1 Features Antenna ANT 3S Product photo Limit distance Sg 1) Up to 5 mm Dimensions 50 28 10 mm
(L x W x H) ANT 8 2) ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Up to 4 mm Up to 16 mm Up to 35 mm Up to 55 mm M8 x 1.0 x 39 mm
( x thread x L) M12 x 1.0 x 40 mm
( x thread x L) M18 x 1.0 x 55 mm
( x thread x L) M30 x 1.5 x 61 mm
( x thread x L) 1) Depending on the transponder used 2) only released with RF350M und RF350R - second generation 222 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 Antennas 6.1 Features Note Use of the antennas in hazardous areas The antennas ANT 1, ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 are approved for use in hazardous locations. For more information, refer to the section "Use of the reader in hazardous areas
(Page 163)". The ANT 1 is an antenna in the mid performance range and can be used to the customer's advantage in production and assembly lines due to its manageable housing shape. The antenna dimensions make it possible to read/write large quantities of data dynamically from/to the transponder during operation. The antenna cable can be plugged in. The ANT 3 is designed for use in small assembly lines. The extremely compact design of the antenna allows extremely accurate positioning. The antenna cable can be plugged in. Due to its slimline and compact design, the ANT 3S can still be precisely positioned in cramped conditions. Areas of application are, for example, tool identification. The antenna cable can be plugged in. The ANT 8 is primarily envisaged for tool identification applications. The extremely small design of the antenna allows extremely accurate positioning. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end and screwed to the antenna. The antenna ANT 8 has currently only been tested and released for use in conjunction with the mobile reader RF350M and the reader RF350R - second generation. The ANT 12 is primarily envisaged for tool identification applications. The very small size of the antenna means that highly exact positioning is possible using the plastic nuts included in the scope of delivery. The antenna cable can be plugged in. The ANT 18 is designed for use in small assembly lines. Due to its small, compact construction, the antenna can be easily positioned for any application using two plastic nuts
(included in the package). The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 223 Antennas 6.2 Ordering data ANT 30 The ANT 30 is designed for use in small assembly lines. In comparison to ANT 18, the maximum write/read distance is approximately 60 % larger. Due to its compact construction, the antenna can be easily positioned for any application using two plastic nuts (included in the package). The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. 6.2 Ordering data Table 6- 1 Ordering data for antennas ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 incl. integrated antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m Article number 6GT2398-1CB00 6GT2398-1CD30-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD40-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD50-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD60-0AX0 6GT2398-1CF00 6GT2398-1CF10 6GT2398-1CC00 6GT2398-1CA00 6GT2398-1CD00 Table 6- 2 Antenna accessories ordering data Antenna connecting cable Article number 6GT2398-0AH30 3 m 6.3 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 224 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 6.4 Metal-free area Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area The antennas ANT 1, ANT 8, ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. During installation, maintain the minimum distances (a and b) on/flush with the metal. Note Reduction of range if the metal-free space is not maintained At values lower than a and b, the field data changes significantly, resulting in a reduction in the limit distance and operating distance. Therefore, during installation, maintain the minimum distances (a and b) on/flush with the metal. Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 1 40 mm a =
Figure 6-1 ANT 1 flush-mounted in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 225 Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 3 and ANT 3S ANT 3 Metal a Figure 6-2
= 10 mm ANT 3 and ANT 3S flush-mounted in metal Flush-mounting of ANT 8 Figure 6-3 ANT 8 flush-mounted in metal The ANT 8 can be flush-mounted in metal. Flush-mounting of ANT 12 Figure 6-4 ANT 12 flush-mounted in metal The ANT 12 can be flush-mounted in metal. 226 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 18 10 mm 10 mm a =
b =
Figure 6-5 ANT 18 flush-mounted in metal Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 30 20 mm 20 mm a =
b =
Figure 6-6 ANT 30 flush-mounted in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 227 Antennas 6.5 Minimum distance between antennas 6.5 Minimum distance between antennas Table 6- 3 Minimum distance between antennas Diagram (example) Minimum distance [mm]
Antennas next to each other ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 D 300 mm D 150 mm D 20 mm D 50 mm D 70 mm D 100 mm D 100 mm Antennas face to face ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 D 500 mm D 200 mm D 50 mm D 50 mm D 100 mm D 100 mm D 200 mm The reader electronics can be mounted directly alongside each other. 228 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 6.6 Technical specifications Table 6- 4 Technical specifications of the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3 , ANT 3S and ANT 8 Antennas 6.6 Technical specifications Max. write/read distance antenna transponder (Sg) Housing dimensions Color Material Plug connection Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M21) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M21) Attachment of the antenna Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Approx. weight without antenna cable with antenna cable
(3.0 m) ANT 1 140 mm ANT 3 50 mm ANT 3S 5 mm ANT 8 4 mm 75 x 75 x 20 mm
(L x W x H) Anthracite Plastic PA 12 M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) 50 x 28 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) 50 x 28 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) Black Plastic PA6-V0 M8, 4-pin;
side IP67 Black Plastic PA6-V0 M8, 4-pin;
side socket on antenna socket on antenna 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 (3...50 Hz) 2 x M5 screws
-25 ... +70
-40 C ... +85 C 2 x M4 screws 2 x M4 screws M8 x 1.0 x 39 mm
( x thread x L) silver-metallic Stainless steel M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) IP67 (front) 2x stainless steel nuts M8 x 1.0 mm
--
225 g 35 g 160 g 35 g 160 g 10 g 140 g 1) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. Table 6- 5 Technical specifications of the antennas ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 Max. write/read distance antenna transponder (Sg) Housing dimensions ANT 12 16 mm M12 x 1.0 x 40 mm
( x thread x L) Color Material Plug connection ANT 18 35 mm M18 x 1.0 x 55 mm
( x thread x L) Pale turquoise Plastic Crastin M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) ANT 30 55 mm M30 x 1.5 x 61 mm
( x thread x L) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 229 Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M21) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M21) Attachment of the antenna Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Approx. weight without antenna cable with antenna cable
(3.0 m) ANT 12 ANT 18 IP67 (front) ANT 30 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 (3...50 Hz) 2 plastic nuts M12 x 1.0 mm
-25 ... +70
-40 C ... +85 C
--
145 g 2 plastic nuts M18 x 1.0 mm 2 plastic nuts M30 x 1.5 mm
--
130 g
--
180 g 1) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 6.7 Dimensional drawings The cable length is 3 m. All dimensions are in mm. ANT 1 Figure 6-7 Dimension drawing for ANT 1 230 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ANT 3 / ANT 3S Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings Figure 6-8 Dimension drawing ANT 3 7 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 Figure 6-9 Dimension drawing for ANT 8 Figure 6-10 Dimension drawing for ANT 12 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 231 Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings ANT 18 Figure 6-11 Dimension drawing for ANT 18 ANT 30 Figure 6-12 Dimension drawing for ANT 30 232 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder Features of the RF300 transponders 7 The RF300 transponders (RF3xxT) stand out particularly for their extremely fast data exchange with the RF300 readers (RF3xxR). With the exception of the RF320T transponder, all of the RF300 transponders have 8 to 64 KB of FRAM memory, which has an almost unlimited capacity for reading and writing. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 233 RF300 transponder 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 1) Physically identical memory When the OTP area is used, the corresponding user area (FF00-FF13) can no longer be modified (read only). Figure 7-1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 234 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 EEPROM area RF300 transponder 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders The memory configuration of an RF300 transponder always comprises an EEPROM that has 20 bytes for user data (read/write) and a 4-byte unique serial number (UID, read only). For reasons of standardization, the UID is transferred as an 8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8. The unused 4 high bytes are filled with zeros. Note Write speed The EEPROM user memory (address FF00-FF13, or FF80-FF90) requires significantly more time for writing (approx. 11 ms/byte) than the high-speed FRAM memory. For time-critical applications with write functions, it is advisable to use FRAM transponders (e.g. RF330T, RF340T, RF350T, RF360T, RF370T, RF380T). FRAM area OTP area Depending on the tag type, high-speed FRAM memory is available. (8 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB). This area does not exist for the RF320T. In the case of RF3xxT transponders with FRAM memory, the data carrier initialization command (INIT) is only effective on this memory area but not on the EEPROM area (FF00-
FF13). The EEPROM memory area (address FF00-FF13) can also be used as a so-called "OTP"
memory (One Time Programmable). The 5 block addresses FF80, FF84, FF88, FF8C and FF90 are used for this purpose. A write command to this block address with a valid length (4, 8, 12, 16, 20 depending on the block address) protects the written data from subsequent overwriting. Note Seamless use of the OTP area When the OTP area is used, it must be ensured that the blocks are used starting from Block 0 consecutively. Examples:
3 blocks (with write command), Block 0, 1, 2 (FF80, length = 12): valid 2 blocks (consecutive), Block 0 (FF80, length =4), Block 1 (FF84, length = 4): valid 2 blocks (consecutive), Block 0 (FF80, length =4), Block 2 (FF88, length = 4): Invalid 1 Block, Block 4 (FF90, length = 4): Invalid SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 235 RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T Note Use of the OTP area is not reversible If you use the OPT area, you cannot undo it, because the OPT area can only be written to once. 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T 7.2.1 RF320T Features Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection 7.2.2 Ordering data Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 20 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of RF300 transponders
(Page 52) Yes, with spacer IP67/IPx9K Table 7- 1 Ordering data RF320T RF320T Table 7- 2 Ordering data for RF320T accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2800-1CA00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 236 7.2.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T 15 mm h Figure 7-2 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 7-3 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 237 RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 7.2.4 Technical data Table 7- 3 Technical specifications for RF320T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field SIMATIC RF320T 6GT2800-1CA00 Byte-oriented, write protection possible in 4-byte blocks 4 bytes EEPROM 20 bytes EEPROM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1014
> 105
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1800 years Epoxy resin Black 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +125
-40 ... +140 C 238 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T
-40 to +140 6GT2800-1CA00 IP67 IPx9K 1000 m/s2 Shock-resistant acc. toEN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1.0 Nm Glued 3) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2 3) The glue manufacturer's processing instructions must be observed.
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 7.2.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-4 RF320T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 239 RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T 7.3.1 Features Table 7- 4 RF330T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection In production automation for identification of metallic workpiece holders, workpieces or containers. 32 KB EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of RF300 transpond-
ers (Page 52)"
Yes flush mounted on/in metal IP68/IPx9K 7.3.2 Ordering data Table 7- 5 Ordering data RF330T RF330T Article number 6GT2800-5BA00 Table 7- 6 Ordering data for RF330T accessories Fixing hood RF330T / MDS D423 Article number 6GT2690-0AE00 7.3.3 Mounting on/in metal Direct mounting of the RF330T on metal is permitted. 240 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Mounting of the RF330T on metal RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T Figure 7-5 Mounting of the RF330T on metal Flush-mounting of RF330T in metal 10 mm a Figure 7-6 Mounting of the RF330T in metal with 10 mm clearance Figure 7-7 Mounting of the RF330T in metal without clearance SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 241 RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T Note Reduction of the write/read range Note that when the device is flush-mounted in metal without a surrounding clearance 10 mm, the write/read range is significantly reduced. 7.3.4 Technical specifications Table 7- 7 RF330T technical specifications Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage SIMATIC RF330T 6GT2800-5BA00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1014
> 1014
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1200 years Plastic PPS Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 ... +100 C
-40 to +100 242 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Degree of protection to EN 60529 Pressure resistance RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T 6GT2800-5BA00 IP68 2 hours, 2 m, 20 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Low pressure resistant vacuum dryer: up to 20 mbar high pressure resistant (see degree of protec-
tion IPx9K) 500 m/s2 Shock-resistant acc. toEN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 30 x 8 mm 10 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 7.3.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-8 RF330T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 243 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.1 Features Table 7- 8 RF340T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection 7.4.2 Ordering data Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 8 KB FRAM user memory 32 KB FRAM user memory See section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 52) Yes IP68/IPx9K Table 7- 9 Ordering data RF340T RF340T 8 KB FRAM user memory RF340T 32 KB FRAM user memory Article number 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 244 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF340T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF340T on metal Figure 7-9 Mounting of RF340T on metal Flush-mounting of RF340T in metal:
Figure 7-10 Flush-mounting of RF340T in metal The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 245 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.4 Technical specifications Table 7- 10 Technical specifications for RF340T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC RF340T 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM / 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +85
-40 to +85 IP68 IPx9K 500 m/s2 Shock-resistant acc. toEN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Not permitted 246 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 48 x 25 x 15 mm 25 g 2 x M3 screws 1.0 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.4.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-11 RF340T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 247 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Features 7.5.1 RF350T 7.5.2 Ordering data Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 32 KB FRAM user memory See section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 52) Yes IP68 Table 7- 11 Ordering data RF350T RF350T Article number 6GT2800-5BD00 248 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T 7.5.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF350T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF350T on metal Figure 7-12 Mounting of RF350T on metal Flush-mounting of RF350T in metal:
Figure 7-13 RF350T flush-mounted in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 249 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. 7.5.4 Mounting options Mounting with fixing frame The RF350T transponder can be mounted as shown with the fixing frame:
Figure 7-14 Installation diagram Dimensions of the fixing frame Figure 7-15 RF350T fixing frame 250 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.5.5 Technical data Table 7- 12 Technical specifications for RF350T RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material SIMATIC RF350T 6GT2800-5BD00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. toEN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) IP68 500 m/s2 Not permitted 50 x 50 x 20 mm
-25 to +85
-40 to +85
-40 to +85 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 251 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Weight Type of mounting 6GT2800-5BD00 25 g 2 x M4 screws 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.5.6 Dimension drawing Figure 7-16 RF350T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 252 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Features 7.6.1 RF360T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 8 KB FRAM user memory 32 KB FRAM user memory see section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 52) Yes, with spacer IP67 7.6.2 Ordering data Table 7- 13 Ordering data RF360T RF360T 8 KB FRAM user memory RF360T 32 KB FRAM user memory Table 7- 14 Ordering data for RF360T accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Article number 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 253 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T 7.6.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF360T on metal is not allowed. A distance 20 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00. Mounting of RF360T on metal Figure 7-17 Mounting of RF360T with spacer The standard value for h is 20 mm. Flush-mounting of RF360T in metal:
Figure 7-18 Flush-mounting of RF360T with spacer 254 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 255 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Dimensions of spacer and fixing pocket for RF360T Figure 7-19 Dimensions of spacer and fixing pocket for RF360T 256 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.6.4 Technical data Table 7- 15 Technical specifications for RF360T RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) SIMATIC RF360T 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM / 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1200 years Epoxy resin Anthracite 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +75
-40 to +85
-40 to +85 IP67 500 m/s2 200 m/s2 Not permitted 86 x 55 x 2.5 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 257 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Weight Type of mounting 7.6.5 Dimension drawing 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 25 g 2 x M3 screws 1.0 Nm Fixing pocket (6GT2190-0AB00) Figure 7-20 RF360T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 258 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7.1 Features RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T RF370T The SIMATIC RF370T transponder is a passive (i.e. battery-free) data carrier in a square type of construction. Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments, due to high resistance to oils, lubricants and cleaning agents, and suitable for larger ranges, e.g. automotive industry 32 KB FRAM user memory 64 KB FRAM user memory see section Field data of RF300 transpond-
ers (Page 52) Yes IP68/IPx9K 7.7.2 Ordering data Table 7- 16 Ordering data RF370T RF370T 32 KB FRAM user memory RF370T 64 KB FRAM user memory Article number 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 259 RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF370T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF370T on metal Figure 7-21 Mounting of RF370T on metal Flush-mounting of RF370T in metal:
Figure 7-22 RF370T flush-mounted in metal The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. 260 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.7.4 Mounting instructions RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T It is essential that you observe the instructions in the Section Installation guidelines
(Page 67). Properties Type of installation Tightening torque Description Screw fixing (two M5 screws)
< 1.2 Nm (at room temperature) 7.7.5 Technical specifications Table 7- 17 Technical specifications RF370T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions SIMATIC RF370T 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 KB FRAM / 64 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 261 RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00
-25 to +85
-40 to +85
-40 to +85 IPx9K 500 m/s2 during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. toEN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 200 g 2 x M5 screws 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.7.6 Dimensional drawing Figure 7-23 RF370T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 262 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.1 Features RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T The SIMATIC RF380T transponder is an extremely rugged and heat-resistant round data carrier suitable e.g. for applications in the automotive industry. SIMATIC RF380T transponder Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks in applications (e.g. automotive industry) with cyclic high temperature stress > 85 C and < 220 C Highly resistant to mineral oils, lubricants and cleaning agents Typical applications:
Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85C Other applications with higher temperatures 32 KB FRAM user memory see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal IP68 7.8.2 Ordering data Table 7- 18 Ordering data RF380T RF380T User memory 32 KB FRAM (read/write) and 4 bytes EEPROM Article number 6GT2800-5DA00 Table 7- 19 Ordering data for RF380T Holder (short version) Holder (long version) Shrouding cover Universal holder Article number 6GT2090-0QA00 6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3 6GT2090-0QB00 6GT2590-0QA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 263 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.3 Installation guidelines for RF380T It is essential that you observe the instructions in the Section Installation guidelines
(Page 67). The following section only deals with features specific to the SIMATIC RF380T. 7.8.3.1 Mounting instructions Note Only use tag with original holder You are strongly recommended to only use the tag with the original holder specified. Only this holder guarantees that the data memory observes the listed values for shock, vibration and temperature. A protective cover is recommendable for applications in paint shops. Data memory holder Short version (6GT2 090-0QA00) Long version (6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3) Material: V2A sheet-steel with thickness 2.5 mm BI 2.5 DIN 59382 1.4541 264 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Assembly of data memory with holder RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Figure 7-24 Assembly of tag with holder Scope of supply The holder is provided with all mounting parts and a mounting diagram. Mounting screws for securing the holder are not included. The mounting screws are of diameter M 10. The minimum length is 25 mm. The optional cover can be used for the long and short versions of the holder. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 265 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Universal holder Figure 7-25 Universal holder 6GT2590-0QA00 266 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.3.2 Metal-free area Direct mounting of the RF380T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF380T on metal Figure 7-26 Mounting of RF380T on metal Flush-mounting of RF380T in metal:
Figure 7-27 RF380T flush-mounted in metal The standard value for a is 40 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 267 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.4 Configuring instructions 7.8.4.1 Temperature dependence of the transmission window The guidelines in the section "Planning the RF300 system" apply to configuration of heat-
resistant data memories, with the exception of the limit distance and field length at temperatures above 85 C. At temperatures above 85 C, the length of the transmission window is reduced by up to 10%. 7.8.4.2 Temperature response in cyclic operation At ambient temperatures (Tu) up to 110 C, cyclic operation is not necessary, i.e. up to this temperature, the transponder can be in constant operation. Note Calculation of the temperature curves Calculation of the temperature curves or of a temperature profile can be carried out on request by Siemens AG. Exact knowledge of the internal temperature facilitates configuration for time-critical applications. You can also carry out the calculation with the aid of the "SIMATIC RF Temperature Calculator" on the "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" DVD (refer to the section
"DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" (Page 435)"). Ambient temperatures > 110 C Note Cancellation of warranty The internal temperature of the data memory must not exceed the critical threshold of 110 C. Each heating phase must be followed by a cooling phase. No warranty claims will otherwise be accepted. 268 Some limit cycles are listed in the table below:
Table 7- 20 Limit cycles of data memory temperature Tu (heating up) Heating up Tu (cooling down) Cooling down 220 C 200 C 190 C 180 C 170 C 0.5 h 1 h 1 h 2 h 2 h 25 C 25 C 25 C 25 C 25 C
> 2 h
> 2 h
> 1 h 45 min
> 5 h
> 4 h SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T The internal temperature of the tag follows an exponential function with which the internal temperature and the operability of the tag can be calculated in advance. This is particularly relevant to temperature-critical applications or those with a complex temperature profile. Ambient temperatures > 220C Note Cancellation of warranty The data memory must not be exposed to ambient temperatures > 220 C. No warranty claims will otherwise be accepted. However, the mechanical stability is retained up to 230 C!
Example of a cyclic sequence Table 7- 21 Typical temperature profile of an application in the paint shop Start of tag at initial point Electrolytic dip Electrolytic dip dryer Transport PVC dryer Transport Filler dryer Transport Top coat dryer Transport Wax dryer Transport Duration (min) 20 60 60 25 60 60 60 60 60 25 150 Ambient temperature (C) 30 200 25 170 25 160 25 120 25 100 25 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 269 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Figure 7-28 Graphic trend of temperature profile from above table The simulation results in the following:
Following a simulation time of 36.5 hours, a total of 3 cycles were carried out, and an internal temperature of 90 degrees Celsius was reached. Figure 7-29 Complete temperature response due to simulation 270 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.5 Use of the transponder in the Ex protection area The TV SD Automotive GmbH as approved test center as well as the TV SD Product Service GmbH as certification center, identification number 0123, as per Article 9 of the Directive of the European Council of 23 March 1994 (94/9/EC), has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Table 7- 22 Approvals Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 DIN VDE 0848-5: 2001
(in parts) ZLS SK 107.1 Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Safety in electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields -
Part 5: Explosion protection Central office of the states for safety; test components Identification Table 7- 23 The identification of the electrical equipment as an encapsulated unit II 3G Ex nC IIB T5
-25C to +70C Um=30Vdc The equipment is assigned the following references:
XXXYYYZZZ TPS 09 ATEX 1 459 X
"No use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges"
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 271 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.5.1 Use of the transponder in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class delineation for gases The temperature class of the transponder for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF380T transponder, check that the temperature class is kept to in conjunction with the requirements of the area of application. If the temperature ranges are exceeded during use of the transponder, gas-air mixtures may be ignited. The maximum transmit power of the transmitter used to operate the transponder must not exceed 2 W. If the transmit power id not kept to, gas-air mixtures may ignite. 7.8.5.2 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. 7.8.6 Cleaning the mobile data memory 272 Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter Chemical resistance of the readers and transponders (Page 97). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.7 Technical specifications Table 7- 24 RF380T technical specifications Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Enclosure Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access SIMATIC RF380T 6GT2800-5DA00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 52)"
1177 years PPS Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 +110 C
> 110 C C: cyclic operation possible
-40 ... +220 C
-40 to +110 outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M31)2) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M32) 50 m/s2 Torsion and bending load IP68 500 m/s2 Not permitted SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 273 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 6GT2800-5DA00 Design, dimensions and weights Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) Applies only in conjunction with the original support 2) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 114 x 83 mm 900 g Holder (must be ordered separately) 7.8.8 Dimensional drawing Figure 7-30 Dimension drawing RF380T Dimensions in mm 274 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder Features of the ISO transponders 8 The transponders (MDS D) that are compatible with ISO 15693 represent a cost-effective alternative to RF300 transponders. The performance that can be achieved with this
(transmission speed, memory size), however, is considerably less than with RF300 transponders. You will find more information on transmission speeds in the section "Communication between communications module, reader and transponder (Page 50)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 275 ISO transponder 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders Figure 8-1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders 276 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Memory areas OTP area ISO transponder 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders Depending on the manufacturer of the transponder chip, the memory configuration of an ISO transponder consists of varying sizes of user memory. The typical sizes are 112 bytes, 256 bytes, 992 bytes EEPROM or 2000 bytes FRAM. Each ISO transponder chip has an 8-byte long unique serial number (UID, read only). This UID is transferred as an 8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8. For the OTP area, a 16-byte address space is always reserved at the end of the memory area. The blocks are divided up depending on the chip (see technical specifications). Note that the corresponding addresses for the user data are therefore not available to the application when the OTP area is used. A total of 4 block addresses ("mapped" addresses) are provided:
FF80 FF84 FF88 FF8C A write command to this block address with a valid length (4, 8, 12, 16 bytes depending on the block address) protects the written data from subsequent overwriting. Note Exception Fujitsu chip (MDS D4xx and MDS D5xx) The Fujitsu chip MB89R118 (MDS D4xx) has 8-byte blocks, which means that only 2 block addresses have to be addressed: FF80 and FF88 with the length 8 and 16 bytes). The Fujitsu chip MB89R112 (MDS D5xx) has 32 byte blocks and can therefore not be addressed in the OTP area. Note Restriction to the use of the OTP Observe the following restrictions when using OTP:
The OTP write/lock command can only be sent in static operation. The OTP write/lock command can not be sent as a chained command. The Fujitsu chip MB89R112 (MDS D5xx) has 32 byte blocks and can therefore not be addressed in the OTP area. Note Use of the OTP area is not reversible If you use the OPT area, you cannot undo it, because the OPT area can only be written to once. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 277 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 8.2 MDS D100 Characteristics 8.2.1 MDS D100 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders
(MDS D) (Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 8.2.2 Ordering data Table 8- 1 Ordering data for MDS D100 MDS D100 Table 8- 2 Ordering data for MDS D100 accessory Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2600-0AD10 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 278 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.2.3 Metal-free area ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 Direct mounting of the MDS D100 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 20 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00. Mounting on metal 20 mm Transponder h Metal Figure 8-2 Mounting of the MDS D100 on metal with spacer Non-metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 279 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 Flush-mounting 20 mm 20 mm Transponder a h Metal Figure 8-3 Non-metal Flush-mounting of MDS D100 in metal with spacer 280 Note If the minimum guide values (h or a) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.2.4 Technical data Table 8- 3 Technical specifications for MDS D100 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) SIMATIC MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PET White/black 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +80
-25 to +80
-25 to +80 IP68 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85.6 x 54 x 0.9 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 281 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-0AD10 5 g Fixing pocket Glued 2) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 8.2.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Dimensions for mounting holes 1) Figure 8-4 MDS D100 dimension drawing 282 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.3 MDS D117 Features 8.3.1 MDS D117 8.3.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection Very compact data carrier that can be cemented into objects where precise positioning is necessary;
e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders etc.. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)."
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 4 Ordering data for MDS D117 MDS D117 Pack of 10 Article number 6GT2600-0AG00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 283 ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 8.3.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounted in metal Transponder Metal 8.3.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 5 Technical specifications for MDS D117 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color SIMATIC MDS D117 6GT2600-0AG00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PPS Black 284 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 0 mm Inductive, without battery 6GT2600-0AG00 Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529
-25 to +85
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 4 x 5.2 mm 1 g Fixing pocket Glued 2) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 8.3.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-5 Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 285 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 8.4 MDS D124 8.4.1 MDS D124 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Application areas in production automation (e.g. small paintshops up to +180 C) 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)". Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.4.2 Ordering data Table 8- 6 Ordering data for MDS D124 MDS D124 Table 8- 7 Ordering data for MDS D124 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-0AC10 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 286 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.4.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 15 mm h Figure 8-6 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-7 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 287 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.4.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 8 Technical specifications for MDS D124 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access SIMATIC MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PPS Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 +140 C from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance outside the read/write field
-40 to +180 288 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC10 at +180 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 3000 cycles
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting Not permitted 4 x 5.2 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued 3) With spacer 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2 3) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed.
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.4.5 Use of the MDS D124 in hazardous area The mobile data memory MDS D124, device group II, category 1G or 1D may be installed and operated in zones 0, 1 and 2 or in the zones 20, 21 and 22. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2009 EN 60079-11:2007 EN 61241-11:2006 EN 60079-26:2007 When used in hazardous areas, the MDS D124 must not be operated with field strengths > 5 A / m to avoid impermissible heating. This is not the case with readers from the SIMATIC RF range (MOBY D, RF200 and RF300). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 289 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Identification II 1 G Ex ia IIC T3 to T6 Ga or II 1 D Ex ia IIIC T80 C to T180 C Da TV 12 ATEX 084413 X The temperature class or the maximum surface temperature depends on the maximum ambient temperature. The relationship between temperature class (gas) or maximum surface temperature (dust) can be found in the following table. Table 8- 9 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature range Temperature class Max. surface temperature
-25 ... +150
-25 ... +100
-25 ... +65
-25 ... +50 T3 T4 T5 T6 T180 T130 T95 T80 Note Safety markings for hazardous areas Since there is not enough space on the MDS D124 for the safety mark, this is supplied as a label with the device. This must be affixed immediately next to the MDS D124 so that the label clearly relates to the device. WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 290 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Note Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
Use of the device in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. For applications requiring devices of category 1, the device must be mounted on a grounded, conductive base. It must only be cleaned with a damp cloth. The device is suitable for use in atmospheres containing dust, however not for full immersion in dust. 8.4.6 Dimension drawing Figure 8-8 Dimension drawing of MDS D124 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 291 ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 8.5 MDS D126 8.5.1 MDS D126 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be deployed in harsh conditions 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56) Yes, with spacer ISO-15693 IP68 8.5.2 Ordering data Table 8- 10 Ordering data for MDS D126 MDS D126 Table 8- 11 Ordering data for MDS D126 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-0AE00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 292 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.5.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 h 25 mm Figure 8-9 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer Flush-mounted in metal h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-10 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 293 ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 8.5.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 12 Technical specifications for the MDS D126 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field SIMATIC MDS D126 6GT2600-0AE00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PA6.6 GF Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100
-40 to +100 during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 500 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Not permitted 50 x 3.6 mm 294 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 6GT2600-0AE00 Weight Type of mounting 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued 3) 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2 3) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed.
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.5.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-11 Dimension drawing of MDS D126 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 295 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Very compact data carrier that can be screwed into areas where precise positioning is necessary;
e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders etc. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 8.6 MDS D127 Features 8.6.1 MDS D127 8.6.2 Ordering data Table 8- 13 Ordering data for MDS D127 MDS D127 Pack of 10
(A screw-in aid is supplied with each pack) Article number 6GT2600-0AF00 296 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 8.6.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounted in metal ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 Metal Transponders Note Damage to the transponder due to improper mounting To screw the MDS D127 into a suitable thread, use the supplied screw-in tool. This avoids damage to the MDS D127. Figure 8-12 Screw-in aid for mounting the MDS D127 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 297 ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 8.6.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 14 Technical specifications for MDS D127 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature during write/read access outside the read/write field during storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC MDS D127 6GT2600-0AF00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 56)"
228 years PA6 Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +100
-40 to +125
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Shock according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 1000 m/s2 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M31) 200 m/s2 Torsion and bending load Not permitted 298 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 6GT2600-0AF00 M6 x 5.8 mm 1 g Glued 2) 1 x M3 screw 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The processing instructions of the adhesive manufacturer must be observed. 8.6.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-13 Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07 299 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7 MDS D139 Characteristics 8.7.1 MDS D139 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Applications in production logistics and in assembly lines subject to high temperatures (up to +220 C) Typical application areas:
Paintshops and their preparatory treatments) Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85 C Other applications with higher temperatures 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 56). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 300 Note Compatibility with SIMATIC RF300 depending on the article number The transponder MDS D139 with article number 6GT2600-0AA10 is compatible with the SIMATIC RF300 system. The transponder MDS D139 with article number 6GT2600-0AA00 is not compatible. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2017, C79000-G8976-C345-07
1 2 | Users manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.92 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
Antennas Features Product photo 6.1 Antenna ANT 1 ANT 3 6 Limit distance Sg 1) Up to 140 mm Dimensions 75 x 75 x 20 mm
(L x W x H) Up to 50 mm 50 x 75 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 193 Antennas 6.1 Features Antenna ANT 3S Product photo Limit distance Sg 1) Up to 5 mm Dimensions 50 28 10 mm
(L x W x H) ANT 8 2) ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Up to 4 mm Up to 16 mm Up to 35 mm Up to 55 mm M8 x 1.0 x 39 mm
( x thread x L) M12 x 1.0 x 40 mm
( x thread x L) M18 x 1.0 x 55 mm
( x thread x L) M30 x 1.5 x 61 mm
( x thread x L) 1) Depending on the transponder used 2) only released with RF350M und RF350R - second generation 194 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 Antennas 6.1 Features Note Use of the antennas in hazardous areas The antennas ANT 1, ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 are approved for use in hazardous locations. For more information, refer to the section "Use of the reader in hazardous areas
(Page 149)". The ANT 1 is an antenna in the mid performance range and can be used to the customer's advantage in production and assembly lines due to its manageable housing shape. The antenna dimensions make it possible to read/write large quantities of data dynamically from/to the transponder during operation. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. The ANT 3 is designed for use in small assembly lines. The extremely compact design of the antenna allows extremely accurate positioning. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. The ANT 3S is designed for use in small assembly lines. The extremely compact design of the antenna allows extremely accurate positioning even with small transponders. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. The ANT 8 is primarily envisaged for tool identification applications. The extremely small design of the antenna allows extremely accurate positioning. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end and screwed to the antenna. The antenna ANT 8 has currently only been tested and released for use in conjunction with the mobile reader RF350M and the reader RF350R - second generation. The ANT 12 is primarily envisaged for tool identification applications. The very small size of the antenna means that highly exact positioning is possible using the plastic nuts included in the scope of delivery. The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. The ANT 18 is designed for use in small assembly lines. Due to its small, compact construction, the antenna can be easily positioned for any application using two plastic nuts
(included in the package). The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 195 Antennas 6.2 Ordering data ANT 30 The ANT 30 is designed for use in small assembly lines. In comparison to ANT 18, the maximum write/read distance is approximately 60 % larger. Due to its compact construction, the antenna can be easily positioned for any application using two plastic nuts (included in the package). The antenna cable can be connected at the reader end. 6.2 Ordering data Table 6- 1 Ordering data for antennas ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 incl. integrated antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m without antenna connecting cable incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m incl. plug-in antenna cable 3 m Article number 6GT2398-1CB00 6GT2398-1CD30-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD40-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD50-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD60-0AX0 6GT2398-1CF00 6GT2398-1CF10 6GT2398-1CC00 6GT2398-1CA00 6GT2398-1CD00 Table 6- 2 Antenna accessories ordering data Antenna connecting cable Article number 6GT2398-0AH30 3 m 6.3 Ensuring reliable data exchange The "center point" of the transponder must be situated within the transmission window. 196 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 6.4 Metal-free area Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area The antennas ANT 1, ANT 8, ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 can be flush-mounted in metal. Please allow for a possible reduction in the field data values. During installation, maintain the minimum distances (a and b) on/flush with the metal. Note Reduction of range if the metal-free space is not maintained At values lower than a and b, the field data changes significantly, resulting in a reduction in the limit distance and operating distance. Therefore, during installation, maintain the minimum distances (a and b) on/flush with the metal. Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 1 40 mm a =
Figure 6-1 ANT 1 flush-mounted in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 197 Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 3 and ANT 3S ANT 3 Metal a Figure 6-2
= 10 mm ANT 3 and ANT 3S flush-mounted in metal Flush-mounting of ANT 8 Figure 6-3 ANT 8 flush-mounted in metal The ANT 8 can be flush-mounted in metal. Flush-mounting of ANT 12 Figure 6-4 ANT 12 flush-mounted in metal The ANT 12 can be flush-mounted in metal. 198 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Antennas 6.4 Metal-free area Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 18 10 mm 10 mm a =
b =
Figure 6-5 ANT 18 flush-mounted in metal Metal-free space for flush-mounted installation of ANT 30 20 mm 20 mm a =
b =
Figure 6-6 ANT 30 flush-mounted in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 199 Antennas 6.5 Minimum distance between antennas 6.5 Minimum distance between antennas Table 6- 3 Minimum distance between antennas Diagram (example) Minimum distance [mm]
Antennas next to each other ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 D 100 mm D 80 mm D 20 mm D 50 mm D 70 mm D 100 mm D 100 mm Antennas face to face ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 D 500 mm D 100 mm D 50 mm D 50 mm D 100 mm D 100 mm D 200 mm The reader electronics can be mounted directly alongside each other. 200 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 6.6 Technical specifications Table 6- 4 Technical specifications of the antennas ANT 1, ANT 3 , ANT 3S and ANT 8 Antennas 6.6 Technical specifications Max. write/read distance antenna transponder (Sg) Housing dimensions Color Material Plug connection Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Attachment of the antenna Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Weight, approx. without antenna cable with antenna cable
(3.0 m) ANT 1 140 mm ANT 3 50 mm ANT 3S 5 mm ANT 8 4 mm 75 x 75 x 20 mm
(L x W x H) Anthracite Plastic PA 12 M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) 50 x 28 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) 50 x 28 x 10 mm
(L x W x H) Black Plastic PA6-V0 M8, 4-pin;
side IP67 Black Plastic PA6-V0 M8, 4-pin;
side socket on antenna socket on antenna 50 g 1) 20 g (3 to 50 Hz) 1) 2 x M5 screws
-25 ... +70
-40 C ... +85 C 2 x M4 screws 2 x M4 screws M8 x 1.0 x 39 mm
( x thread x L) silver-metallic Stainless steel M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) IP67 (front) 2x stainless steel nuts M8 x 1.0 mm
--
225 g 35 g 160 g 35 g 160 g 10 g 140 g 1) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 201 Antennas 6.6 Technical specifications Table 6- 5 Technical specifications of the antennas ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30 Max. write/read distance antenna transponder (Sg) Housing dimensions ANT 12 16 mm M12 x 1.0 x 40 mm
( x thread x L) ANT 30 55 mm M30 x 1.5 x 61 mm
( x thread x L) ANT 18 35 mm M18 x 1.0 x 55 mm
( x thread x L) Pale turquoise Plastic Crastin M8, 4-pin;
(pins on antenna side) IP67 (front) 50 g 1) 20 g (3 to 50 Hz) 1) 2 plastic nuts M12 x 1.0 mm
-25 to +70
-40 to +85 2 plastic nuts M18 x 1.0 mm 2 plastic nuts M30 x 1.5 mm
--
145 g
--
130 g
--
180 g Color Material Plug connection Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant acc. to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Attachment of the antenna Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Approx. weight without antenna cable with antenna cable
(3.0 m) 1) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 202 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings 6.7 Dimensional drawings The cable length is 3 m. All dimensions are in mm. ANT 1 Figure 6-7 Dimension drawing for ANT 1 ANT 3 / ANT 3S Figure 6-8 Dimension drawing ANT 3 7 ANT 3S SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 203 Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings ANT 8 Figure 6-9 Dimension drawing for ANT 8 Figure 6-10 Dimension drawing for ANT 12 ANT 12 ANT 18 Figure 6-11 Dimension drawing for ANT 18 204 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ANT 30 Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings Figure 6-12 Dimension drawing for ANT 30 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 205 Antennas 6.7 Dimensional drawings 206 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder Features of the RF300 transponders 7 The RF300 transponders (RF3xxT) stand out particularly for their extremely fast data exchange with the RF300 readers (RF3xxR). With the exception of the RF320T transponder, all of the RF300 transponders have 8 to 64 KB of FRAM memory, which has an almost unlimited capacity for reading and writing. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 207 RF300 transponder 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 1) Physically identical memory When the OTP area is used, the corresponding user area (FF00-FF13) can no longer be modified (read only). Figure 7-1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders 208 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x EEPROM area RF300 transponder 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders The memory configuration of an RF300 transponder always comprises an EEPROM that has 20 bytes for user data (read/write) and a 4-byte unique serial number (UID, read only). For reasons of standardization, the UID is transferred as an 8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8. The unused 4 high bytes are filled with zeros. Note Write speed The EEPROM user memory (address FF00-FF13, or FF80-FF90) requires significantly more time for writing (approx. 11 ms/byte) than the high-speed FRAM memory. For time-critical applications with write functions, it is advisable to use FRAM transponders (e.g. RF330T, RF340T, RF350T, RF360T, RF370T, RF380T). FRAM area OTP area Depending on the tag type, high-speed FRAM memory is available. (8 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB). This area does not exist for the RF320T. In the case of RF3xxT transponders with FRAM memory, the data carrier initialization command (INIT) is only effective on this memory area but not on the EEPROM area (FF00-
FF13). The EEPROM memory area (address FF00-FF13) can also be used as a so-called "OTP"
memory (One Time Programmable). The 5 block addresses FF80, FF84, FF88, FF8C and FF90 are used for this purpose. A write command to this block address with a valid length (4, 8, 12, 16, 20 depending on the block address) protects the written data from subsequent overwriting. Note Seamless use of the OTP area When the OTP area is used, it must be ensured that the blocks are used starting from Block 0 consecutively. Examples:
3 blocks (with write command), Block 0, 1, 2 (FF80, length = 12): valid 2 blocks (consecutive), Block 0 (FF80, length =4), Block 1 (FF84, length = 4): valid 2 blocks (consecutive), Block 0 (FF80, length =4), Block 2 (FF88, length = 4): Invalid 1 Block, Block 4 (FF90, length = 4): Invalid SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 209 RF300 transponder 7.1 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders Note Use of the OTP area is not reversible If you use the OPT area, you cannot undo it, because the OPT area can only be written to once. 210 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T 7.2.1 RF320T Features Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 20 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of RF300 transponders
(Page 49) Yes, with spacer IP67/IPx9K 7.2.2 Ordering data Table 7- 1 Ordering data RF320T RF320T Table 7- 2 Ordering data for RF320T accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2800-1CA00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 211 RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T 7.2.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 15 mm h Figure 7-2 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 7-3 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer 212 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 7.2.4 Technical data Table 7- 3 Technical specifications for RF320T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply SIMATIC RF320T 6GT2800-1CA00 Byte-oriented, write protection possible in 4-byte blocks 4 bytes EEPROM 20 bytes EEPROM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1014
> 105
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1800 years Epoxy resin Black 20 mm Inductive, without battery SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 213 6GT2800-1CA00
-25 to +125 RF300 transponder 7.2 SIMATIC RF320T Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting
-40 to +140 IP67 IPx9K 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1.0 Nm Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 7.2.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-4 RF320T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 214 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T 7.3.1 Features Table 7- 4 RF330T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T In production automation for identification of metallic workpiece holders, workpieces or containers. 32 KB EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of RF300 transpond-
ers (Page 49)"
Yes flush mounted on/in metal IP68/IPx9K 7.3.2 Ordering data Table 7- 5 Ordering data RF330T RF330T Article number 6GT2800-5BA00 Table 7- 6 Ordering data for RF330T accessories Fixing hood RF330T / MDS D423 Article number 6GT2690-0EA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 215 RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T 7.3.3 Mounting on/in metal Direct mounting of the RF330T on metal is permitted. Mounting of the RF330T on metal Figure 7-5 Mounting of the RF330T on metal Flush-mounting of RF330T in metal 10 mm a Figure 7-6 Mounting of the RF330T in metal with 10 mm clearance 216 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T Figure 7-7 Mounting of the RF330T in metal without clearance Note Reduction of the write/read range Note that when the device is flush-mounted in metal without a surrounding clearance 10 mm, the write/read range is significantly reduced. 7.3.4 Technical specifications Table 7- 7 RF330T technical specifications Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC RF330T 6GT2800-5BA00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1014
> 1014
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1200 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 217 RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Pressure resistance 6GT2800-5BA00 Plastic PPS Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 m, 20 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C Low pressure resistant vacuum dryer: up to 20 mbar high pressure resistant (see degree of protec-
tion IPx9K) Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 30 x 8 mm 10 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 218 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.3.5 Dimension drawing RF300 transponder 7.3 SIMATIC RF330T Figure 7-8 RF330T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 219 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.1 Features Table 7- 8 RF340T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection 7.4.2 Ordering data Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 8 KB FRAM user memory 32 KB FRAM user memory See section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 49) Yes IP68/IPx9K Table 7- 9 Ordering data RF340T RF340T 8 KB FRAM user memory RF340T 32 KB FRAM user memory Article number 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 220 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF340T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF340T on metal Figure 7-9 Mounting of RF340T on metal Flush-mounting of RF340T in metal:
Figure 7-10 Flush-mounting of RF340T in metal The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 221 RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 7.4.4 Technical specifications Table 7- 10 Technical specifications for RF340T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC RF340T 6GT2800-4BB00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +85 IP68 IPx9K 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 222 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting RF300 transponder 7.4 SIMATIC RF340T 6GT2800-4BB00 48 x 25 x 15 mm 25 g 2 x M3 screws 1.0 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.4.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-11 RF340T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 223 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Features 7.5.1 RF350T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 32 KB FRAM user memory See section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 49) Yes IP68 7.5.2 Ordering data Table 7- 11 Ordering data RF350T Memory size: 32 KB FRAM (read/write) and 4 bytes EEPROM (read IP68 only) Article number 6GT2800-5BD00 Operating temperature: -25 C to +85 C Dimensions: 50 x 50 x 20 (L x W x H, in mm) incl. securing frame 7.5.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF350T on metal is permitted. 224 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mounting of RF350T on metal RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Figure 7-12 Mounting of RF350T on metal Flush-mounting of RF350T in metal:
Figure 7-13 RF350T flush-mounted in metal The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 225 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T 7.5.4 Mounting options Mounting with fixing frame The RF350T transponder can be mounted as shown with the fixing frame:
Figure 7-14 Installation diagram Dimensions of the fixing frame Figure 7-15 RF350T fixing frame 226 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.5.5 Technical data Table 7- 12 Technical specifications for RF350T RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC RF350T 6GT2800-5BD00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +85 IP68 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 227 RF300 transponder 7.5 SIMATIC RF350T Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2800-5BD00 50 x 50 x 20 mm 25 g 2 x M4 screws 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.5.6 Dimension drawing Figure 7-16 RF350T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm 228 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Features 7.6.1 RF360T Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on small assembly lines in harsh industrial environments 8 KB FRAM user memory 32 KB FRAM user memory see section Field data of RF300 tran-
sponders (Page 49) Yes, with spacer IP67 7.6.2 Ordering data Table 7- 13 Ordering data RF360T RF360T 8 KB FRAM user memory RF360T 32 KB FRAM user memory Table 7- 14 Ordering data for RF360T accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Article number 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 7.6.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF360T on metal is not allowed. A distance 20 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 229 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Mounting of RF360T on metal Figure 7-17 Mounting of RF360T with spacer The standard value for h is 20 mm. Flush-mounting of RF360T in metal:
Figure 7-18 Flush-mounting of RF360T with spacer The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. 230 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T Dimensions of spacer and fixing pocket for RF360T Figure 7-19 Dimensions of spacer and fixing pocket for RF360T SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 231 RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T 7.6.4 Technical data Table 7- 15 Technical specifications for RF360T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC RF360T 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 8 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1200 years Epoxy resin Anthracite 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +75
-40 to +85 IP67 50 g 20 g Not permitted 232 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.6 SIMATIC RF360T 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 86 x 55 x 2.5 mm 25 g 2 x M3 screws 1.0 Nm Fixing pocket (6GT2190-0AB00) 7.6.5 Dimension drawing Figure 7-20 RF360T dimension drawing Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 233 RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7.1 Features RF370T The SIMATIC RF370T transponder is a passive (i.e. battery-free) data carrier in a square type of construction. Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks on assembly lines in harsh industrial environments, due to high resistance to oils, lubricants and cleaning agents, and suitable for larger ranges, e.g. automotive industry 32 KB FRAM user memory 64 KB FRAM user memory see section Field data of RF300 transpond-
ers (Page 49) Yes IP68/IPx9K 7.7.2 Ordering data Table 7- 16 Ordering data RF370T RF370T 32 KB FRAM user memory RF370T 76 KB FRAM user memory Article number 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 234 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the RF370T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF370T on metal Figure 7-21 Mounting of RF370T on metal Flush-mounting of RF370T in metal:
Figure 7-22 RF370T flush-mounted in metal The standard value for a is 20 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 235 RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 7.7.4 Mounting instructions It is essential that you observe the instructions in the Section Installation guidelines
(Page 62). Properties Type of installation Tightening torque Description Screw fixing (two M5 screws)
< 1.2 Nm (at room temperature) 7.7.5 Technical specifications Table 7- 17 Technical specifications RF370T Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply SIMATIC RF370T 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 or 64 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1200 years Plastic PA 12 Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery 236 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.7 SIMATIC RF370T 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation
-25 to +85 During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting
-40 to +85 IPx9K 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 75 x 75 x 41 mm 200 g 2 x M5 screws 1.5 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 7.7.6 Dimensional drawing Figure 7-23 RF370T dimension drawing SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 237 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Dimensions in mm 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.1 Features The SIMATIC RF380T transponder is an extremely rugged and heat-resistant round data carrier suitable e.g. for applications in the automotive industry. SIMATIC RF380T transponder Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal Degree of protection Identification tasks in applications (e.g. automotive industry) with cyclic high temperature stress > 85 C and < 220 C Highly resistant to mineral oils, lubricants and cleaning agents Typical applications:
Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85C Other applications with higher temperatures 32 KB FRAM user memory see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal IP68 7.8.2 Ordering data Table 7- 18 Ordering data RF380T RF380T User memory 32 KB FRAM (read/write) and 4 bytes EEPROM Article number 6GT2800-5DA00 238 Table 7- 19 Ordering data for RF380T Holder (short version) Holder (long version) Shrouding cover Universal holder Article number 6GT2090-0QA00 6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3 6GT2090-0QB00 6GT2590-0QA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.3 Installation guidelines for RF380T It is essential that you observe the instructions in the Section Installation guidelines
(Page 62). The following section only deals with features specific to the SIMATIC RF380T. 7.8.3.1 Mounting instructions Note Only use tag with original holder You are strongly recommended to only use the tag with the original holder specified. Only this holder guarantees that the data memory observes the listed values for shock, vibration and temperature. A protective cover is recommendable for applications in paint shops. Data memory holder Short version (6GT2 090-0QA00) Long version (6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3) Material: V2A sheet-steel with thickness 2.5 mm BI 2.5 DIN 59382 1.4541 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 239 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Assembly of data memory with holder Figure 7-24 Assembly of tag with holder Scope of supply The holder is provided with all mounting parts and a mounting diagram. Mounting screws for securing the holder are not included. The mounting screws are of diameter M 10. The minimum length is 25 mm. The optional cover can be used for the long and short versions of the holder. 240 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Universal holder RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Figure 7-25 Universal holder 6GT2590-0QA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 241 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.3.2 Metal-free area Direct mounting of the RF380T on metal is permitted. Mounting of RF380T on metal Figure 7-26 Mounting of RF380T on metal Flush-mounting of RF380T in metal:
Figure 7-27 RF380T flush-mounted in metal The standard value for a is 40 mm. At lower values, the field data change significantly, resulting in a reduction in the range. 242 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.8.4 Configuring instructions RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.4.1 Temperature dependence of the transmission window The guidelines in the section "Planning the RF300 system" apply to configuration of heat-
resistant data memories, with the exception of the limit distance and field length at temperatures above 85 C. At temperatures above 85 C, the length of the transmission window is reduced by up to 10%. 7.8.4.2 Temperature response in cyclic operation At ambient temperatures (Tu) up to 110 C, cyclic operation is not necessary, i.e. up to this temperature, the transponder can be in constant operation. Note Calculation of the temperature curves Calculation of the temperature curves or of a temperature profile can be carried out on request by Siemens AG. Exact knowledge of the internal temperature facilitates configuration for time-critical applications. You can also carry out the calculation with the aid of the "SIMATIC RF Temperature Calculator" on the "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" DVD (refer to the section
"DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" (Page 416)"). Ambient temperatures > 110 C Note Cancellation of warranty The internal temperature of the data memory must not exceed the critical threshold of 110 C. Each heating phase must be followed by a cooling phase. No warranty claims will otherwise be accepted. Some limit cycles are listed in the table below:
Table 7- 20 Limit cycles of data memory temperature Tu (heating up) Heating up Tu (cooling down) Cooling down 220 C 200 C 190 C 180 C 170 C 0.5 h 1 h 1 h 2 h 2 h 25 C 25 C 25 C 25 C 25 C
> 2 h
> 2 h
> 1 h 45 min
> 5 h
> 4 h SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 243 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T The internal temperature of the tag follows an exponential function with which the internal temperature and the operability of the tag can be calculated in advance. This is particularly relevant to temperature-critical applications or those with a complex temperature profile. Ambient temperatures > 220C Note Cancellation of warranty The data memory must not be exposed to ambient temperatures > 220 C. No warranty claims will otherwise be accepted. However, the mechanical stability is retained up to 230 C!
Example of a cyclic sequence Table 7- 21 Typical temperature profile of an application in the paint shop Start of tag at initial point Electrolytic dip Electrolytic dip dryer Transport PVC dryer Transport Filler dryer Transport Top coat dryer Transport Wax dryer Transport Duration (min) 20 60 60 25 60 60 60 60 60 25 150 Ambient temperature (C) 30 200 25 170 25 160 25 120 25 100 25 244 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Figure 7-28 Graphic trend of temperature profile from above table The simulation results in the following:
Following a simulation time of 36.5 hours, a total of 3 cycles were carried out, and an internal temperature of 90 degrees Celsius was reached. Figure 7-29 Complete temperature response due to simulation SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 245 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 7.8.5 Use of the transponder in the Ex protection area The TV SD Automotive GmbH as approved test center as well as the TV SD Product Service GmbH as certification center, identification number 0123, as per Article 9 of the Directive of the European Council of 23 March 1994 (94/9/EC), has confirmed the compliance with the essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas as per Annex II of the Directive. The essential health and safety requirements are satisfied in accordance with the following standards:
Table 7- 22 Approvals Document EN 60079-0: 2006 EN 60079-15: 2005 DIN VDE 0848-5: 2001
(in parts) ZLS SK 107.1 Title Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 0: General requirements Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres -
Part 15: Design, testing and identification of electrical equipment with type of protection "n"
Safety in electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields -
Part 5: Explosion protection Central office of the states for safety; test components Identification Table 7- 23 The identification of the electrical equipment as an encapsulated unit II 3G Ex nC IIB T5
-25C to +70C Um=30Vdc The equipment is assigned the following references:
XXXYYYZZZ TPS 09 ATEX 1 459 X
"No use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges"
[= serial number, is assigned during production]
[= certificate number]
7.8.5.1 Use of the transponder in hazardous areas for gases Temperature class delineation for gases The temperature class of the transponder for hazardous areas depends on the ambient temperature range:
Ambient temperature range
-25 C to +70 C Temperature class T5 246 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T WARNING Ignitions of gas-air mixtures When using the RF380T transponder, check that the temperature class is kept to in conjunction with the requirements of the area of application. If the temperature ranges are exceeded during use of the transponder, gas-air mixtures may be ignited. The maximum transmit power of the transmitter used to operate the transponder must not exceed 2 W. If the transmit power id not kept to, gas-air mixtures may ignite. 7.8.5.2 Installation and operating conditions for the hazardous area a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. 7.8.6 Cleaning the mobile data memory Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter Chemical resistance of the transponders (Page 90). 7.8.7 Technical specifications Table 7- 24 RF380T technical specifications Product type designation Memory Memory organization Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory SIMATIC RF380T 6GT2800-5DA00 in bytes 4 bytes EEPROM 32 KB FRAM 20 bytes EEPROM SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 247 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation 6GT2800-5DA00
> 1010
> 1010
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of RF300 transponders (Page 49)"
1177 years PPS Anthracite 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +110
-25 +220 : cyclic operation possible
-40 to +110 IP68 50 g 1)2) 5 g 2) Not permitted During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7 M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) Applies only in conjunction with the original support 2) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 114 x 83 mm 900 g Holder (must be ordered separately) 248 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 7.8.8 Dimensional drawing RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T Figure 7-30 Dimension drawing RF380T Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 249 RF300 transponder 7.8 SIMATIC RF380T 250 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder Features of the ISO transponders 8 The transponders (MDS D) that are compatible with ISO 15693 represent a cost-effective alternative to RF300 transponders. The performance that can be achieved with this
(transmission speed, memory size), however, is considerably less than with RF300 transponders. You will find more information on transmission speeds in the section "Communication between communications module, reader and transponder (Page 47)". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 251 ISO transponder 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders Figure 8-1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders 252 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Memory areas OTP area ISO transponder 8.1 Memory configuration of ISO the transponders Depending on the manufacturer of the transponder chip, the memory configuration of an ISO transponder consists of varying sizes of user memory. The typical sizes are 112 bytes, 256 bytes, 992 bytes EEPROM or 2000 bytes FRAM. Each ISO transponder chip has an 8-byte long unique serial number (UID, read only). This UID is transferred as an 8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8. For the OTP area, a 16-byte address space is always reserved at the end of the memory area. The blocks are divided up depending on the chip (see technical specifications). Note that the corresponding addresses for the user data are therefore not available to the application when the OTP area is used. A total of 4 block addresses ("mapped" addresses) are provided:
FF80 FF84 FF88 FF8C A write command to this block address with a valid length (4, 8, 12, 16 bytes depending on the block address) protects the written data from subsequent overwriting. Note Exception Fujitsu chip (MDS D4xx and MDS D522) The Fujitsu chip MB89R118 (MDS D4xx) has 8-byte blocks, which means that only 2 block addresses have to be addressed: FF80 and FF88 with the length 8 and 16 bytes). The Fujitsu chip MB89R112 (MDS D5xx) has 32 byte blocks and can therefore not be addressed in the OTP area. Note Restriction to the use of the OTP Observe the following restrictions when using OTP:
The OTP write/lock command can only be sent in static operation. The OTP write/lock command can not be sent as a chained command. The Fujitsu chip MB89R112 (MDS D5xx) has 32 byte blocks and can therefore not be addressed in the OTP area. Note Use of the OTP area is not reversible If you use the OPT area, you cannot undo it, because the OPT area can only be written to once. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 253 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 8.2 MDS D100 Characteristics 8.2.1 MDS D100 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders
(MDS D) (Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 8.2.2 Ordering data Table 8- 1 Ordering data for MDS D100 MDS D100 Table 8- 2 Ordering data for MDS D100 accessory Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2600-0AD10 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 8.2.3 Metal-free area Direct mounting of the MDS D100 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 20 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00. 254 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 20 mm Data memory h Metal Figure 8-2 Mounting of the MDS D100 on metal with spacer Non-metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 255 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 Flush-mounting 20 mm 20 mm Data memory a h Metal Figure 8-3 Non-metal Flush-mounting of MDS D100 in metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h or a) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. 8.2.4 Technical data Table 8- 3 Technical specifications for MDS D100 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory SIMATIC MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM) 256 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD10
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PC White/petrol 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +80
-25 to +80 IP68 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85.6 x 54 x 0.9 mm 5 g Fixing pocket Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 257 ISO transponder 8.2 MDS D100 8.2.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Dimensions for mounting holes 1) Figure 8-4 MDS D100 dimension drawing 258 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.3 MDS D117 Features 8.3.1 MDS D117 8.3.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection Very compact data carrier that can be cemented into objects where precise positioning is necessary;
e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders etc.. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)."
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 4 Ordering data for MDS D117 MDS D117 Pack of 10 Article number 6GT2600-0AG00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 259 ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 8.3.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounted in metal Transponder Metal 8.3.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 5 Technical specifications for MDS D117 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D117 6GT2600-0AG00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years 260 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.3 MDS D117 6GT2600-0AG00 PPS Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 4 x 5.2 mm 1 g Fixing pocket Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 8.3.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-5 Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 261 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 8.4 MDS D124 8.4.1 MDS D124 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Application areas in production automation (e.g. small paintshops up to +180 C) 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)". Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.4.2 Ordering data Table 8- 6 Ordering data for MDS D124 MDS D124 Table 8- 7 Ordering data for MDS D124 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-0AC10 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 262 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.4.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 15 mm h Figure 8-6 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-7 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 263 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.4.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 8 Technical specifications for MDS D124 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation SIMATIC MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PPS Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +180 from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance from +140 : No processing possible SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 264 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC10 at +180 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 3000 cycles During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 4 x 5.2 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued With spacer 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.4.5 Use of the MDS D124 in hazardous area The mobile data memory MDS D124, device group II, category 1G or 1D may be installed and operated in zones 0, 1 and 2 or in the zones 20, 21 and 22. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2009 EN 60079-11:2007 EN 61241-11:2006 EN 60079-26:2007 When used in hazardous areas, the MDS D124 must not be operated with field strengths > 5 A / m to avoid impermissible heating. This is not the case with readers from the SIMATIC RF range (MOBY D, RF200 and RF300). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 265 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Identification II 1 G Ex ia IIC T3 to T6 Ga or II 1 D Ex ia IIIC T80 C to T180 C Da TV 12 ATEX 084413 X The temperature class or the maximum surface temperature depends on the maximum ambient temperature. The relationship between temperature class (gas) or maximum surface temperature (dust) can be found in the following table. Table 8- 9 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature range Temperature class Max. surface temperature
-25 ... +150
-25 ... +100
-25 ... +65
-25 ... +50 T3 T4 T5 T6 T180 T130 T95 T80 Note Safety markings for hazardous areas Since there is not enough space on the MDS D124 for the safety mark, this is supplied as a label with the device. This must be affixed immediately next to the MDS D124 so that the label clearly relates to the device. WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 266 ISO transponder 8.4 MDS D124 Note Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
Use of the device in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. The device must be installed so that it is mechanically protected. For applications requiring devices of category 1, the device must be mounted on a grounded, conductive base. It must only be cleaned with a damp cloth. The device is suitable for use in atmospheres containing dust, however not for full immersion in dust. 8.4.6 Dimension drawing Figure 8-8 Dimension drawing of MDS D124 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 267 ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 8.5 MDS D126 8.5.1 MDS D126 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be deployed in harsh conditions 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52) Yes, with spacer ISO-15693 IP68 8.5.2 Ordering data Table 8- 10 Ordering data for MDS D126 MDS D126 Table 8- 11 Ordering data for MDS D126 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-0AE00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 268 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.5.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 h 25 mm Figure 8-9 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer Flush-mounted in metal h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-10 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 269 ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 8.5.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 12 Technical specifications for the MDS D126 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC MDS D126 6GT2600-0AE00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PA6.6 GF Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 270 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.5 MDS D126 6GT2600-0AE00 50 x 3.6 mm 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.5.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-11 Dimension drawing of MDS D126 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 271 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Very compact data carrier that can be screwed into areas where precise positioning is necessary;
e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders etc. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 8.6 MDS D127 Features 8.6.1 MDS D127 8.6.2 Ordering data Table 8- 13 Ordering data for MDS D127 MDS D127 Pack of 10
(A screw-in aid is supplied with each pack) Article number 6GT2600-0AF00 272 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.6.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounted in metal ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 Metal Transponders Note Damage to the transponder due to improper mounting To screw the MDS D127 into a suitable thread, use the supplied screw-in tool. This avoids damage to the MDS D127. Figure 8-12 Screw-in aid for mounting the MDS D127 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 273 ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 8.6.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 14 Technical specifications for MDS D127 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC MDS D127 6GT2600-0AF00 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PA6 Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +100
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 274 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.6 MDS D127 6GT2600-0AF00 M6 x 5.8 mm 1 g Glued 1 x M3 screw 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 8.6.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-13 Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 275 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7 MDS D139 Characteristics 8.7.1 MDS D139 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Applications in production logistics and in assembly lines subject to high temperatures (up to +220 C) Typical application areas:
Paintshops and their preparatory treatments) Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85 C Other applications with higher temperatures 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 276 Note Compatibility with SIMATIC RF300 depending on the article number The transponder MDS D139 with article number 6GT2600-0AA10 is compatible with the SIMATIC RF300 system. The transponder MDS D139 with article number 6GT2600-0AA00 is not compatible. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.2 Ordering data Table 8- 15 Ordering data for MDS D139 MDS D139 Table 8- 16 Ordering data for MDS D139 accessory Spacer Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 47 mm Article number 6GT2600-0AA10 Article number 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 8.7.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the MDS D139/D339 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 30 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using spacers (see "Ordering data (Page 423)"). Mounting on metal 30 mm h Figure 8-14 Mounting the MDS D139/D339 on metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 277 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 Flush-mounting It is possible to mount the MDS D139/D339 in metal. With large antennas, for example ANT D5, this leads to a reduction of ranges. 30 mm 100 mm h a Figure 8-15 Flush-mounting of the MDS D139/D339 in metal with spacer Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. Cleaning the mobile data memory Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter Chemical resistance of the transponders (Page 90). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.7.4 278 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 17 Technical specifications for MDS D139 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation SIMATIC MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PPS Black 30 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +220 from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance from +140 : No processing possible at +200 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 6000 cycles at +220 : Tested up to 2000 hours or 2000 cycles During transportation and storage
-40 to +100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 279 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-0AA10 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 85 x 15 mm 50 g 1 x M5 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damag-
ing the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient). 8.7.6 Use of the MDS D139 in hazardous areas The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-15:2005 EN 61241-0:2006 EN 61241-1:2004 Identification II 3 G Ex nA II T2 II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP68 T 220C KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X Ta: -25 ... +220C 280 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques Note Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen fr den Ex-Schutzbereich:
a) Der Einsatz des Gertes in der Nhe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist untersagt. b) Das Gert ist mechanisch geschtzt zu montieren. c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen. d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface. d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex :
a) L'utilisation de l'appareil prs de processus gnrant de fortes charges est interdite. b) L'appareil doit tre mont de manire tre protg mcaniquement. c) Le montage doit tre effectu sur un socle conducteur mis la terre. d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 281 ISO transponder 8.7 MDS D139 8.7.7 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D139 Figure 8-16 Dimensional drawing of MDS D139 Dimensions in mm 282 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.8 MDS D160 8.8.1 MDS D160 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Thanks to its rugged packaging, the MDS D160 is a transponder that can be used under extreme environmental conditions. It is washable, heat-resistant and resistant to all chemicals generally used in the laundry process. Typical applications are, for example:
Rented work clothing Hotel laundry Surgical textiles Hospital clothing Dirt collection mats Clothing for nursing homes/hostels 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.8.2 Information for RF300 compatibility Note Compatibility with SIMATIC RF300 depending on MLFB number Only the MDS D160 with MLFB 6GT2600-0AB10 is compatible with SIMATIC RF300. 8.8.3 Ordering data Table 8- 18 Ordering data for MDS D160 MDS D160 Article number 6GT2600-0AB10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 283 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Table 8- 19 Ordering data for MDS D160 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2690-0AG00 8.8.4 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Transponder Metal carrier h Figure 8-17 Mounting the MDS D160 on metal with spacer Spacer 10 mm Note Going below the minimum distance (h) If the minimum distance (h) is not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting Flush-mounting of the MDS D160 in metal is not permitted!
284 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 8.8.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 20 Technical specifications for the MDS D160 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature In operation, during write/read access In operation, outside write/read access SIMATIC MDS D160 6GT2600-0AB10 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PPS beige 10 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 +85 C
-40 +175 C from +125 : for 1000 hours, 20% reduction of the limit distance from +140 : No processing possible at +175 : 100 washing cycles tested at +220 : Tested once for up to 30 seconds During transportation and storage
-25 to +100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 285 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Mechanical strength Isostatic pressure Axial pressure Radial pressure Resistance to chemicals MDS lifespan Degree of protection Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-0AB10 300 bar for 5 min 1000 N for 10 s 1000 N for 10 s All chemicals normally used in the washing pro-
cess At least 100 wash cycles IP68 24 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K 40 g 1) 18 ms; 6 axes; 2000 repetitions/h 10 g 1) 10 to 2000 Hz; 3 axes; 2.5 h Not permitted 16 x 3 mm 1.2 g Patched Sewn in Glued 1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. Note Regeneration time between washing cycles The regeneration time for the MDS D160 between washing cycles must be at least 24 hours. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 286 8.8.6 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D160 ISO transponder 8.8 MDS D160 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-18 Dimensional drawing of MDS D160 Dimensional drawing of spacer Dimensions in mm Figure 8-19 Dimensional drawing of spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 287 ISO transponder 8.9 MDS D165 8.9 MDS D165 8.9.1 Features MDS D165 (special version) Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identifi-
cation. 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP65 8.9.2 Ordering data Table 8- 21 Ordering data for MDS D165 MDS D165 (special version ISO-CARD) Article number 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) 288 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.9.3 Technical data Table 8- 22 Technical specifications for MDS D165 ISO transponder 8.9 MDS D165 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature In operation, during write/read access In operation, outside write/read access SIMATIC MDS D165 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Depending on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided trans-
fer adhesive on sili-
con paper Top Inlay Antenna Bottom White 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-5 to +85 C
-25 to +85 During transportation and storage
+15 to +30 Degree of protection IP65 Can be stored for 2 years, determined by the durability of the adhesive. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 289 ISO transponder 8.9 MDS D165 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 86 x 54 x 0.3 mm 1 g Glued with self-adhesive label 8.9.4 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-20 Dimension drawing of MDS D165 290 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.10 MDS D200 Features 8.10.1 MDS D200 ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection From simple identification such as elec-
tronic barcode replace-
ment/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transpond-
ers (MDS D) (Page 52). Yes, with spacer 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology IP67 8.10.2 Ordering data Table 8- 23 Ordering data for MDS D200 MDS D200 (special version ISO-CARD) Article number 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 Table 8- 24 Ordering data for MDS D200 accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 291 ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 8.10.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 20 mm Data memory h Metal Figure 8-21 Mounting of the MDS D200 on metal with spacer Non-metal 292 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 20 mm 20 mm Data memory a h Metal Figure 8-22 Flush-mounting of MDS D200 in metal with spacer Non-metal Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. 8.10.4 Technical data Table 8- 25 Technical specifications for MDS D200 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory SIMATIC MDS D200 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 8 bytes 256 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 293 ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 Read cycles (at < 25 ) Write cycles (at < 25 ) Data retention time (at < 25 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PET White 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-20 to +60
-20 to +60 IP67 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85 x 54 x 0.8 mm 5 g Fixing pocket Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 294 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.10.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.10 MDS D200 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-23 Dimension drawing of MDS D200 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 295 ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 8.11 MDS D261 Features 8.11.1 MDS D261 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identifi-
cation. 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP65 8.11.2 Ordering data Table 8- 26 Ordering data for MDS D261 MDS D261 Article number 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) 296 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.11.3 Technical data Table 8- 27 Technical specifications of MDS D261 ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature In operation, during write/read access In operation, outside write/read access SIMATIC MDS D261 6GT2600-1AA01-0AX0 8 bytes 256 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided trans-
fer adhesive on sili-
con paper Top Inlay Antenna Bottom White 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-5 to +85 C
-25 to +85 During transportation and storage
+15 to +30 Degree of protection IP65 Can be stored for 2 years, determined by the durability of the adhesive SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 297 ISO transponder 8.11 MDS D261 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-1AA01-0AX0 55 x 55 x 0.3 mm 1 g Glued with self-adhesive label 8.11.4 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-24 Dimension drawing of MDS D261 298 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.12 MDS D324 Characteristics 8.12.1 MDS D324 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Production and distribution logistics and product identification Can also be used in harsh environ-
ments under extreme environmental conditions (e.g. with higher temperature load). 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section "Field data of ISO tran-
sponders (MDS D) (Page 52)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K 8.12.2 Ordering data Table 8- 28 Ordering data MDS D324 MDS D324 Table 8- 29 Ordering data MDS D324 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-3AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 299 ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 8.12.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 15 mm h Figure 8-25 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-26 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer 300 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.12.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 30 Technical specifications of MDS D324 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage SIMATIC MDS D324 6GT2600-3AC00 8 bytes 992 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +125
-40 to +140 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 301 6GT2600-3AC00 ISO transponder 8.12 MDS D324 Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting IP67 IPx9K 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm Glued 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.12.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-27 Dimension drawing of MDS D324 All dimensions in mm 302 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x
1 2 | Users manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
8.13 MDS D339 8.13.1 MDS D339 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Applications in production automation with high temperature demands (up to +220 C) Typical application areas:
Paintshops and their preparatory treatments Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85 C Other applications with higher temperatures 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.13.2 Ordering data Table 8- 31 Ordering data for MDS D339 MDS D339 Table 8- 32 Ordering data for MDS D339 accessories Spacer Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder
( x H): 22 x 47 mm Article number 6GT2600-3AA10 Article number 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 303 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.3 Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the MDS D139/D339 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 30 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using spacers (see "Ordering data (Page 303)"). Mounting on metal 30 mm h Figure 8-28 Mounting the MDS D139/D339 on metal with spacer Flush-mounting It is possible to mount the MDS D139/D339 in metal. With large antennas, for example ANT D5, this leads to a reduction of ranges. 30 mm 100 mm h a Figure 8-29 Flush-mounting of the MDS D139/D339 in metal with spacer 304 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.13.4 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. Cleaning the mobile data memory Note Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the cleaning agents listed in the section "Chemical resistance of the MDS". 8.13.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 33 Technical specifications of MDS D339 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D339 6GT2600-3AA10 8 bytes 992 bytes EEPROM 16 bytes (EEPROM)
> 1014
> 106
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 305 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation 6GT2600-3AA10 PPS Black 30 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +220 from +125 : 20% reduction in the limit dis-
tance from +140 : No processing possible at +200 : Tested up to 5000 hours or 6000 cycles During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting at +220 : Tested up to 2000 hours or 2000 cycles
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 85 x 15 mm 50 g 1 x M5 screw 2) 1.5 Nm 1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damag-
ing the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient). 306 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 8.13.6 Use of the MDS D339 in hazardous areas The MDS D339 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G. The following requirements of the 94/9/EC directive are met:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-15:2005 EN 61241-0:2006 EN 61241-1:2004 Identification II 3 G Ex nA II T6 Ii 3 D Ex tD A22 IP68 T 210C KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges lectrostatiques SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 307 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Note Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen fr den Ex-Schutzbereich:
a) Der Einsatz des Gertes in der Nhe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist untersagt. b) Das Gert ist mechanisch geschtzt zu montieren. c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen. d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface. d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex :
a) L'utilisation de l'appareil prs de processus gnrant de fortes charges est interdite. b) L'appareil doit tre mont de manire tre protg mcaniquement. c) Le montage doit tre effectu sur un socle conducteur mis la terre. d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide 308 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.13.7 Dimensional drawing MDS D339 ISO transponder 8.13 MDS D339 Figure 8-30 Dimension drawing of the MDS D339 Dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 309 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 8.14 MDS D400 Features 8.14.1 MDS D400 Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Simple identification such as electronic barcode re-
placement/supplements, from warehouse and distribu-
tion logistics right through to product identification. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)"
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67 8.14.2 Ordering data Table 8- 34 Ordering data of MDS D400 MDS D400 Table 8- 35 Ordering data of MDS D400 accessories Spacer
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Fixing pocket
(not suitable for fixing directly onto metal) Article number 6GT2600-4AD00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 310 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.14.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal It is possible to mount the MDS D400 on metal. ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 20 mm Transponder h Metal Figure 8-31 Mounting of the MDS D400 on metal with spacer Non-metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 311 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 Flush-mounted in metal 20 mm 20 mm Transponder a h Metal Figure 8-32 Flush-mounting of MDS D400 in metal with spacer Non-metal Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, this will result in a reduction of the field data. 8.14.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 36 Technical specifications for MDS D400 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory SIMATIC MDS D400 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 8 bytes 256 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM 312 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Read cycles (at < 25 ) Write cycles (at < 25 ) Data retention time (at < 25 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years PVC White 20 mm Inductive, without battery
-20 to +60
-20 to +60 IP67 ISO 10373 / ISO 7810 1) ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 85 x 54 x 0.8 mm 5 g Fixing lug Glued 1) The values for vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 313 ISO transponder 8.14 MDS D400 8.14.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-33 Dimensional drawing MDS D400 (dimensions in mm) 314 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.15 MDS D421 8.15.1 MDS D421 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.15.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 The MDS D421 is designed for tool coding in accordance with DIN 69873. It can be used wherever small data carriers and exact posi-
tioning are required, e.g. tool identification, workpiece hold-
ers. The rugged housing of the MDS D421 means that it can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without prob-
lems. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K Table 8- 37 Ordering data of MDS D421 MDS D421 Article number 6GT2600-4AE00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 315 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 8.15.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Figure 8-34 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 on metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-35 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal 316 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Flush-mounting of the MDS in metal with tools ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Figure 8-36 Flush-mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal with tools 0.5 x 45 10 (-0.04... -0.13) 4.5 (-0 ... -0.1) b1 d1 t1 All dimensions in mm b2 d2 t2 0.3 x 45 or R0.3 10 (+0.09... 0) 4.6 (+0.2 ... 0) Note Installation instruction The MDS should not protrude out of the locating hole; it must be flush with the outside contour. The mounting instructions of the MDS and the conditions associated with the application
(e.g. peripheral speed, temperature, and use of coolant) must be observed during the installation. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in transponder using your fingers; with antenna side to the outside (see figure above) Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of the transponder in metal with tools SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 317 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 Installation examples Figure 8-37 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a steep cone Figure 8-38 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a stud bolt 8.15.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 38 Technical specifications for the MDS D421 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D421 6GT2600-4AE00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years 318 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 6GT2600-4AE00 Epoxy resin Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The manufacturer's processing instructions must be observed. 10 x 4.5 mm Approx. 1 g Glued2) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 319 ISO transponder 8.15 MDS D421 8.15.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-39 Dimension drawing of MDS D421 All dimensions in mm 320 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.16 MDS D422 8.16.1 MDS D422 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.16.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 Identification of metallic workpiece holders, workpieces or containers 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52). Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 39 Ordering data of MDS D422 MDS D422 A screw-in aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit Article number 6GT2600-4AF00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 321 ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 8.16.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-40 Mounting of MDS D422 in metal Mounting information for screws You can screw the transponder into a pre-drilled threaded hole using the screw-in aid. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in MDS D422 using your fingers; with antenna to the outside Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of MDS D422 in metal with tools 322 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 8.16.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 40 Technical specifications for the MDS D422 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC MDS D422 6GT2600-4AF00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
285 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF; brass nickel plated Black/silver 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 323 ISO transponder 8.16 MDS D422 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AF00 20 x 6 mm 13 g Glued 1 x transponder thread M20 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 8.16.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-41 Dimensional drawing of MDS D422 324 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.17 MDS D423 8.17.1 MDS D423 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.17.2 Ordering data Table 8- 41 Ordering data of MDS D423 MDS D423 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 Identification of metallic workpiece holders, work-
pieces or containers, production automation 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Article number 6GT2600-4AA00 Table 8- 42 Ordering data of MDS D423 accessories Fixing hood RF330T / MDS D423 Article number 6GT2690-0EA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 325 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 8.17.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Direct mounting of the MDS D423 on metal is possible. Figure 8-42 Mounting the MDS D423 on metal Flush-mounted in metal It is possible to mount the MDS D423 in metal. a 10 mm Figure 8-43 Flush-mounting of the MDS D423 in metal with 10 mm clearance 326 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 Figure 8-44 Flush-mounting of the MDS D423 in metal without clearance Note Reduction of the write/read range Note that when the device is flush-mounted in metal without a surrounding clearance 10 mm, the write/read range is significantly reduced. 8.17.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 43 Technical specifications of MDS D423 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D423 6GT2600-4AA00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 327 ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Pressure resistance Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AA00 Plastic PPS Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Low pressure resistant vacuum dryer: up to 20 mbar High pressure resistant
(see degree of protection IPx9K) Not permitted 30 x 8 mm 15 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 328 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.17.5 Dimensional drawing ISO transponder 8.17 MDS D423 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-45 Dimension drawing for MDS D423 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 329 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 8.18 MDS D424 8.18.1 MDS D424 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Production and distribution logistics as well as in assembly and production lines, can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problem 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K 8.18.2 Ordering data Table 8- 44 Ordering data of MDS D424 MDS D424 Table 8- 45 Ordering data of MDS D424 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-4AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 330 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.18.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 15 mm h Figure 8-46 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-47 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 331 ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.18.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 46 Technical specifications for the MDS D424 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply SIMATIC MDS D424 6GT2600-4AC00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 15 mm Inductive, without battery 332 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.18 MDS D424 6GT2600-4AC00
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g Glued 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.18.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-48 Dimension drawing of MDS D424 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 333 ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 8.19 MDS D425 8.19.1 MDS D425 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.19.2 Ordering data Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector; ideal for mounting on motors, gearboxes, and work-
piece holders Rugged packaging of the MDS D425; can therefore also be used under extreme environmental conditions without prob-
lem 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)". Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 47 Ordering data of MDS D425 MDS D425 Article number 6GT2600-4AG00 334 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.19.3 Application example ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 Figure 8-49 Application example 8.19.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 48 Technical specifications for the MDS D425 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D425 6GT2600-4AG00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 335 ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AG00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 24 x 10 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M6 SW 22; 6 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 336 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.19.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.19 MDS D425 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-50 Dimension drawing of MDS D425 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 337 ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 8.20 MDS D426 8.20.1 MDS D426 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be deployed in harsh conditions 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52) Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 8.20.2 Ordering data Table 8- 49 Ordering data of MDS D426 MDS D426 Table 8- 50 Ordering data of MDS D426 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-4AH00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 338 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.20.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 h 25 mm Figure 8-51 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer Flush-mounted in metal h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-52 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 339 ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 8.20.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 51 Technical specifications for the MDS D426 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC MDS D426 6GT2600-4AH00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 340 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.20 MDS D426 6GT2600-4AH00 50 x 3.6 mm 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.20.5 Dimension drawing Dimensions in mm Figure 8-53 Dimension drawing of MDS D426 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 341 ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 8.21 MDS D428 8.21.1 MDS D428 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.21.2 Ordering data Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting. Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector. The rugged housing of the MDS D428 means that it can also be used in extreme environmental conditions without problems. 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)"
Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K Table 8- 52 Ordering data of MDS D428 MDS D428 Article number 6GT2600-4AK00-0AX0 342 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.21.3 Application example ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 Figure 8-54 Application example 8.21.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 53 Technical specifications for the MDS D428 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D428 6GT2600-4AK00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 343 ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AK00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 24 x 20 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M8 SW 22; 8 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 344 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.21.5 Dimension drawing ISO transponder 8.21 MDS D428 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-55 Dimension drawing of MDS D428 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 345 Identification in small assembly lines; can also be used in a harsh in-
dustrial environment 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52). Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 8.22 MDS D460 8.22.1 MDS D460 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.22.2 Ordering data Table 8- 54 Ordering data of MDS D460 MDS D460 Table 8- 55 Ordering data of MDS D460 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-4AB00 Article number 6GT2690-0AG00 346 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.22.3 Mounting on metal Mounting option on metal with spacer ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 Transponder Metal Spacer h 10 mm Figure 8-56 Mounting the MDS D460 on metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting Flush-mounting of the MDS D460 in metal is not permitted!
8.22.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 56 Technical specifications for MDS D460 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory SIMATIC MDS D460 6GT2600-4AB00 8 bytes 2000 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 347 ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-4AB00
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 10 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 16 x 3 mm 3 g Glued With spacer 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 348 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.22.5 Dimension drawings Dimensional drawing of MDS D460 ISO transponder 8.22 MDS D460 Dimensions in mm Figure 8-57 Dimensional drawing of MDS D460 Dimensional drawing of spacer Dimensions in mm Figure 8-58 Dimensional drawing of spacer SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 349 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 8.23 MDS D521 8.23.1 MDS D521 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.23.2 Ordering data The MDS D521 is designed for tool coding according to DIN 69873. It can be used wherever small data carriers and exact positioning are required, e.g. tool identification, workpiece holders. The rugged housing of the MDS D521 means that it can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problems. 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
Yes, flush-mounted in metal ISO 15693 IP67/IPx9K Table 8- 57 Ordering data for MDS D521 MDS D521 Article number 6GT2600-5AE00 8.23.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal Figure 8-59 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 on metal 350 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 Figure 8-60 Mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal Flush-mounting of the MDS in metal with tools Figure 8-61 Flush-mounting of MDS D421/D521/E623 in metal with tools 0.5 x 45 10 (-0.04... -0.13) 4.5 (-0 ... -0.1) b1 d1 t1 All dimensions in mm b2 d2 t2 0.3 x 45 or R0.3 10 (+0.09... 0) 4.6 (+0.2 ... 0) Note Installation instruction The MDS should not protrude out of the locating hole; it must be flush with the outside contour. The mounting instructions of the MDS and the conditions associated with the application
(e.g. peripheral speed, temperature, and use of coolant) must be observed during the installation. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 351 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in transponder using your fingers; with antenna side to the outside (see figure above) Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of the transponder in metal with tools Installation examples Figure 8-62 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a steep cone Figure 8-63 Installation example of MDS D421/D521/E623 in a stud bolt 352 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 8.23.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 58 Technical specifications for MDS D521 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC MDS D521 6GT2600-5AE00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black
> 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP67 IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 353 ISO transponder 8.23 MDS D521 6GT2600-5AE00 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2) The manufacturer's processing instructions must be observed. 10 x 4.5 mm 4 g Glued2) 8.23.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-64 Dimension drawing of MDS D521 All dimensions in mm 354 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.24 MDS D522 8.24.1 MDS D522 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.24.2 Ordering data ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 Identification of metallic workpiece holders, work-
pieces or containers 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)."
Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 59 Ordering data for MDS D522 MDS D522 Units in a package: 10 units A mounting aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit. Article number 6GT2600-5AF00 8.24.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting Figure 8-65 Mounting of MDS D522 in metal SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 355 ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 Mounting information for screws You can screw the transponder into a pre-drilled threaded hole using the screw-in aid. Mounting information for adhesion Drill installation hole The adhesive surfaces must be dry, free from dust, oil, stripping agents and other impurities Apply adhesive according to the manufacturer's processing instructions Press in MDS D522 using your fingers; with antenna to the outside Remove residues of adhesive Allow to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions Flush-mounting of MDS D522 in metal with tools 8.24.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 60 Technical specifications for MDS D522 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply SIMATIC MDS D522 6GT2600-5AF00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
285 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF; brass nickel plated Black/silver 0 mm Inductive, without battery 356 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 ISO transponder 8.24 MDS D522 6GT2600-5AF00
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 20 x 6 mm 13 g Glued 1 x transponder thread M20 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 8.24.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-66 Dimensional drawing of MDS D522 All dimensions in mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 357 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.1 Characteristics MDS D522 special version Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting in metal ISO standard Degree of protection 8.25.2 Ordering data Identification of metallic workpiece holders or work-
pieces 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)."
Yes ISO 15693 IP68 Table 8- 61 MDS D522 special version MDS D522 special version Units in a package: 10 units A mounting aid is included in the scope of supply per packaging unit. Article number 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 358 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.25.3 Mounting in metal Flush-mounting ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant Figure 8-67 Flush installation of the MDS D522 special version in metal without clearance 8.25.4 Installation instructions The transponder MDS D522 special version is designed to be mounted once. Note the following instructions when mounting the MDS D522 in a workpiece to avoid damaging the transponder:
Prepare the workpiece according to the following drawing. Using the accompanying mounting aid, press the transponder with uniform and evenly distributed pressure into the drilled hole until the transponder locks in place. Make sure that the transponder does not become tilted. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 359 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant Figure 8-68 Dimension drawing: Workpiece drill hole for mounting the MDS D522 special version 360 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.5 Technical specifications Table 8- 62 Technical data of MDS D522 special version Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 SIMATIC MDS D522 special version 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 18 (+0.1) 5.2 mm Approx. 1.2 g Clipping in once (with accompanying tool) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 361 ISO transponder 8.25 MDS D522 special variant 8.25.6 Dimensional drawing Figure 8-69 Dimension drawing MDS D522 special version All dimensions in mm 362 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.26 MDS D524 8.26.1 MDS D524 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 Production and distribution logistics as well as in assem-
bly and production lines, can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problem 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP67; IPx9K 8.26.2 Ordering data Table 8- 63 Ordering data for MDS D524 MDS D524 Table 8- 64 Ordering data of MDS D524 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-5AC00 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 363 ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 8.26.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 15 mm h Figure 8-70 Mounting the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T on metal with spacer Flush-mounting 15 mm 25 mm h a Figure 8-71 Flush-mounting of the MDS D124/D324/D424/D524/E624 and RF320T in metal with spacer 364 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 Note Going below the distances If the distances (a and h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. 8.26.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 65 Technical specifications for MDS D524 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage SIMATIC MDS D524 6GT2600-5AC00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Epoxy resin Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 365 6GT2600-5AC00 ISO transponder 8.26 MDS D524 Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to EN 60721-3-7 class 7M3 Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting IP67 IPx9K 100 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 27 x 4 mm 5 g Glued 1 x M3 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.26.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-72 Dimensional drawing of MDS D524 All dimensions in mm 366 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.27 MDS D525 8.27.1 MDS D525 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector; ideal for mounting on motors, gearboxes, and work-
piece holders Rugged packaging of the MDS D525; can therefore also be used under extreme environmental conditions without prob-
lems 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)". Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.27.2 Ordering data Table 8- 66 Ordering data for MDS D525 MDS D525 Article number 6GT2600-5AG00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 367 ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 8.27.3 Application example Figure 8-73 Application example 8.27.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 67 Technical specifications for MDS D525 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OPT memory Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D525 6GT2600-5AG00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM 16 bytes FRAM
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years 368 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 6GT2600-5AG00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black
> 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 24 x 10 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M6 SW 22; 6 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 369 ISO transponder 8.27 MDS D525 8.27.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-74 Dimensional drawing of MDS D525 All dimensions in mm 370 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.28 MDS D526 8.28.1 MDS D526 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for identification of transport units in production-related logistics; can also be de-
ployed in harsh conditions 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)."
Yes, with spacer ISO 15693 IP68 8.28.2 Ordering data Table 8- 68 Ordering data for MDS D526 MDS D526 Table 8- 69 Ordering data for MDS D526 accessories Spacer Article number 6GT2600-5AH00 Article number 6GT2690-0AL00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 371 ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 8.28.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal h 25 mm Figure 8-75 Mounting the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 on metal with spacer Flush-mounted in metal h 25 mm a 50 mm Figure 8-76 Flush installation of the MDS D126 / D426 / D526 in metal with spacer 372 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 8.28.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 70 Technical specifications for MDS D526 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load SIMATIC MDS D526 6GT2600-5AH00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
???
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 25 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +100 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 373 ISO transponder 8.28 MDS D526 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting 6GT2600-5AH00 50 x 3.6 mm 13 g 1 x M4 screw 2) 1 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. 2
) To prevent it loosening during operation, secure the screw with screw locking varnish. 8.28.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-77 Dimensional drawing of MDS D526 All dimensions in mm 374 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 8.29 MDS D528 8.29.1 MDS D528 Characteristics Characteristics Area of application Memory size Write/read range Mounting on metal ISO standard Degree of protection ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector The rugged housing of the MDS D528 means that it can also be used in extreme environmental conditions without problems. 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory See section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D)
(Page 52)"
Yes ISO 15693 IP68/IPx9K 8.29.2 Ordering data Table 8- 71 Ordering data for MDS D528 MDS D528 Article number 6GT2600-5AK00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 375 ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 8.29.3 Application example Figure 8-78 Application example 8.29.4 Technical specifications Table 8- 72 Technical specifications for MDS D528 Product type designation Memory Memory configuration UID User memory OTP Read cycles (at < 40 ) Write cycles (at < 40 ) Data retention time (at < 40 ) Write/read distance (Sg) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) SIMATIC MDS D528 6GT2600-5AK00 8 bytes 8192 bytes FRAM
???
> 1012
> 1012
> 10 years Dependent on the reader used, see section "Field data of ISO transponders (MDS D) (Page 52)"
228 years 376 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Recommended distance to metal Power supply Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Degree of protection to EN 60529 Shock-resistant to IEC 68-2-27 Vibration-resistant to IEC 68-2-6 Torsion and bending load Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions ( x H) Weight Type of mounting ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 6GT2600-5AK00 Plastic PA 6.6 GF Black 0 mm Inductive, without battery
-25 to +85
-40 to +125 IP68 2 hours, 2 bar, +20 C IPx9K steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C 50 g 1) 20 g 1) Not permitted 24 x 20 mm (without set screw) 35 g 1x transponder set screw M8 SW 22; 8 Nm 1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 377 ISO transponder 8.29 MDS D528 8.29.5 Dimension drawing Figure 8-79 Dimensional drawing of MDS D528 All dimensions in mm 378 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System integration 9 The communication modules (interface modules) are links between the RFID components
(reader and transponder) and the higher-level controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7), or PCs or computers. 9.1 Introduction The readers are connected to the controller via the following interface or communications modules:
ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C SIMATIC RF182C RFID 181EIP Function blocks, interface modules/communication modules and readers Function blocks are used for integration into the SIMATIC. You will find information on the following blocks on the Internet in "Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14971)". Ident profile and Ident blocks, standard function for RFID systems The Ident library linked into the TIA Portal as of STEP 7 Basic / Professional V14 SP 1 RFID standard profile; standard functions for RFID systems FB 45 for MOBY U, MOBY D, RF200, RF300 FB 55 RF160C communications module with FC 44 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 379 System integration 9.1 Introduction Interface modules/communication modules and function blocks The following table shows the most important characteristics of the interface modules/communications modules. Table 9- 1 Overview of interface modules/communication modules Interfaces to the reader Reader con-
nections Dimensions
(W x H x D) Temperature range Degree of protection Interfaces to the application
(PLC) PROFIBUS DP-
V1 S7-300 (cen-
tral), ET200M
(PROFIBUS) S7-1200 (cen-
tral) PROFIBUS DP
/ DP-V0 PROFIBUS DP-
V1 PROFINET IO PROFINET IO TCP/IP ASM/
communications module ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C SIMATIC RF182C RFID 181EIP 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 Via screw terminals in front connector 9-pin D-sub socket 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 x 8-pin connector socket, M12 2 (parallel) 2 1 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 54 or 79 mm 40 x 125 x 120 mm 0 to +60 0 to +55 30 x 100 x 75 mm 0 to +55 60 x 210 x 30 mm 0 to +55 2 (parallel) 90 x 130 x 60 mm
-25 C to
+55 C 2 (parallel) 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 54 mm 0 C to
+60 C 60 x 210 x 30 mm 0 to +60 IP67 IP20 IP20 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Ethernet IP 60 x 210 x 54 mm 0 C to
+60 C The following table shows the program blocks compatible with the interface modules/communications modules. 2 (parallel) 380 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Table 9- 2 Compatible program blocks System integration 9.1 Introduction ASM/
communications mod-
ule ASM 456 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF120C SIMATIC RF160C SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C Compatible program blocks in conjunction with ... S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Classic V5.5 FB 45 FB 55 Standard profile V1.19 Ident profile FB 45 FB 55
--
S7-300 / S7-400 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional FB 45 FB 55 Ident profile FB 45 FB 55
--
FC 44 Application blocks for RF160C FB 45 FB 55 FB 45 FB 55 Standard profile V1.19 Ident profile FC 44 Application blocks for RF160C FB 45 FB 55 FB 45 FB 55 Ident profile S7-1200 / S7-1500 and STEP 7 Basic/Professional Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB
--
Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB Application blocks for RF160C
--
Ident profile Ident blocks PIB_1200_UID_001KB PIB_1200_UID_032KB SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 381 System integration 9.2 ASM 456 9.2 ASM 456 Configured with ASM 456 Figure 9-1 Configuration of ASM 456 For more detailed information, please refer to ASM 456 Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/32629442). 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.1 Features Area of application The ASM 475 interface module acting as the link between all RF300 systems and SIMATIC S7-300 performs the functions of a communication module. It can be operated centrally in the S7-300 or decentrally in an ET200M. As many as eight ASM 475 interface modules can be plugged into one SIMATIC S7-300 rack and operated. In a configuration with several racks (max. four), the ASM 475 can be plugged into and operated on any rack. This means that as many as 32 ASMs can be operated in the maximum configuration of a SIMATIC S7-300. The ASM can also be operated in the ET 200M distributed I/O on PROFIBUS. Operation in an S7-400 environment is therefore problem-free. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated on each ET 200M. Error messages and operating statuses are indicated by LEDs. Since there is electrical isolation between the read/write device and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus, a configuration that is immune to interference is possible. 382 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Figure 9-2 Interface module ASM 475 The ASM 475 with the article number 6GT2002-0GA10 is a module that can be set in the parameters. The basic functions of the module are then already specified when the module is configured in HW Config (e.g. standard addressing). The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 475. Operation in a SIMATIC S7 is controlled by the function block FB 45. ASM 475 and FB 45 form a unit that is used for reading the data of the MDS simply and at optimal speed. 9.3.2 Ordering data Table 9- 3 Ordering data for ASM 475 ASM 475 interface module for SIMATIC S7 2 x RF3xxR reader with RS-422 can be connected in paral-
lel, without front connector Article number 6GT2002-0GA10 Table 9- 4 Ordering data for ASM 475 accessories Article number 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0 Front connector (1 x per ASM) Connecting cable ASM 475 RF3xxR Plug-in cable, pre-assembled, length: 2 m (standard length) 6GT2891-0EH20 Plug-in cable, pre-assembled, length: 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0 Terminal element (1 x per reader cable) Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0 The plug-in cables 6GT2891-4Fxx can be used as extension cables. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 383 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.3 Indicators Bezel and indicator elements The figure below illustrates the bezel of the ASM 475 and the inside of the front door complete with the associated connection diagram. The read/write devices must be connected to the ASM in accordance with the connection diagram. Figure 9-3 Bezel and inside of the front door of the ASM 475 384 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Display elements on the ASM Table 9- 5 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Light emitting diode Meaning SF DC 5V ACT_1, ACT_2 ERR_1, ERR_2 PRE_1, PRE_2 RxD_1, RxD_2 System fault (hardware error on ASM) 24 V are connected to ASM and the 5 V voltage on ASM is OK. The corresponding reader is active in processing a user command. A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur. This display can be reset using the parameter Option 1. Indicates the presence of a transponder. Indicates live communication with the reader. In the event of a fault on the reader, this display may also be lit. On the ASM 475, further operating states are indicated with the LEDs PRE, ERR and SF:
Table 9- 6 Operating status display on ASM 475 via LEDs SF ON ON OFF PRE_1 OFF/ON ON ERR_1 PRE_2 OFF/ON ON ERR_2
(perm.) ON OFF OFF 2 Hz
(perm.) OFF OFF OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Any value OFF 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz OFF 1 flash every 2 s OFF 1 flash every 2 s Meaning Hardware is defective (RAM, Flash, etc.) Charger is defective (can only be repaired in the factory). Firmware loading is active or no firmware detected Firmware download ASM must not be switched off Firmware loading terminated with errors Restart required Load firmware again Check update files Operating system error Switch ASM off/on ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 385 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.4 Configuration Centralized configuration with SIMATIC S7-300 Figure 9-4 Configuration of ASM 475 central Distributed configuration with ET200M Figure 9-5 Configuration of ASM 475 distributed Reader connection system You will find more information on the reader connector technology in the section "Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 (Page 419)". 386 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Cable installation Signal 24 VDC TX -
GND TX +
RX +
RX -
Pin on M12 connect-
or 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shield 8 +
System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Labeling 1 Reader 2 8 -16 1 Reader 2 7-15 1 Reader 2 9-17 1 Reader 2 6-14 1 Reader 2 4-12 1 Reader 2 5-13 Cable white brown Green Yellow Gray Pink
-
Cable assignment for connection of an RF300 reader to ASM 475 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 387 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 9.3.5 Shield connection When the reader is connected to the ASM 475, the cable shield must be connected to a shield terminal. Shield terminals and holding clips are standard components of the product spectrum of S7-300. Holding bracket Cable to 2nd reader Cable to 1st reader Shield terminal Figure 9-6 Shield terminal ASM 475 388 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 9.3.6 Technical data System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Table 9- 7 Technical specifications for ASM 475 Product type designation Interfaces Design of the interface point-to-point link Number of connectable readers Electrical connector design Backplane bus PROFIBUS interface Industrial Ethernet interface Supply voltage Design of the interface to the reader for communication Mechanical specifications Housing Material Color Supply voltage, current consumption, power loss Supply voltage Typical current consumption Without connected devices ASM 475 communications module 6GT2002-0GA10 RS-422 2 S7-300 backplane bus
(according to the head module)
(according to the head module) Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals Noryl Anthracite 24 VDC 0.1 A Including connected devices Power dissipation of the module, typ. Current consumption from I/O bus, max. Electrical isolation between S7-300 and RF300 Fuse 24 V for the reader 1.0 A 2 Watts 80 mA Yes Yes, electronic SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 389 System integration 9.3 ASM 475 Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation (horizontal installation) 6GT2002-0GA10 0 ... +60 During operation (vertical installation) During transportation and storage Degree of protection Shock-resistant to IEC 61131-2 Vibration-resistant to IEC 61131-2 Design, dimensions and weight Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Type of mounting Cable length for RS-422 interface, maximum Product properties, functions, components general LED display design 0 ... +40
-40 ... +70 IP20 150 m/s2 10 m/s2 120 x 40 x 125 mm 0.2 kg S7-300 rack 1000 m Product function transponder file handler addressable Protocol supported S7 communication Product functions management, configuration, engineering Type of parameter assignment Type of programming Yes 4 LEDs per reader connector 2 LEDs for device status Yes Type of computer-based communication Transponder addressing Commands Standards, specifications, approvals Proof of suitability Object manager, GSD FB 45, FB 55, FC 56
(FC 45/55 with restricted functionality) 2 words cyclic, 238 bytes acyclic Direct access via addresses Initialize transponder, read data from transpond-
er, write data to transponder CE, FCC, UL/CSA 390 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 9.4 RF120C Configuration with RF120C System integration 9.4 RF120C Figure 9-7 Configuration RF120C For more detailed information, refer to the section " RF120C communications module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/77485950)". 9.5 RF160C Configuration with RF160C Figure 9-8 Configuration RF160C For more detailed information, refer to Operating Instructions RF160C
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/42788808). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 391 System integration 9.6 RF170C 9.6 RF170C Configuration with RF170C Figure 9-9 Configuration RF170C For more detailed information, please refer to SIMATIC RF170C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/32622825). 392 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 9.7 RF180C Configured with RF180C System integration 9.7 RF180C Figure 9-10 Configuration of RF180C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF180C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/30012157). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 393 System integration 9.8 RF182C 9.8 RF182C Configuration with RF182C Figure 9-11 Configuration with RF182C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF182C Operating Instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/38507897). 394 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System diagnostics 10.1 Error codes Error codes of the RF300 readers 10 Note Validity of the error codes The following error codes apply only to RF300 readers with an RS-422 interface (except for Scanmode). You can identify the error code in different ways:
Directly on the reader/interface module by counting the flashing pattern of the red error LED In the Ident profile with the output variable "Status"
with FB 45 / FB 55 variable "error_MOBY". SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 395 System diagnostics 10.1 Error codes Table 10- 1 Error codes of the readers Flashing of the red LED operating display on the reader 00 02 05 06 11 12 13 19 20 21 24 25 28 30 31 Description Error code
(hexa-
decimal) 00 01 05 06 0B 0C 0D 13 14 15 18 19 1C 1E 1F No error Presence error; possible causes:
The active command was not carried out completely The transponder left the antenna field while the command was being processed Communication problem between reader and transponder Parameter assignment error, possible causes:
Unknown command Incorrect parameter Function not allowed Air interface faulty The MDS E transponder could not be successfully authenticated. The transponder memory cannot be written, possible causes:
Hardware fault (memory faulty) Memory write-protected (corresponding OTP area has already been written) Error in the specified memory address (access attempted to non-
existent or non-accessible memory areas). Buffer overflow: Insufficient buffer available in the reader for saving the command Major system fault (hardware fault) Parameter assignment error: bad parameter in RESET command Command was sent to a reader that has not yet been initialized Previous command is still active Antenna is not identified Possible causes:
Antenna is not connected. Antenna cable is defective. Incorrect number of characters in frame Running command cancelled by "RESET" command 396 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic 10.2.1 Overview Extended diagnostic functions with SIMATIC RF300 With SIMATIC RF300, extended diagnostics functions are available which simplify commissioning and maintenance. This diagnostics data is accessed using the SIMATIC function blocks via the SLG Status and MDS Status commands. These two commands can each be called in various modes
(subcommands) for which corresponding data structures (UDTs) are defined. Table 10- 2 In RF300 mode Command SLG-STATUS MDS-STATUS Mode
(subcommand) 01 06 01 02 Meaning Hardware and firmware configuration, parameterization status Communication error counter, current command status Serial number of the transponder (UID), memory configura-
tion. EEPROM write-protection status Serial number of the transponder (UID), HF field strength value, communication error counter, presence counter (dura-
tion) Overview of the diagnostic functions Table 10- 3 In ISO mode Command SLG-STATUS MDS-STATUS Mode
(subcommand) 01 03 Meaning Hardware and firmware configuration, parameterization status Serial number of the transponder (UID), recognized tran-
sponder type number in the field (number = tag - type, see reset parameter "ftim"), memory configuration, write protect status (OTP), size and number of blocks in the user memory SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 397 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic 10.2.2 Reader diagnostics with SLG STATUS The SLG STATUS command can be used to scan the status and diagnostics data of the reader. SLG STATUS (mode 01), corresponds to UDT 110 Name hardware hardware_version loader_version firmware firmware_version driver driver_version interface baud Type char word word char word char word byte byte distance_limiting_SLG byte Comment Type of hardware HW version
= Version (high byte): Unused
= Version (low byte) Version of loader
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) Type of firmware Firmware version
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) Type of driver 3964R Version of driver
= Version (high byte)
= Version (low byte) Interface type
= RS422
= RS232 (only RF380R) Transmission speed
= 19.2 Kbaud
= 57.6 Kbaud
= 115,2 Kbaud Possible Hex values
(31 38) 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 31 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 01 02 01 03 05 This variable is only provided for the RF380R. Users are therefore able to check the output power actually set. An incorrect value in the parameter "dis-
tance_limiting" of the RESET message frame results in the default setting "05". 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Transmit power 0.5 W 0.75 W 1.0 1.25 W (default) 1.5 W 1.75 W 2.0 W 398 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Name multitag_SLG Type byte field_ON_time_SLG byte status_ant MDS_control byte byte System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic Possible Hex values 01 00 01 03 04 05 06 07 08 0E 10 20 31 FF 01 02 00 01 04 Comment Number of transponders (Multi/Pulk) that can be processed in the antenna field
= Single tag mode
= RF300 transponder
= ISO transponder (non-specific)
= ISO transponder (Infineon, MDS D300)
= ISO transponder (Fujitsu, MDS D400)
= ISO transponder (NXP, MDS D100)
= ISO transponder (Texas Instruments, MDS D200)
= ISO transponder (ST, LRI2K)
= ISO transponder (Fujitsu, MDS D500)
= ISO (setting with "scanning_time" and "fcon")
= RF300 transponder
= MDS E transponder
= General Mode
= Setting with "scanning_time" and "fcon"
Status of the antenna
= Antenna On
= Antenna Off Presence mode
= Operation without presence message
= Operation with presence message
= Operation with presence message (antenna is off. The an-
tenna is turned on only when a Read or Write command is sent.) SLG STATUS (mode 06), corresponds to UDT 280 Name FZP ABZ CFZ SFZ CRCFZ BSTAT ASMFZ Type byte Possible Hex values 0 ... FF Comment
= Error counter, passive (errors during idle time)
= Abort counter
= Code error counter
= Signature error counter
= CRC error counter
= Current command status
= Interface problems to host (ASM/PC) parity, BCC, frame error SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 399 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic Note Counter values are deleted. All counter values are deleted after reading out (= execute "SLG STATUS" command). Explanations:
"FZP": counts interference pulses when communication with a transponder is not taking place (e.g. electromagnetic interference caused by contactors, motors, etc.). Counter values can, however, also be generated when a transponder is located at the edge of the field even when there is no external interference.
"ABZ", "CFZ", "SFZ" and "CRCFZ" are counters for protocol errors which may occur during reader-transponder communication. This can be caused by unsuitable reader/transponder positioning (e.g. transponder on field boundary, several transponders in the antenna field) or external EMC interference. To ensure clear diagnosis of the quality of communication, it is recommended that an SLG STATUS command (mode 06) is executed following receipt of the presence command to reset the error counter. The protocol error counters are not mutually independent. If a code error (CFZ) occurs, this will cause a signature (SFZ) or CRC- (CRCFZ) error.
"BSTAT" is the status for the most recently executed command. A value other than 0 means that the previous command was repeated by the reader due to faults (see above).
"ASMFZ" signals line-conducted communication interference between the communications module and the reader. Faults of this type can be caused by contact problems on the connector or the cable connection. 400 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic 10.2.3 Transponder diagnostics with MDS STATUS The MDS STATUS command can be used to scan the status and diagnostics data of the transponder that is located within the antenna field. MDS STATUS (mode 1), corresponds to UDT 260 (only for RF300 transponders) Name UID Type array[18] byte MDS_type byte Lock_state byte Possible Hex values 000000005555555 ... 00000000FFFFFFFF 01 02 03 04 0 ... FF Comment Unique identifier
= b0-31: 4 byte TAG ID, b32-63: 0 Transponder memory configuration
= Transponder without FRAM
= Transponder with FRAM 8 KB
= Transponder with FRAM 32 KB
= Transponder with FRAM 64 KB EEPROM write protection status MDS STATUS (mode 02), corresponds to UDT 270, only for RF300 transponders Name UID LFD FZP FZA ANWZ Type array[18] byte byte byte byte byte Possible Hex values 0000000055555555 ... 00000000FFFFFFFF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF 0 ... FF Comment Unique identifier
= b0-31: 4 byte TAG ID, b32-63: 0
= Value for field strength determined in the transponder
= Error counter (passive) errors during idle time
= Error counter (active)
= Presence counter SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 401 System diagnostics 10.2 Diagnostics functions - STEP 7 Classic Note Counter values are deleted. All counter values are deleted when the transponder exits the antenna field or when the antenna is switched off. Explanations:
"LFD" is a measured value for the field strength that is determined in the transponder. The lower the value, the higher the field strength.
"FZP" counts interference pulses when communication with a transponder is not taking place (e.g. electromagnetic interference caused by contactors, motors, etc.). Counter values can also be generated when a transponder is located at the edge of the field even when there is no external interference.
"FZA" counts errors that can occur during reader-to-transponder communication. This can be caused by unsuitable reader/transponder positioning (e.g. transponder on field boundary, several data carriers in the field) or external electromagnetic interference.
"ANWZ" is the value for the time that the transponder remains in the field before the MDS STATUS command (mode 02) is executed. A time step is 10 ms. The maximum time that can be recorded is therefore 2.5 s. MDS STATUS (mode 03), corresponds to UDT 230 Name UID Type array[18] byte MDS_type byte Possible Values 0000000000000000 ... FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 00 03 04 05 06 07 08 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 Comment Unique identifier
=8 byte UID, MSB first Transponder type (vendor, identification)
= ISO transponder (non-specific)
= ISO transponder (Infineon, MDS D300)
= ISO transponder (Fujitsu, MDS D400)
= ISO transponder (Philips, MDS D100)
= ISO transponder (Texas Instruments, MDS D200)
= ISO transponder (ST, LRI2K)
= ISO transponder (Fujitsu, MDS D500)
= RF300 transponder (0 kB)
= RF300 transponder (8 kB)
= RF300 transponder (32 kB)
= RF300 transponder (64 kB)
= RF300 transponder (128 kB)
= RF300 transponder (256 kB)
= ISO transponder (NXP, 1 kB, MDS E)
= ISO transponder (Infineon, 1 kB, MDS E)
= ISO transponder (NXP, 4 kB) 402 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x System diagnostics 10.3 Diagnostics functions STEP 7 Basic / Professional Name IC_version size Type binary byte byte Possible Values 0 ... 255 0 ... FF 0 ... FF lock_state byte 0 ... FF block_size byte nr_of_blocks byte 0 ... FF 0 ... FF Comment Vendor-specific value Chip version Memory size in bytes Depending on transponder type, e.g. my-d: 992 bytes Lock state, OTP information:
One bit is used per block (4 x 4 bytes or 2 x 8 bytes)
(bit = 1: block is locked) Example:
01 = Block 1 of address FF80 ... FF83 is locked or 03 = Block 1 and 2 of address FF80 ... FF87 are locked, e.g. for the Philips SL2 ICS20 (MDS D124, D160 or D100). This chip provides a usable memory with 112 bytes EEPROM from address 0000 - 006F (total OTP area
"0060 ... 006F"). In this memory, the locked area corre-
sponds to the addresses 0060 ... 0063 or 0060 ... 0067 Block size of the transponder Depending on transponder type, e.g. my-d: 4 bytes Number of blocks Depending on transponder type, e.g. my-d: 248 bytes 10.3 Diagnostics functions STEP 7 Basic / Professional Extensive diagnostics functions for the SIMATIC RF300 readers with STEP 7 Basic /
Professional are being planned. With the aid of the Ident profile and the Ident blocks, you can make different diagnostics queries. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 403 System diagnostics 10.3 Diagnostics functions STEP 7 Basic / Professional 404 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x
1 2 | Users manual 5 | Users Manual | 1.26 MiB | August 09 2016 / September 09 2016 |
Appendix A A.1 Certificates and approvals All the latest RFID radio approvals are available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/rfid-approvals). Labeling Description Conformity acc. to the RED EU directive Notes on CE marking The following applies to the system described in this documentation:
The CE marking on a device indicates the corresponding approval. DIN ISO 9001 certificate The quality assurance system for the entire product process (development, production, and marketing) at Siemens fulfills the requirements of ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001:
1987). This has been certified by DQS (the German society for the certification of quality management systems). EQ-Net certificate no.: 1323-01 Country-specific approvals Safety If the device has one of the following markings the corresponding approval has been obtained:
Labeling Description Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to UL 60950 Standard (I.T.E), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E), C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12
(IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (IND.CONT.EQ) and C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12 (IND.CONT.EQ) SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 405 Appendix A.1 Certificates and approvals Labeling Canada (IC) Mexico (COFETEL) China (CMIIT) Description UL recognition mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) acc. to standard C22.2. No. 60950 (LR 81690), C22.2 No. 142 or C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12 (LR 63533) Canadian Standard Association (CSA) acc. to American Standard UL 60950 (LR 81690), UL508 or UL61010-1/UL61010-2-201 (LR 63533) This product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 3548 Norm. USA (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. FCC ID: NXW-RF... Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). IC: 267X-RF... Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan Brazil (ANATEL) ANATEL-ID: XXXX-YY-ZZZZ Mexico (COFETEL) South Africa (ICASA) China (CMIIT) CMIIT ID: XXXXYYZZZZ South Korea (KCC) Japan (VCCI) 406 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x A.2 Accessories A.2.1 Transponder holders Table A- 1 Overview of the transponder holders and spacers Appendix A.2 Accessories Product photo 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 Insertable transponders MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 MDS E600 MDS E611 RF360T Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal, in conjunction with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 Distance from transponder to metal: 25 mm Mounting: 4 x M4 screws Material: PA6 Weight: 31 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 110 x 62 x 24 mm MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 MDS E600 MDS E611 RF360T MDS D100 MDS D200 MDS D400 MDS E600 MDS E611 Fixing pocket in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-
0AA00 Mounting:
Locks into spacer 2 x screws/nails Tacked Material: PA6 Weight: 12 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 121 x 57 x 5 mm Fixing pocket not suitable for mounting directly on metal Mounting: 2 x M4 countersunk screws Material: PA6 Weight: 21 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 110 x 65 x 5 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 407 Appendix A.2 Accessories Product photo 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 6GT2690-0AK00 Insertable transponders MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D139 MDS D339 MDS D124 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D524 Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: 1 x M5 stainless steel screw Tightening torque: 1.5 Nm Material: PPS Weight: 50 g Dimensions ( x H): 85 x 30 mm Quick change holder for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: Screw-in Material: Stainless steel VA Weight: 80 g Dimensions ( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 30 mm Mounting: Screw-in Material: Stainless steel VA Weight: 60 g Dimensions ( x H): 22 x 47 mm Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 15 mm Mounting: 1 x M4 countersunk screw Tightening torque: 1 Nm Material: PPS Weight: Approx. 4 g Remounting cycles: min. 10 Dimensions ( x H): 36 x 22 mm 408 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Product photo 6GT2690-0AL00 6GT2690-0AG00 6GT2690-0EA00 Appendix A.2 Accessories Insertable transponders MDS D126 MDS D426 MDS D526 MDS E624 MDS D160 MDS D460 MDS D423 RF330T Characteristics Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 25 mm Mounting: 1 x M4 countersunk screw Tightening torque: 1 Nm Material: PA6 Weight: Approx. 12 g Remounting cycles: min. 10 Dimensions ( x H): 59 x 30 mm Spacer for mounting on metal Distance from transponder to metal: 10 mm Mounting: 1 x M3 countersunk screw Material: PA6 Weight: 2 g Dimensions ( x H): 20 x 14 mm Fixing hood Mounting: 2 x M4 or 2 x M5 screws with max. head diameter of 9.5 mm Tightening torque 0.8 Nm (M4 only with flat wash-
er) Material: PPS Weight: 3 g Dimensions (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 409 Appendix A.2 Accessories Dimensional drawings Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 Figure A-2 Dimension drawing of fixing pocket 6GT2390-0AA00 410 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-3 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AA00 Figure A-4 Dimension drawing of quick change holder 6GT2690-0AH00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 411 Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-5 Dimension drawing of quick change holder 6GT2690-0AH10 Figure A-6 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AK00 Figure A-7 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AL00 412 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Appendix A.2 Accessories Figure A-8 Dimension drawing of spacer 6GT2690-0AG00 Figure A-9 Dimension drawing of fixing hood 6GT2690-0EA00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 413 Appendix A.2 Accessories A.2.2 MOBY I migration The RF300 readers of the new generation provide the option of simple migration of existing MOBY I systems to SIMATIC RF300. The so-called MOBY I emulation processes frames of the MOBY I protocol on its serial interface and communicates with the established RF300 transponders. If the RF300 reader is connected to a communications module with MOBY I capability, the reader automatically recognizes the serial protocol and sets the MOBY I protocol. As a communications module with MOBY I capability, all the communications modules sold for MOBY I count regardless of the mode in which the MOBY I communications modules are operated. This property allows even projects with the ECC mode turned on or with file handlers to be migrated. Communication modules with MOBY I capability:
RF180C, RFID 181EIP, RF170C, ASM 456, ASM 475, ASM 470, ASM450, ASM 451, ASM 452, ASM 472, ASM 473, ASM 424, ASM 454, ASM 400, CM 422, CM 423, ASM 410, ASM 420, ASM 421, ASM 440, ES030 With the aid of the adapter cable (0.3 m; article number 6GT2091-4VE30) you can migrate existing MOBY I projects without needing to re-cable the connected RFID devices. The transfer is as usual with MOBY I with a transmission speed of 19.2 kBd. The transmission speed in the application is identical (or slightly slower) than with the original MOBY I hardware. NOTICE Changed field geometry When replacing MOBY I components with RF300 components note that the field geometry changes. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 414 Design of the Y adapter Appendix A.2 Accessories With the aid of the Y adapter (article number 6GT2090-4VE00) a slow migration of a MOBY I application to RF300 is possible. The Y adapter is mounted in the vicinity of a MOBY I SLG. It forwards signals of a communications module both to the MOBY I SLG and to the RF300 readers to be newly installed. The transponder commands are handled either with a MOBY I transponder or with an RF300 transponder. To do this, no change to the MOBY I application is necessary. Power Optional 24 VDC supply voltage, M12 plug, 4-pin ASM TxD Connector for the communications module; SLG plug, 6-pin acc. to EN 175201-804 RF300 Connector for RF 300 reader; M12 socket, 8-pin MOBY l Connector for the MOBY I reader; SLG socket (angled), plug, 6-pin acc. to EN 175201-804
= 0.5 m l Figure A-10 Connection graphic of the MOBY Y adapter for MOBY I Command set The command set of the MOBY I readers is supported by the RF300 readers. You will find a list of the commands and a description of the commands in the manuals "FB 45" and "FC 56". These manuals can be found in the archive of the DVD "Ident Systems Software &
Documentation" (6GT2080-2AA20). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 415 Appendix A.2 Accessories A.2.3 DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
The DVD contains:
FB/FC for SIMATIC, 3964R Drivers for DOS/Windows XP/Win 7 C libraries PC demonstration program RFID documentation in PDF format, especially RFID system manuals, programming instructions and operating instructions Table A- 2 Ordering data DVD DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
Article number 6GT2080-2AA20 Note Notes on "Ident Systems Software" and licensing When purchasing a communication module or an interface module, no software or documentation is supplied. The "Ident Systems Software & Documentation" DVD contains all available FBs/FCs for the SIMATIC, C libraries, demo programs, etc. and needs to be ordered separately. In addition, the DVD contains the complete Ident documentation
(German and English) in PDF format. The purchase of a communications module or an interface module includes a payment for the use of the software, including documentation, on the "Ident Systems Software &
Documentation" DVD and the purchaser acquires the right to make copies (copy license) insofar as they are required as part of the customer-specific application or development for the plant. The contract accompanying the DVD pertaining to the use of software products against a one-off payment also applies. SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 416 A.3 Connecting cable Appendix A.3 Connecting cable In the following chapter, you will find an overview of the connecting cables between the readers and communication modules or PCs. A.3.1 RF3xxR reader (RS-422) with ASM 456 / RF160C / RF170C / RF180C /
RF182C Connecting cable with straight connector Figure A-11 Connecting cable between ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C, RF180C, RF182C and RF3xxR reader (RS-422) Table A- 3 Ordering data Article number 6GT2891-4FH20 6GT2891-4FH50 6GT2891-4FN10 6GT2891-4FN20 6GT2891-4FN50 Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 417 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable Connecting cable with angled connector Figure A-12 Connecting cable between ASM 456, RF160C, RF170C, RF180C and RF3xxR reader
(RS-422) with angled connector Table A- 4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2891-4JH20 6GT2891-4JH50 6GT2891-4JN10 Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m The angled connector has a height of h = 29 mm and a length of l = 38 mm. Remember that due to the construction, the distance between the edge of the connector and the edge of the reader housing (H) is higher. Figure A-13 Distance between connector edge and housing edge The distance between the connector edge and the housing edge of the reader (H) depends on the reader being used and can be up to 38 mm. If you look at the front of the reader, the angled connector always points to the right and runs parallel to the housing. 418 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.2 Reader RF3xxR (RS422) with ASM 475 Reader connection system The connecting cable has a length of 2 m (standard) and 5 m. Extensions up to 1000 m are possible with the 6GT2891-4E plug-in cables. Figure A-14 Structure of the connecting cable between ASM 475 and RF3xx reader with RS-422 Table A- 5 Ordering data Length L 2 m 5 m Article number 6GT2891-4EH20 6GT2891-4EH50 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 419 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.3 Reader RF3xxR (RS-422) with RF120C Figure A-15 Connecting cable between RF120C and RF3xxR reader (RS-422) Table A- 6 Ordering data Length L 2 m 5 m 10 m Article number 6GT2091-4LH20 6GT2091-4LH50 6GT2091-4LN10 420 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Appendix A.3 Connecting cable A.3.4 Reader RF380R (RS232) - PC The connecting cables have a length of 5 m. The outgoing cable for the power supply has a length of 0.5 m. With 4-pin power supply connector Figure A-16 Connecting cable between PC and RF380R (RS-232) with 4-pin power supply connector Suitable power supply unit: e.g. wide-range power supply unit With open ends for the power supply Figure A-17 Connecting cable between PC and RF380R (RS-232) with open ends for the power supply SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 421 Appendix A.3 Connecting cable Table A- 7 Ordering data connecting cable Connecting cable with 4-pin power supply connector (5 m) Connecting cable with open ends (5 m) Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 Table A- 8 Ordering data for wide-range power supply unit Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF-systems
(100 - 240 VAC / 24 VDC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable with country-specific plug Article number EU: 6GT2898-0AA00 UK: 6GT2898-0AA10 US: 6GT2898-0AA20 422 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x A.4 Ordering data RF300 components Appendix A.4 Ordering data Note Product update Note that readers with the article numbers "6GT2801-xABxx" are being replaced by readers with the article numbers "6GT2801-xBAxx". Table A- 9 RF300 reader Reader RF310R
(RS-422) RF310R
(Scanmode) RF310R second generation RF340R IP67 IP67 Description With RS422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 75 x 30 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible With RS422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible IP67 IP67 horizontal base plate base plate turned through 90 Article number 6GT2801-1AB10 6GT2801-1AB10-0AX1 6GT2801-1AB20-0AX1 6GT2801-1BA10 6GT2801-2AB10 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 423 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Reader RF340R second generation RF350R RF350R second generation RF380R RF380R Scanmode IP67 Description With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible With RS-422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting IP65 ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 ISO 15693 compatible With RS422 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm Reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting IP65 IP67 ANT 1, ANT 3, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (3964R) and RS-232 interface (3964R) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) and RS-232 interface
(Scanmode) IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible Article number 6GT2801-2BA10 6GT2801-4AB10 6GT2801-4BA10 6GT2801-3AB10 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX1 424 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Reader RF382R
(Scanmode) RF350M RF350M Description with RS-422 interface (Scanmode) and RS-232 interface
(Scanmode) IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 160 x 80 x 41 mm with integrated antenna ISO 15693 compatible IP54 Operating temperature: -20 C ... +55 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 250 x 90 x 47 mm Mobile reader with integrated antenna IP54 Operating temperature: -20 C ... +55 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 250 x 90 x 47 mm Mobile reader for external antennas, with the option of connecting ANT 8, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30 Table A- 10 RF300 transponder RF300 transponder RF320T IP67 Description Memory size: 20 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 27 x 4 mm RF330T RF340T
(8 KB FRAM) RF340T
(32 KB FRAM) IP68 Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 30 x 8 mm IP68 Memory size: 8 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 48 x 25 x 15 mm IP68 Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 48 x 25 x 15 mm Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2801-3AB20-0AX0 6GT2803-1BA00 6GT2803-1BA10 Article number 6GT2800-1CA00 6GT2800-5BA00 6GT2800-4BB00 6GT2800-5BB00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 425 Appendix A.4 Ordering data RF300 transponder RF350T RF360T
(8 KB FRAM) RF360T
(32 KB FRAM) RF370T
(32 KB FRAM) RF370T
(64 KB FRAM) RF380T IP68 Description Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 50 x 20 mm IP67 Memory size: 8 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +75 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.8 x 54.8 x 2.5 mm IP67 Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +75 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.8 x 54.8 x 2.5 mm IP68 Memory size: 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm IP68 Memory size: 64 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 41 mm IP68 Memory size 32 KB FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +200 C (cyclic) Dimensions ( x H): 114 x 83 mm Table A- 11 ISO transponder ISO transponder MDS D100 MDS D117 IP68 Description Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +80 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 85.6 x 54 x 0.9 mm Credit card format IP68 Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 4 x 5 mm Article number 6GT2800-5BD00 6GT2800-4AC00 6GT2800-5AC00 6GT2800-5BE00 6GT2800-6BE00 6GT2800-5DA00 Article number 6GT2600-0AD10 6GT2600-0AG00 426 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder MDS D124 MDS D126 MDS D127 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 IP67; IPx9K Description Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +180 C Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm IP68 Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +125 C Dimensions ( x H): M6 x 5.8 (0.2) mm IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: up to +200 C/+220 C Dimensions ( x H): 85 (0.5) x 15 (-1.0) mm IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C...+70 C Dimensions ( x H): 16 (0.2) x 3.0 (0.2) mm Laundry transponder for cyclic applications IP65 Memory size: 112 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W): 86 x 54 mm Smartlabel (PET) in credit card format IP67 Memory size: 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -20 C ... +60 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 86 x 54 x 0.8 mm Credit card format IP65 Memory size: 256 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions (L x W): 55 x 55 mm Smartlabel (PET), small design Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2600-0AC10 6GT2600-0AE00 6GT2600-0AF00 6GT2600-0AA10 6GT2600-0AB10 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 427 Appendix A.4 Ordering data ISO transponder MDS D324 MDS D339 MDS D400 MDS D421 MDS D422 MDS D423 MDS D424 MDS D425 Article number 6GT2600-3AC00 6GT2600-3AA10 6GT2600-4AD00 6GT2600-4AE00 6GT2600-4AF00 6GT2600-4AA00 6GT2600-4AC00 6GT2600-4AG00 IP67; IPx9K Description Memory size: 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C...+125 C Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 992 bytes of EEPROM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +220 C Dimensions ( x H): 85 (0.5) x 15 (-1.0) mm IP67 Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +60 C Dimensions (L x W x H) 85.6 (0.3) 54 (0.2) 0.8 (0.05) mm IP67; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature 25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 4.5 mm IP68 Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): M20 x 6 (0.2) mm Can be screwed into metal (flush-mounted) IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 30 (+0.2/-0.5) x 8 (-0.5) mm IP67; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +125 C Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 24 X 10 mm; M6 thread Screw transponder 428 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x ISO transponder MDS D426 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D521 MDS D522 MDS D522 Special variant MDS D524 MDS D525 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2600-4AH00 6GT2600-4AK00-0AX0 6GT2600-4AB00 6GT2600-5AE00 6GT2600-5AF00 6GT2600-5AF00-0AX0 6GT2600-5AC00 6GT2600-5AG00 IP68 Description Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C...+85 C Dimensions ( x H): 18(1) x 20(1) mm (without thread); thread M8 IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 2000 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C...+85 C Dimensions ( x H): 16 (0.2) x 3.0 (0.2) mm IP67; IPx9K Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature 25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 4.5 mm IP68 Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): M20 x 6 (0.2) mm Can be screwed into metal (flush-mounted) IP68 Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 18 (+0.1) x 5.2 mm Can be clipped into metal (flush-mounted) IP67 Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 27 (0.2) x 4 (0.2) mm IP67; IPx9K Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 24 x 10 (+1.0) mm SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 429 Appendix A.4 Ordering data ISO transponder MDS D526 MDS D528 IP67; IPx9K Description Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 50 x 3.6 mm Round design with mounting hole IP68; IPx9K Memory size: 8192 bytes of FRAM user memory Operating temperature: -25 C ... +85 C Dimensions ( x H): 18(1) x 20(1) mm (without thread); thread M8 Article number 6GT2600-5AH00 6GT2600-5AK00 Table A- 12 Communication modules/interface modules Communications mod-
ule ASM 456 ASM 475 RF120C RF160C RF170C RF180C RF182C RFID 181EIP 430 Description ASM 456 for PROFIBUS DP-V1 max. 2 readers connectable ASM 475 for SIMATIC S7 max. 2 RF3xxR readers with RS-422 can be connected in parallel with-
out a front connector Communications module RF120C for SIMATIC S7-1200 Communications module RF160C for PROFIBUS DP V0 max. 2 readers connectable RF170C communications module RF170C connecting block RF180C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 RF182C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 RF182C communications module max. 2 SLGs or readers can be connected Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (5-pin) Connecting block M12, 7/8'' (4-pin) Push-pull connecting block, RJ-45 Article number 6GT2002-0ED00 6GT2002-0GA10 6GT2002-0LA00 6GT2002-0EF00 6GT2002-0HD00 6GT2002-1HD00 6GT2002-0JD00 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 6GT2002-0JD10 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 6GT2002-0JD20 6GT2002-1JD00 6GT2002-4JD00 6GT2002-2JD00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Table A- 13 Antennas Antenna ANT 1 ANT 3 ANT 3S ANT 8 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 IP67 Description Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 75 x 75 x 20 mm incl. an integrated antenna cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 28 x 10 mm without antenna connecting cable incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions (L x W x H): 50 x 28 x 10 mm without antenna connecting cable incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M8 x 40 mm without antenna connecting cable incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M12 x 40 mm incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 (front) Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M18 x 55 mm incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m IP67 Operating temperature: -25 C ... +70 C Dimensions ( x L): M30 x 58 mm incl. one plug-in antenna connecting cable 3 m Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2398-1CB00 6GT2398-1CD30-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD40-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD50-0AX0 6GT2398-1CD60-0AX0 6GT2398-1CF00 6GT2398-1CF10 6GT2398-1CC00 6GT2398-1CA00 6GT2398-1CD00 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 431 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Accessories Table A- 14 Accessories for RF300 reader Reader RF380R Accessories RS-232 plug-in cable with 4-pin connector Plug-in cable RS-232 with open ends (5 m) Plug-in cable with D-SUB M12, 8-pin and with M8, 3-pin power unit connector Table A- 15 RF300 transponder accessories Transponder RF320T RF330T RF360T RF380T Accessories Spacer ( x H): 36 x 22 mm Fixing hood (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm Spacer (L x W x H): 110 x 62 x 24 mm
(in conjunction with fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00) Fixing pocket (L x W x H): 121 x 57 x 5 mm
(in conjunction with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00) Holder (short version) Holder (long version) Shrouding cover Universal holder Table A- 16 Transponder accessories Transponder MDS D100 / D200 /
D400 / D600 / D611 MDS D139 / D339 MDS D124 / D324 /
D424 / D524 MDS D126 / D426 /
D526 / E624 MDS D160 / D460 MDS D423 / RF330T Accessories Spacer Fixing pocket Securing pocket
(cannot be mounted directly on metal) Spacer ( x H): 85 x 30 mm Quick change holder ( x H): 22 x 60 mm Quick change holder ( x H): 22 x 47 mm Spacer ( x H): 36 x 22 mm Spacer ( x H): 59 x 30 mm Spacer ( x H): 20 x 14 mm Spacer (L x W x H): 49.4 x 20 x 9.8 mm Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX1 Article number 6GT2690-0AK00 6GT2690-0EA00 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2090-0QA00 6GT2090-0QA00-0AX3 6GT2090-0QB00 6GT2590-0QA00 Article number 6GT2190-0AA00 6GT2190-0AB00 6GT2390-0AA00 6GT2690-0AA00 6GT2690-0AH00 6GT2690-0AH10 6GT2690-0AK00 6GT2690-0AL00 6GT2690-0AG00 6GT2690-0EA00 432 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Table A- 17 Accessory connecting RF300 reader PC Connecting cable RF240R / RF260R /
RF290R (RS232) and PC Accessories Connecting cable RS-232 with M12 male connector (4-pin), 5 m Connecting cable RS-232 with open ends, 5 m Table A- 18 Accessories - connecting cable communications module/ASM reader Connecting cables ASM 456 / RF160C /
RF170C / RF180C and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) ASM 456 / RF160C /
RF170C / RF180C and RF3xxR reader
(RS-422) with angled connector ASM 475 and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) RF120C and reader RF3xxR
(RS422) Description Length 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m 2 m 5 m 10 m 2 m 5 m 2 m 5 m 10 m Table A- 19 RFID accessories, general RFID general DVD "Ident Systems Software & Documentation"
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(100 - 240 VAC / 24 VDC / 3 A) with country-specific power cable/plug, 2 m 24 V connecting cable, 5 m M12 connector, 4-pin for wide range power supply unit, pack of 3 Appendix A.4 Ordering data Article number 6GT2891-4KH50 6GT2891-4KH50-0AX0 Article number 6GT2891-4FH20 6GT2891-4FH50 6GT2891-4FN10 6GT2891-4FN20 6GT2891-4FN50 6GT2891-4JH20 6GT2891-4JH50 6GT2891-4JN10 6GT2891-4EH20 6GT2891-4EH50 6GT2091-4LH20 6GT2091-4LH50 6GT2091-4LN10 Article number 6GT2080-2AA20 EU: 6GT2898-0AC00 UK: 6GT2898-0AC10 US: 6GT2898-0AC20 6GT2491-1HH50 6GK1907-0DB10-
6AA3 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 433 Appendix A.5 Service & Support A.5 Service & Support Technical Support You can reach technical support for all PD projects as follows:
Phone: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 Fax: + 49 (0) 911 895 7223 E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com) Internet: Web form for Support Request
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests) Contacts If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our representatives at your local Siemens office. The addresses are found on the following pages:
On the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app) In Catalog CA 01 In the catalog ID 10 specially for Industrial Identification Systems Service & Support for Process Industries and Drives On the Internet, on the Support home page (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/) of Process Industries and Drives (PD), you will find various services. There you will find the following information, for example:
Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products. Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search function in "Product Support". A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists. Your local contact for PD. Information about on-site service, repairs, and spare parts. Much more can be found under "Our service offer". RFID homepage For general information about our identification systems, visit RFID homepage
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/identification-systems/). Online catalog and ordering system The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall Homepage (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). 434 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Training center Appendix A.5 Service & Support We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg. Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11
( 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are possible) For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage
(http://sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld/). SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 435 Appendix A.5 Service & Support 436 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Index A Antennas Minimum clearances, 200 Application Planning SIMATIC RF300, 37 Approvals, 405 ASM 475 Assignment for connecting cable, 386, 419 Cable installation, 387 Design and function, 382 Function of the LEDs, 385 Indicators, 385 Ordering data, 383 Pin assignment, 386, 419 Status display with LEDs, 385 C Cabinet configuration, 106 Cable, 417 Reader - ASM, 417 Shielding, 111 Certificates, 405 Communication modules, 379 Communication time Calculation, 47 Connecting cable Contacts, 434 Coupling paths, 104 Courses, 435 Customer benefits, 31 Reader-communication module/ASM/PC, 417 Dwell time Transponder, 46 Dynamic mode, 45 Dwell time of the transponder, 46 E Electromagnetic compatibility Coupling paths, 104 Electromagnetic interference, 102 EMC directives Definition, 100 Equipotential bonding, 110 EMC Directives EMC Guidelines Avoiding interference, 109 Basic Rules, 101 Cabinet configuration, 106 Cable shielding, 111 Overview, 99 Equipotential bonding, 110 Error codes Reader, 395 Propagation of electromagnetic interference, 102 F FC 45, 397 Field data ISO transponder, 52, 57 RF300 transponder, 49 Fields of application, 31 Flush-mounting of transponders and readers, 63 D Detection area, 44 Diagnostic functions Transponder, 401 Direction of motion Transponder, 44 Display elements RF310R reader with RS-422 interface, 116 RF340R reader, 137 RF350R reader, 144, 167 H High-performance, 22 I Inductive alternating field, 37 Input parameter, 379 Installation Several readers, 64 Installation guidelines, 62 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 437 Index Interface modules, 379 Interference sources Electromagnetic, 103 ISO 14443 functionality, 114 ISO 15693 functionality, 113 ISO transponder Resistance to chemicals, 90 M Main applications, 31 MDS D100 transponder Technical specifications, 256 MDS D117 transponder Technical specifications, 260 MDS D124 Transponder Technical specifications, 264 MDS D127 transponder Technical specifications, 274 MDS D160 transponder Technical specifications, 285 MDS D200 transponder Technical specifications, 293 MDS D339 transponder Technical specifications, 305 MDS D424 Transponder Technical specifications, 332 MDS D425 Transponder Technical specifications, 335 MDS D428 transponder Technical specifications, 343 MDS D460 Transponder Technical specifications, 347 MDS D521 transponder Technical specifications, 353 MDS D522 transponder Technical specifications, 356 MDS D524 transponder Technical specifications, 365 MDS D525 transponder Technical specifications, 368 MDS D526 transponder Technical specifications, 373 MDS D528 transponder Technical specifications, 376 MDS STATUS, 397 Medium-performance, 22 Memory configuration of the RF300 transponders, 208 Metal Influence on the transmission window, 65 Metal-free area Reader RF310R, 117, 124 Reader RF340R, 138 RF380R reader, 168, 177 Transponder RF330T, 216 Transponder RF340T, 221 Transponder RF350T, 224 Transponder RF360T, 229 Transponder RF370T, 235 Transponder RF380T, 242 Metal-free space RF310R reader, 131 RF340R reader, 154 Minimum clearances Antenna to antenna, 200 Minimum distance Antenna to antenna, 61 Reader to reader, 60 Transponder to transponder, 59 O Ordering data, 423 Antennas, 196, 431 Communications modules, 430 ISO transponder, 426 Overview, 423 Reader, 423 RF300 transponder, 425 RF310R Scanmode, 122 RF310R with RS-422 interface, 115, 129 RF340R with RS-422 interface, 136, 152 RF350R with RS-422 interface, 143, 159 RF380R Scanmode, 175 RF380R with RS-422 interface, 166 RF382R Scanmode, 182 P Parameterization Function blocks, 379 Possible combinations Reader - transponder, 24, 27, 30 R Read/write distance, 37 Reader Installing, 64 Reader RF310R Metal-free area, 117, 124 Reader RF340R Metal-free area, 138 438 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x Index Reducing interference due to metal, 62 Reduction of field data by metal RF310R, 65 RF340R, 69 RF350R with ANT 1, 73 RF350R with ANT 18, 80 RF350R with ANT 3, 76 RF350R with ANT 30, 83 RF380R, 85 RF382R, 89 Resistance to chemicals Transponder, 90 RF300 system diagnostics SLG STATUS, 398 RF300 transponder Resistance to chemicals, 90 RF310R reader, 115, 122, 129 Characteristics, 115, 122, 129 Metal-free space, 131 RF330T Characteristics, 215 RF340R reader, 136, 152 Characteristics, 136, 152 Metal-free space, 154 RF350R reader, 143, 159 Characteristics, 143, 159 RF380R reader, 166 Characteristics, 166 Metal-free area, 168, 177 RF380R Scanmode reader, 175 Characteristics, 175 RFID systems Overview, 21 SIMATIC RF300 components, 37 Dwell time of the transponder, 46 S Scanmode, 22 Selection criteria Shielding, 111 SLG STATUS, 397 Static mode, 45 Structure System manual, 13 System diagnostics MDS status, 401 System overview RFID systems, 21 T Technical specifications MDS D100 transponder, 256 MDS D117 transponder, 260 MDS D124 Transponder, 264 MDS D127 transponder, 274 MDS D160 transponder, 285 MDS D200 transponder, 293 MDS D339 transponder, 305 MDS D424 Transponder, 332 MDS D425 Transponder, 335 MDS D428 transponder, 343 MDS D460 Transponder, 347 MDS D521 transponder, 353 MDS D522 transponder, 356 MDS D524 transponder, 365 MDS D525 transponder, 368 MDS D526 transponder, 373 MDS D528 transponder, 376 Transponder MDS D126, 270 Transponder MDS D139, 279 Transponder MDS D165, 289 Transponder MDS D261, 297 Transponder MDS D324, 301 Transponder MDS D400, 312 Transponder MDS D421, 318 Transponder MDS D422, 323 Transponder MDS D423, 327 Transponder MDS D426, 340 Transponder RF320T, 213 Transponder RF330T, 217 Transponder RF340T, 222 Transponder RF350T, 227 Transponder RF360T, 232 Transponder RF370T, 236 Transponder RF380T, 247 Technical Support, 434 Tracking Tolerance, 40 Tracking tolerances, 40 Training, 435 Transmission gaps, 48 Transmission window Antennas, 39 Impact of metal, 65 Reader, 38 Width, 40 Transponder Detection area, 44 Directions of motion, 44 Dwell time, 46 Mounting on metal, 64 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x 439 Index Transponder MDS D126 Technical specifications, 270 Transponder MDS D139 Technical specifications, 279 Transponder MDS D165 Technical specifications, 289 Transponder MDS D261 Technical specifications, 297 Transponder MDS D324 Technical specifications, 301 Transponder MDS D400 Technical specifications, 312 Transponder MDS D421 Technical specifications, 318 Transponder MDS D422 Technical specifications, 323 Transponder MDS D423 Technical specifications, 327 Transponder MDS D426 Technical specifications, 340 Transponder RF320T Characteristics, 211 Technical specifications, 213 Transponder RF330T Characteristics, 215 Metal-free area, 216 Technical specifications, 217 Transponder RF340T Characteristics, 220 Metal-free area, 221 Technical specifications, 222 Transponder RF350T Characteristics, 224 Metal-free area, 224 Technical specifications, 227 Transponder RF360T Characteristics, 229 Metal-free area, 229 Technical specifications, 232 Transponder RF370T Characteristics, 234 Metal-free area, 235 Technical specifications, 236 Transponder RF380T Metal-free area, 242 Technical specifications, 247 U User data Calculation, 47 440 SIMATIC RF300 System Manual, 07/2016, C79000-G8976-C345-0x
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2019-06-06 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2016-09-09 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2019-06-06
|
||||
1 2 |
2016-09-09
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Siemens AG
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0006191076
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
|
||||
1 2 |
Nuernberg, N/A 90475
|
|||||
1 2 |
Germany
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
NXW
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
RF350R02
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
T****** E******** S********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Manager, Compliance Engineering
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
00499********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
00499********
|
||||
1 2 |
t******@siemens.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
CSA Group Bayern GmbH
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
C**** J****
|
||||
1 2 |
J**** P******
|
|||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Ohmstr. 1-4
|
||||
1 2 |
Strasskirchen, 94342
|
|||||
1 2 |
Germany
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
94249********
|
||||
1 2 |
49942******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
49942********
|
||||
1 2 |
c******@csagroup.org
|
|||||
1 2 |
j******@csagroup.org
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | RFID Reader 13.56 MHz | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Class II permissive change due to the addition of components designed to improve ESD performance. | ||||
1 2 | Only those antennas documented in this filing may be used with this device. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
TUV SUD Product Service GmbH
|
||||
1 2 |
CSA Group Bayern GmbH
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
M******** B****
|
||||
1 2 |
F****** S****
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
49942********
|
||||
1 2 |
49-94********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+49 9********
|
||||
1 2 |
49-94********
|
|||||
1 2 |
m******@tuev-sued.de
|
|||||
1 2 |
f******@csagroup.org
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC